Home

3G3FV User`s Manual - Products

Contents

1. 7 39 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Setting Function Control mode value Vif Open loop Flux w PG Vector vector During speed limit ON During speed limit Zero servo end ON Zero servo During run 2 ON Frequency output OFF Base block DC braking initialization operation stop m Analog Inputs H3 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display Forge setting Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Signal 0 0to 10V selection 1 Oto 10V terminal 13 Voltage Term 13 Signal Gain termi Sets the frequency when 10 V nal 13 is input as a percentage of the maximum frequency Terminal 13 Gain Bias termi Sets the frequency when 0 V is nal 13 input as a percentage of the maximum frequency Terminal 13 Bias Multi func 0 Oto 10V tion analog 1 Oto 10V input signal selection terminal 16 Term 16 Signal Selection Select from the functions listed Terminal 16 on the following table Refer to page 6 92 Terminal 16 Sel Gain termi Sets the input gain level when nal 16 terminal 16 is 10 V The contents in the following table are taken as 100 Terminal 16 Gain Bias termi Sets the input gain level when nal 16 terminal 16 is O V The contents in the following table are taken
2. 6 3 2 Droop Control Function Droop control is a function that allows the user to set the amount of motor slip When a single load is operated with two motors such as in a crane conveyor a high resistance motor a motor in which the secondary winding s resistance is increased resulting in an increased amount of slip is normally used to adjust the load balance as shown in the following diagram The balance of the load is very different with different amounts of slip Motor A s torque Torque X characteristics Torque Motor A s torque characteristics Motor B s torque characteristics Load torque Load torque Tg Motor B s torque characteristics Ta Tp gt gt 0 Ta Tpx0 Reference Speed Reference Speed speed speed e Load balance when using a general purpose motor e Load balance when using a high resistance motor If droop control is used a high resistance motor s characteristics can be set for a general purpose mo tor Also it is easy to make adjustments while watching the load balance because the amount of slip can be set arbitrarily Set the amount of slip in parameter b7 01 as the percentage of slip when the maximum frequency is input and the rated torque is generated Droop control is disabled if b7 01 is set to 0 0 6 17 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Parameter b7 02 is used to adjust the responsiveness of droop control Increase this setting if vibration o
3. 7 43 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 7 2 7 Protection Parameter Lists m Motor Overload L1 Name Description Control mode Display name V f Open with loop PG vec tor Motor protection Sets whether the motor overload selection function is enabled or disabled at electric thermal overload relay 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note In some applications when the Inverter power supply is turned off the thermal value is reset so even if this parameter is set to 1 Enabled protection may not be effective When several motors are con nected to one Inverter set to 0 Disabled and ensure that each motor is installed with a protec tion device Motor protection Sets the electric thermal detection time constant time in units of seconds Note Usually setting is not necessary The default setting is 15096 overload for one minute When the motor s overload re MOL Time Const sistance is known set at the overload resistance when the motor is hot started Always leave a margin for error MOL Fault Select Power Loss Ridethrough L2 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range settmg vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Momentary Disabled Undervoltage power loss fault detection selection Enabled Restarted when the power returns within the time for L2 02 When L2
4. 7 26 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range setting Vit V f Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Number of Sets the number of motor poles motor poles Note These values will auto matically be set if they Number of were set during auto tun Poles ing Motor Sets the motor phase to phase phase to resistance in Q units phase re Note These values will be auto sistance matically set if auto tuning Term is started Resistance Motor Sets the voltage drop due to leakage motor leakage inductance as a inductance percentage of the motor rated voltage Leak Note These values will be auto Inductance matically set if auto tuning is started Motor Sets the motor iron core iron core saturation coefficient at 50 of saturation magnetic flux coefficient Note These values will be auto 1 matically set if auto tuning Saturation is started Comp1 Motor Sets the motor iron core iron core saturation coefficient at 7596 of saturation magnetic flux coefficient Note These values will be auto 2 matically set if auto tuning Saturation is started Comp2 Mechanical Sets motor mechanical loss as loss a percentage of motor rated output W Note Usually setting is not nec essary Adjust in the fol lowing circumstances When torque loss is large Mechanical due to motor bearing
5. Note 1 To enable PID control set 1 through 4 Normally 2 or 4 is used for measured value derivative PID control Note 2 If the target speed of the application e g tension control is rather clear and PID control is required for fine tuning set 3 or 4 for frequency reference and PID control Setting Target Values for PID Control The following guidelines can be used to select target values for PID Control Frequency reference input The frequency source selected for parameter b1 01 is used as the voltage Terminal 13 target value Note 1 If the PID control target value is not set for a multi function ana log input or frequency reference current selection H3 05 Setting via Digital Operator H3 09 then the setting of b1 01 is used automatically Note 2 Frequency references 2 to 8 and the inching reference are enabled regardless of the setting of b1 01 Option frequency reference Note 3 Operation will be clearer if 01 03 is set to 1 unit when set ting from a Digital Operator Multi function analog input Set C for the function selection of multi function analog input terminal Terminal 16 16 H3 05 to select the PID target value Frequency reference current Set C for the function selection of frequency reference current Terminal 14 terminal 14 H3 09 to select the PID target value Note When using different input signals for frequency reference and PID control set the PID
6. These parameters cannot be changed during operation Note The frequency reference upper and lower limits are set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04 in increments of 196 Internal frequency reference Frequency reference upper limit d2 01 7 Frequency reference lower limit d2 02 Set frequency reference m Setting Prohibiting Frequency Jump Frequencies d3 This function allows the prohibition or jumping of certain frequencies within the Inverter s output fre quency range so that the motor can operate without resonant vibrations caused by some machine sys tems It is also used for deadband control Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Jump Freq 1 Basic or Advanced Jump Freq 2 Basic or Advanced Jump Freq 3 Basic or Advanced Jump Bandwidth Basic or Advanced These parameters cannot be changed during operation To disable this function set the jump frequency references d3 01 to d3 03 to 0 0 Hz For d3 01 to d3 03 set the center values of the frequencies to be jumped For d3 04 set the jump frequency bandwidth The jump frequency the jump bandwidth becomes the jump frequency range Operation is prohibited within the jump frequency range but changes during acceleration and decelera tion are smooth with no jumps 6 64 Adv
7. 7 33 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode z range settin Display g g Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Output Effective when a Pulse Monitor pulse Card is used Sets the number multiple of output pulses selection 0 1F 1 6F 2 10F 3 12F 4 36F Note F the output frequency displayed in Hz PO 36F Example When 0 1F is Selection set and the output fre quency is 60 Hz 60 pulses per second are output 50 duty E 15 Selects inverter operation to operation perform when a selection communications error occurs at the SYSMAC BUS Wired I F Card E 15 Det 0 Decelerate to stop Sel 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop 3 Continue operation Commu Selects the type of input used nications for the communications external external fault input from communications fault input CompoBus D Communications input type Card 0 Normally open input EFO 1 N lly cl i Selection Normally closed input Commu Selects the detection method for nications used for the communications external external fault input from fault input communications CompoBus D detection Communications Card method 0 Always detect EFO 1 Detect during operation Detection Commu Selects the inverter operation to nications perform when there is an external communications external fault fault input
8. NNNJNN Note 1 The setting range for the acceleration deceleration times depends upon the setting in C1 10 Acc Dec Units The table shows the setting range when the factory setting is used for C1 10 If C1 10 is set to 0 the setting range will be 0 00 to 600 00 s Note 2 Parameters C1 01 through C1 04 can be changed during operation but C1 05 through C1 08 cannot m Emergency Stop Time Setting C1 09 Parameter C1 09 sets the deceleration time that will be used when an emergency stop signal is input or a fault is detected it can be changed during operation The deceleration time is the time required to go from 100 to 0 of the maximum frequency When using an emergency stop input set a multi function input H1 01 through H1 06 to Fast Stop The emergency stop time is effective for the following faults Set a stopping method for each e Inverter overheating OH pre alarm Set in L8 03 e Pulse generator faults Set in F1 02 through F1 04 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range See setting wit v f with Open Loop Flux note Control Vector Vector C1 09 Fast Stop Time 0 0 to 6000 0 Basic or Advanced Note The setting range for the emergency stop deceleration time depends upon the setting in C1 10 Acc Dec Units The table shows the setting range when the factory setting is used for C1 10 If C1 10 is set to 0 the setting range will be 0 00 to 600 00 s
9. 5 34 Basic Operation Chapter 5 The timing of the initial excitation function depends on the zero speed operation method selected with b1 05 as shown in the following diagrams ON Run command OFF Frequency reference from analog input 0 Inverter s internal frequency reference e b1 05 20 Soft start input RUN at Frequency Ref Initial excitation Initial excitation BB BB e b1 05 1 Baseblock no STOP i m After the frequency reference falls below iti itati 9 E 1 09 initial excitation starts when the Initial excitation from E1 09 m motor speed drops below b2 01 88 ae ae e b1 05 2 i WE After the run command goes OFF initial excitation starts when the motor speed drops below b2 01 RUN at Min Frequency io wr ak i _ _ gt BB x n BB e b1 05 2 3 RUN at Zero RPM After the run command goes OFF initial excitation starts when the motor speed drops below b2 01 tee ri S e E oa panim BB Zero speed Zero speed BB Note 1 Initial excitation is started from b2 01 excitation level when decelerating A setting of b2 01 E1 09 is valid only with flux vector control Note 2 The current level for the initial excitation function is set in E2 03 no load current The DC braking injection current b2 02 isn t used with flux vector control and can t be set 5 4 3 Auto tuning a Inverter
10. ters per line LOCAL REMOTE 7 JOG 4 Keys D 4 Execute operations such as setting parameters REV RESET monitoring JOG and auto tuning e e STOP Function Operation Mode Switches between Operator and parameter setting run command and Selection Key frequency reference This key can be enabled or disabled with a parameter setting 02 02 Menu Key Displays each mode D m o a m Escape Key Returns to the status before the Enter Key is pressed LH Jog Key Enables JOG operation when the SG3FV is in operation with the Digital Operator Forward Reverse Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the 3G3FV is in Rotation Selection Key operation with the Digital Operator Reset Digit Selection Selects digits for parameter settings Also acts as the reset key when Key an fault has occurred see note Increment Key Selects modes groups functions parameter names and set values This key increases numbers when pressed Decrement Key Selects modes groups functions parameter names and set values This key decreases numbers when pressed Enter Key Enters modes functions parameters and set values after they are set Run Key Starts the 3G3FV running when the 3G3FV is in operation with the Digital Operator Stop Key Stops the 3G3FV running This key can be enabled or disabled with a parameter setting 02 02 in operation with the con
11. Considerations When Wiring Control Circuit Terminals e Wire control signal lines separately from the main circuit lines and other power lines e Wire control circuit terminals 9 10 18 19 and 20 contact outputs separately from terminals 1 to 8 21 22 23 25 26 27 33 and 11 to 17 e Connect shielded wire to terminal 12 G e Insulate the shielded areas with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment 2 39 Installation Chapter 2 2 2 6 Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards PG Speed Control Cards are used for executing speed control using a pulse generator PG There are four types of PG speed control as shown below Select the type that fits the application and control method 3G3FV PPGA2 A phase single pulse input for open collector output special purpose V f control 3G3FV PPGB2 A B phase pulse input for open collector output special purpose vector control 3G3FV PPGD2 A phase single pulse input line driver input special purpose V f control 3G3FV PPGX2 A B Z phase pulse input line driver input special purpose vector control Installing a PG Speed Control Card 1 Turn off the main circuit power supply and leave it off for at least one minute before removing the front cover of the Inverter or at least three minutes for Inverters of 30 KW or more Check to be sure that the CHARGE light is OFF 2 Insert the spacer which is provided into the spacer hole in the Inverter s
12. User Clears or stores user initial parameter values initial val 0 Stores not set ues 1 Begins storing Records the set parameters as user initial values 2 Allclear Clears all recorded user initial values User De Note When the set parameters faults are recorded as user ini tial values 1110 will be displayed in the Initialize mode A1 03 Inverter ca Do not set pacity Note This parameter is set by selection the manufacturer Inverter Model Frequency When the frequency reference reference is set on the Digital Operator s setting frequency reference monitor method sets whether the Enter Key is necessary 0 Enter Key needed 1 Enter Key not needed Note When set to 1 the Invert er accepts the frequency reference without Enter Key operation Operator M O P Operation Sets the operation when the selection Digital Operator is when Digi disconnected tal Operator 0 Disabled Operation is discon continues even if the Digital nected Operator is disconnected Enabled OPR is detected at Digital Operator Oper disconnection Inverter Detection output is cut off and fault contact is operated Cumulative Sets the cumulative operation operation time in hour units time setting Note Operation time is calcu Elapsed lated from the set values Time Set Cumulative Cumulative time when the operation Inverter power is on All
13. Frequency set ting resolution Digital references Analog references 0 01 Hz Less than 100 Hz 0 1 Hz 100 Hz or higher 0 03 Hz 60 Hz 11 bits sign Output fre quency resolu tion 0 001 Hz Overload capacity 150 of rated current for one minute Frequency set ting signal 0 to 10 VDC 20 KQ 0 to 10 VDC 20 KQ voltage input or 4 to 20 mA 250 Q current input Acceleration Deceleration time 0 01 to 6000 0 s 4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings Braking torque Approximately 20 Increment possible with an external braking resistor Voltage fre quency charac teristics Select vector control one from 15 types of fixed V f patterns or set a user V f pattern Protective Functions Model number A2004 A2007 A2015 A2037 A2075 A2110 B2185 B2300 B2370 B2450 B2750 3G3FV E Motor protec tion Protection by electronic thermal Instantaneous overcurrent protection Stops at approx 20096 of rated output current Overload protection Stops in one minute at approx 15096 of rated output current Overvoltage protection Stops when main circuit DC voltage is approx 410 V Undervoltage protection Stops when main circuit DC voltage is approx 190 V Momentary power inter ruption com pensation selection Stops for 15 ms or more By selecting the momentary power interruption mod
14. Frequency Effective when Desired detection frequency ref setting agree 1 level Frequency detection 1 Frequency detection 2 are set Spd Agree for multi function output Level Frequencies to be detected are set in Hz units Frequency Effective when Frequency detection ref out agree 1 Desired width frequency ref setting agree 1 Frequency detection 1 Frequency detection 2 are set Spd Agree for multi function output Sets Width the frequency detection width in Hz units Frequency Effective when Desired detection frequency ref setting agree 2 level Frequency detection 3 Frequency detection 4 are set Spd Agree for multi function output Lvla Frequencies to be detected are set in Hz units Frequency Effective when Frequency detection ref out agree 2 Desired width frequency ref setting agree 1 Frequency detection 3 Frequency detection 4 are set Spd Agree for multi function output Sets Wath the frequency detection width in Hz units 7 47 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range setting Display Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Operation 0 Stop Operation follows the when frequency reference frequency 1 Operation at 80 speed reference is continues A
15. N Motor speed response Time e Adjusting ASR Proportional Gain 1 C5 01 This gain setting adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control loop The responsiveness is in creased when this setting is increased Usually this setting is higher for larger loads Vibration will occur if this setting is increased too much The following diagram shows changes that occur in the response when the ASR proportional gain is changed The proportional gain is high Vibration occurs when the gain is too high Motor speed P The proportional gain is low Time 5 42 Basic Operation Chapter 5 e Adjusting ASR Integral Time 1 C5 02 This parameter sets the speed control loop s integral time Lengthening the integral time lowers the re sponsiveness and weakens the resistance to external influences Vibration will occur if this setting is too short The following diagram shows changes that occur in the response when the ASR integral time is changed Short integral time Motor speed ES 3 Long integral time Time m Different Gain Settings for Low speed High speed Switch between low speed and high speed gain when vibration occurs because of resonance with the mechanical system at low speed or high speed e Setting the Gain Switching Frequency C5 07 Set the switching frequency to about 8096 of the motor s operating frequency or the frequency at which vibration occurs
16. 3 T1 T2 T3 100 22 r S200 s400 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B4750 E L1 L2 L8 3 T1 T2 T3 60 x 2P 22 r S200 s400 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B411K E L1 L2 L3 3 T1 T2 T3 60 x 2P 30 r S200 s400 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B416K E L1 L2 L3 3 T1 T2 T3 100 x 2P 50 r s200 s400 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B418K E L1 L2 L8 1 3 T1 T2 T3 325 x 2P 50 r S200 s400 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B422K E L1 L2 L8 1 3 T1 T2 T3 325 x 2P 60 r S200 s400 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B430K E L1 L2 L8 1 3 T1 T2 T3 325 x 2P 60 r S200 s400 Note The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 C 2 26 0 5 to 5 5 Installation Chapter 2 e Round Solderless Terminals and Tightening Torque Wire thickness Terminal Tightening screw torque N m Note Determining Wire Size Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 296 of the rated volt age Line voltage drop is calculated as follows Line voltage drop V 8 x wire resistance Q km x wire length m x current A x 1073 2 27 Installation Chapter 2 Wiring on the Input Side of the Main Circuit
17. Acceleration Deceleration Time Switching Frequency C1 11 When the acceleration deceleration time switching frequency is set in C1 11 the acceleration and de celeration times will be changed automatically as the frequency passes the set level This parameter cannot be changed during operation 5 12 Basic Operation Chapter 5 The Multi Accel Decel 1 and Multi Accel Decel 2 inputs will have priority when Multi Accel Decel 1 and Multi Accel Decel 2 have been set in the multi function inputs H1 01 through H1 06 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range See setting wit V f with Open Loop Flux note Control Vector Vector C1 11 Aco Dec SW Freq 0 0to 400 0 Hz 0 0 Advaned Output frequency Acc Dec Time Switching Frequency C1 11 C1 07 C1 01 C1 02 C1 08 Acceleration Deceleration Time 1 C1 01 and C1 02 are used when the output frequency 2 C1 11 Acceleration Deceleration Time 4 C1 07 and C1 08 are used when the output frequency C1 11 5 1 6 Disabling Reverse Operation b1 04 Parameter b1 04 is used to enable and disable reverse command inputs This parameter can be set to 1 to disable reverse operation when necessary This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector b1 04
18. Factor Default setting Default setting Valid access levels Vif Control V f with PG Open Loop Vector Advanced Valid access levels Vif Control V f with PG Open Loop Vector Advanced Flux Vector Note 2 Fine tune the gain or time constant if the rotation of the motor is unstable causing hunting to occur or the torque and speed responsiveness of the motor is low Set parameter C8 09 to a larger value if hunting occurs Set the parameter C8 08 to a smaller value if hunting cannot be suppressed with the parameter C8 09 e Set parameter C8 09 to a smaller value within a range where no hunting occurs if the torque and speed responsiveness of the motor are low To increase the gain set parameter C8 08 to a larger value within a range where no hunting occurs 6 5 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 6 1 4 Setting Magnetic Flux Characteristics for Open loop Vector Control Set the following parameter to select the method for V f calculation to determine the magnetic flux char acteristics The default setting does not normally need to be changed Set the parameter if stable slip compensation is required in the constant output area where the operating frequency is as high as or higher than the rated frequency Parameter Display Setting Default Valid access levels number name range setting Vit WE wn Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector C3 05 Flux Se Advanced lect S
19. Motor output terminals 3 phase 200 to 230 VAC correspond to input voltage Braking Resistor Unit connection terminals DC reactor DC reactor DC power supply connection terminal connection terminal input terminal 1 62 1 2 1 0O DC power supply DC power supply Braking Unit input terminal input terminal connection terminal 1 O1 O 823 2 Braking Unit Braking Unit SC terminal connection terminal a note 1 93 O Cooling fan power See note 2 supply input terminal Ground the terminal at a resistance of less than 100 Q Note 1 Don t connect a DC power supply Otherwise equipment trouble may occur Note 2 These are the cooling fan power supply and control circuit power supply input terminals 2 15 Installation Chapter 2 e 400 V Class Model 3G3FV A4004 to A4150 B4185 to B4450 B4550 to B416K E B418K E to B430K E Maximum 0 4 to 15 kW 18 5 to 45 kW 55 to 160 kW 185 to 300 kW applied motor capacity Power supply input terminals 3 phase 380 to 460 VAC 50 60 Hz Motor output terminals 3 phase 380 to 460 VAC correspond to input voltage Braking Resistor Unit connection terminals DC reactor DC power supply DC power supply connection terminal input terminal input terminal 81 G2 1 1 DC power supply Braking Unit pet input terminal connection terminal 1 22 4 3 C Braking Unit Braking Unit l connection terminal c
20. v Model 3G3FV Dimensions mm D A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4037 2 2 Installation Chapter 2 m 3G3FV A2055 A2075 A4055 A4075 e External Dimensions e Mounting Dimensions Two 7 dia Four M6 d 3 K e e Y 186 re m 3G3FV A2110 A2150 A4110 A4150 e External Dimensions e Mounting Dimensions Two 7 dia Four M6 e a y S Y 236 m gt Note The dashed lines apply only to the A2150 2 3 Installation Chapter 2 m 3G3FV B2185 B2220 B4185 B4220 B4300 B4450 e External Dimensions e Mounting Dimensions Four M6 H1 i D1 Las 275 T 7 285 max Voltage class Model 3G3FV Dimensions mm H1 200 V B2185 B2220 450 435 400 V B4185 B4220 450 435 B4300 B4370 B4450 625 610 2 4 Installation m 3G3FV B2300 B2370 B2450 B2550 B4550 B4750 E e External Dimensions Two 12 dia Voltage class 200 V Model 3G3FV B2300B2370 Chapter 2 e Mounting Dimensions Four M10 Ht K i 215 ie 130 350 max 425 Ww B2450 B2550 475 400 V B4550 B4750 E 455
21. 8 15 Maintenance Operations Chapter 8 e The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected The load may be too big The 3G3FV has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost function but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too big Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load Also consider increasing the motor ca pacity e The motor only rotates in one direction Reverse run prohibited is selected If b1 04 prohibition of reverse operation is set to 1 reverse run prohibited the Inverter will not receive reverse run commands To use both forward and reverse op eration set b1 04 to 0 If the Direction of the Motor s Rotation is Reversed The motor s output wiring is faulty When the Inverter s T1 U T2 V and T3 W are properly con nected to the motor s T1 U T2 V and T3 W the motor operates in a forward direction when a for ward command is executed The forward direction depends on the maker and the motor type so be sure to check the specifications Switching two wires among the T1 U T2 V and T3 W will reverse the direction of rotation If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow e The torque limit has been reached When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7 01 to L7 04 no torque will be output beyond that limit This can cause the torque to be insufficient or the acceler
22. Droop Control function settings Energy Saving Not used Can t be set Zero Servo Zero servo function settings Tuning Accel Decel Acceleration deceleration time settings S Curve Acc Dec S curve characteristics for accel decel times Motor Slip Comp Motor temperature compensation function adjustment Torque Comp Not used Can t be set ASR Tuning Speed control loop adjustment Carrier Freq Carrier frequency settings Hunting Prev Not used Can t be set Factory Tuning Not used Can t be set Reference Preset Reference Frequency reference settings when using Operator Reference Limits Frequency upper and lower limit settings Jump Frequencies Prohibited frequency settings Sequence Up Down Accel Decel stop hold frequency setting Torque Control Torque control settings and adjustment V f Pattern Motor Setup Motor parameters Motor parameters set automatically with auto tuning Control Method 2 Control mode settings for second motor V f Pattern 2 Motor Setup 2 Parameter settings for second motor Options 6 16 PG Option Setup Parameter settings for a PG Speed Control Card Al 14 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Command Card DI 08 16 Setup Parameter settings for a Digital Command Card AO 08 12 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Mon
23. N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been turned OFF Not doing so may result in electrical shock Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel Not doing so may result in electrical shock or fire Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit Not doing so may result in injury Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 Q or less for the 200 V AC class or 10 Q or less for the 400 V AC class Not connecting to a proper ground may result in electrical shock Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short circuiting in external wiring Not doing so may result in fire Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power sup ply voltage An incorrect power supply may result in fire injury or malfunction Connect the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the manual Not doing so may result in fire Be sure to wire correctly and securely Not doing so may result in injury or damage to the product Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block Not doing so may result in fire injury or damage to the product Do not connect an AC power to the U V or W output Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction 2 11 Installation Chapter 2 2 2 1 Removing and Mounting th
24. Speed limiting circuit w Speed feedback Speed limit bias d5 05 6 20 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Torque Reference Settings e Set multi function analog input terminal 16 or frequency reference current input terminal 14 to torque reference The torque reference value cannot be set with the Digital Operator Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector H3 05 Terminal 16 Sel Oto1F 1F Basic or Advanced H3 09 Terminal 14 Sel 1to 1F 1F Advanced Note Set either one of these parameters to torque reference setting 13 These parameters cannot be changed during operation e Next set the signal level for the analog input terminal that was set to torque reference These parame ters cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif Vif with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector H3 04 Term 16 Signal 0 or 1 Basic or Advanced H3 08 Term 14 Signal 0 to 2 Advanced Signal Level Settings Setting Function 0 to 10 V input When H3 08 is being set be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1 0 to 10 V input When H3 08 is being set be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1 4 to 20 mA input H3 08 only Note 1 Set the proper signal level for the torque reference that you wa
25. a 50 min 0 50 min 200 min nt e 200 V Class Dimensions mm C Screws mo NO PO N Lx tl e 400 V Class Dimensions mm C Screws 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 9 16 Specifications Chapter 9 e Braking Resistor Yaskawa Electric 3G3IV PERF150WJ The 3GS3IV PERF150W JLI shortens deceleration time by consuming the motor s regenerative energy by means of a resistor Usage rate 396 ED Note The usage rate 3 ED means that 3 of the operation time in one cycle can be used for braking deceleration e Standard Models Inverter Braking Resistor Approx Voltage class Maximum 3G3IV Resistor Number used braking torque applicable PERF150WJC specifications 3 ED motor capacity kW 200 V class 150 W 200 Q 220 150 W 200 Q 125 150 W 100 Q 125 150 W 70 Q 120 150 W 62 Q 100 400 V class 150 W 750 Q 230 150 W 750 Q 130 150 W 400 Q 125 150 W 300 Q 115 150 W 200 Q 110 See note Note Usage rate 2 e External Dimensions mm 9 17 Specifications Chapter 9 e Digital Operator Connecting Cable 3G3FV PCNI 125 This is a special cable for the 3G3FV Series It is used for connecting the Inverter t
26. e Trim Control Increase and Decrease Settings 1C and 1D Trim Control Trim Control Output frequency Increase Decrease Reference frequency trim control level d4 02 Reference frequency trim control level d4 02 Reference frequency Reference frequency e The trim control increase function adds the level in d4 02 to the analog frequency reference and the trim control decrease function subtracts the level in d4 02 to the analog frequency reference e These functions are effective when the frequency reference is input from an analog input e These functions can be used independently or together e The analog frequency reference won t be changed when both the trim control increase and decrease inputs are ON e The output frequency is limited to zero when the trim control decrease input is ON and the result of the subtraction is less than zero Note Select and set one of the following functions for multi function input Do not set more than one of them otherwise a setting error OPE3 will result 6 83 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold Setting A UP and DOWN Commands Settings 10 and 11 e Trim Control Increase and Decrease Settings 1C and 1D e Analog Frequency Reference Sample Hold Setting 1E e Analog Frequency Reference Sample Hold Setting 1E This function retains the analog input in the Inverter e f the analog frequency reference sample hold inp
27. m Frequency Reference Terminal 14 Current Input H3 08 and H3 09 Terminal 14 must be set to frequency reference with parameter H3 09 in order to use terminal 14 as the frequency reference terminal the frequency reference setting is 1F Neither H3 08 nor H3 09 can be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector H3 09 Terminal 14Sel__ ttotF MF Advanced After setting parameter H3 09 set terminal 14 s signal level with H3 08 The frequency reference cur rent is valid when parameter b1 01 has been set to 1 5 5 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector H3 08 Termi4Signa 0t02 2 Advanced o i O Terminal 14 Signal Level Settings Setting Function 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 10 VDC input 10 to 10 VDC 10 to 10 VDC input A negative voltage is a command for rotation in the opposite direction 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA input Note When the terminal is being used as a voltage input terminal setting O or 1 jumper J1 must be disconnected on the control board See the following diagram The terminal s input resistor will be destroyed if the terminal is used for a voltage input with jumper J1 connected e When frequency references are be
28. 3G3EV PLNFD4103DY 3G3EV PLNFD2203DY 3 7 3G3EV PLNFD4153DY 3G3EV PLNFD2303DY 5 5 3G3EV PLNFD4203DY 3GS3IV PFN258L4207 7 5 3G3EV PLNFD4303DY 3GS3IV PFN258L5507 11 3GS3IV PFN258L4207 3GSIV PFN258L7534 15 18 5 3GSIV PFN258L5507 3GS3IV PFN258L 10035 22 3GS3IV PFN258L7534 3GSIV PFN258L 13035 30 3GS3IV PFN258L 10035 3GS3IV PFN258L 18007 37 45 3GS3IV PFN258L 13035 3GSIV PFN359P25099 55 3G3IV PFN258L1 8007 3G3IV PFN359P30099 75 110 3G3IV PFN359P30099 3GS3IV PFN359P25099 x 2P Connection Example 3 phase input Noise filter SYSDRIVE 160 185 3GS3IV PFN359P25099 x 2P 220 3G3IV PFN359P30099 x 2P 300 3G3IV PFN359P30099 x 2P Specifications Chapter 9 Dimensions Dimensions 1 Three phase Input Dimensions 2 Three phase Input MINE ae Sla Ulo oin VIO ojs wlo ala 9r Ivey elo e K H Lp i Bol 8 Figure Dimension mm above H max A Mounting screw PLNFD2103DY M4 x 4 20 mm PLNFD2153DY M4 x 4 20 mm PLNFD2203DY M4 x 4 20 mm PLNFD2303DY M4 x 6 20 mm PLNFD4053DY M4 x 6 30 mm PLNFD4103DY M4 x 6 30 mm PLNFD4153DY M4 x 6 30 mm PLNFD4203DY M4 x 6 30 mm PLNFD4303DY M4 x 6 30 mm
29. 9 24 Specifications Chapter 9 External Figure 1 External Figure 2 A J Mounting A J Mounting Screw B screw ie 7 B 2 BENUN BUANN C a External Figure 3 External Figure 4 A J Mounting 42 210 210 42 B 1 screw i EX r above PFN258L4207 PFN258L5507 PFN258L7534 PFN258L10035 PFN258L13035 PFN258L18007 PFN359P25099 PFN359P30099 9 25 Specifications Chapter 9 e 3G3IV PLF Connect the 3G3IV PLF Output Noise Filter Tokin Corp noise generated by the Inverter from flowing to the motor Standard Specifications and External Dimensions 200 V class Maximum motor capacity kW Inverter capacity kVA Output Noise Filter to the motor output side of the Inverter to prevent the Output Noise Filter Model 3G3IV PLF320KA Rated current A PLF350KA PLF350KA PLF350KA x 2P PLF350KA x 2P PLF350KA x 2P PLF350KA x 3P PLF350KA x 3P PLF3110KB x 2P PLF3110KB x 2P PLF3110KB x 3P PLF3110KB x 4P 400 V class 9 26 PLF310KB PLF320KB PLF320KB PLF335KB PLF335KB PLF345KB PLF375KB PLF375KB PLF3110KB PLF3110KB PLF375KB x 2P PLF3110KB x 2P PLF3110KB x 3P
30. PLF3110KB x 4P PLF3110KB x 4P PLF3110KB x 5P PLF3110KB x 6P Specifications Chapter 9 External Dimensions Dimensions D E PLF320KA TE K5 5 M4 PLF350KA TE K22 M6 PLF310KA TE K5 5 M4 PLFS20KB TE K5 5 M4 PLFS35KB TE K5 5 M4 PLF345KB TE K22 M6 PLF375KB TE K22 M6 PLF3110KB TE K60 M8 Appearance e Output Noise Filter Tokin Corp 3G3IV PLF This Noise Filter controls the noise generated by the Inverter from disseminating to the power supply side Connect it to the motor output 9 27 Specifications Chapter 9 e Standard Models Maximum applicable motor capacity 200 V class 400 V class Inverter capacity KVA Output Noise Filter Model 3G3IV PLF310KA Rated current A Inverter capacity kVA Output Noise Filter Model 3G3IV PLF310KB Rated current A PLF310KA PLF310KB PLF310KA PLF310KB PLF310KA PLF310KB PLF320KA PLF310KB PLF350KA PLF320KB PLF350KA PLF320KB PLF350KA x 2P PLF335KB PLF350KA x 2P PLF335KB PLF350KA x 2P PLF345KB PLF350KA x 3P PLF375KB PLF350KA x 3P PLF375KB PLF3110KB x 2P PLF3110KB PLF3110KB x 2P PLF3110KB PLF3110KB x 3P PLF375KB x 2P PLF3110KB x 4P PLF3110KB x 2P PLF3110KB x 3P P
31. Allows setting reading of general purpose parameters Advanced Allows setting reading of all parameters Set the access level in initialize mode with parameter A1 01 e Changing the Access Level from Quick start to Basic m z I Displays initialize mode Puts the Unit in initialize mode Switches to the access level parameter Displays the access level parameter setting Changes the access level setting to BASIC ij i E e E BI Writes the new parameter setting Returns to the access level parameter display 3 5 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 The following diagram shows this procedure in flowchart format IMENU l m Setting Parameters in Each Access Level e The displays in program mode differ for each access level There is no difference in other modes e This section provides the procedure to change the acceleration time to 20 s in each access level The acceleration time C1 01 is a parameter in program mode e f the new parameter setting is not written to the Unit by pressing the Enter Key within one minute after starting the procedure the display will automatically revert to the original parameter setting In this case the procedure must be started again 3 6 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 e Parameter Setting Levels Partial MENU
32. EWS Not used Do not set Note 1 The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals external terminals so set b1 01 to 1 Note 2 The source specified for the frequence reference is used as frequency reference 1 in multi stage control If the frequence reference source is set to a control terminal the frequence ref erence analog input from the control terminal will take priority and the frequency for d1 01 will be ignored The frequency for d1 01 will be used however if operation is switched to local mode using the operation mode selection key Note 3 Regardless of the frequency source the values set for frequency reference parameters 2 to 8 d1 02 to d1 08 and the inching frequency reference parameter d1 09 will be enabled m Frequency Reference Terminal 13 Voltage Input H3 01 The frequency reference voltage is valid when parameter b1 01 has been set to 1 Parameter H3 01 is used to set the voltage range for the frequency reference voltage signal This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector H3 01 Temmi3Signa Oor 0 jBasiorAdvaned Terminal 13 Signal Level Settings 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 10 VDC input 10 to 10 VDC 10 to 10 VDC input A negative voltage is a command for rotation in the opposite direction
33. Flux Control Vector Vector E210 TcomplronLoss 01065535 W 14 Advaned Note 1 The default setting varies with the Inverter s capacity The above setting applies to 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters Note 2 Set the motor iron core loss in 1 W increments The default setting does not normally need to be changed Note 3 The set value is used as the reference value for the torque compensation function 6 15 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 6 3 Flux Vector Control This section summarizes the functions that can be used with flux vector control vector control with PG feedback and then provides detailed explanations of the functions that are specific to flux vector control 6 3 1 Summary of Flux Vector Control Functions An OK in the control mode column indicates that the parameter can be changed in that control mode The functions specific to normal V f control are marked with a x and described in more detail later in this section Application Function Sequence Comments Settings such as the reference input method Control mode Vif w PG Open loop Vector Flux Vector DC Braking DC braking function settings Speed Search Speed search function settings Delay Timers Timer function settings PID Control PID control settings Reference Hold Accel deceleration time dwell function settings Droop Control
34. Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector A1 02 Control Method 0t03 2 Quickstart Basic or Advanced Control Mode Settings Setting Function V f Control V f control without pulse generator normal V f control V f w PG Fdbk V f control with pulse generator V f control using a PG Speed Control Card Open Loop Vector Vector control without pulse generator Vector control using the Inverter s internal speed information Flux Vector Vector control with pulse generator Vector control using a PG Speed Control Card Basic Operation Chapter 5 Control Mode Characteristics Characteristic V f Control V f w PG Fdbk Open Loop Vector Flux Vector Basic control method Voltage frequency Voltage frequency Current vector con Current vector con control open loop control with speed trol without PG trol with PG compensation Speed detector Not required Required Not required Required pulse generator pulse generator Optional Speed Not required 3GSFV PPGA20r Not required 3G3FV PPGB2 or Detectors 3GSFV PPGD2 3GSFV PPGX2 Speed control range 1 40 1 40 1 100 1 1 000 Starting torque 150 3 Hz 150 3 Hz 150 1 Hz 15094 0 Hz Speed control preci 2 to 396 0 03 0 2 0 02 sion Torque limit Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Torque control Not possible Not possible Not possible Possible Example applications e Multiple motors e Simple speed e Variable speed e Simple ser
35. Output signal levels for multi function analog outputs Can t be output Output signal levels for multi function analog outputs Can t be output Chapter 3 Valid access levels Vit V f Open Flux w PG Vec Vec tor tor Valid access levels Vit V f Open Flux w PG Vec Vec tor tor 3 15 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 Monitoring at Startup e n operation mode the frequency reference output frequency output current and output voltage can be monitored immediately if the default settings are being used One of these four values the output voltage can be changed to a different value When a value other than the output voltage is to be moni tored set that value s number in parameter 01 01 user monitor selection e When the power is turned on the frequency reference will appear in the Unit s data display if the de fault settings are being used Any one of the four values monitored at startup frequency reference output frequency output current or the value set in parameter 01 01 can be selected to appear when the power is turned on The value that appears at startup is determined by parameter o1 02 Power On Monitor e Parameters 01 01 and 01 02 can be changed in the Basic or Advanced access levels These parame ters can be changed during operation User Monitor Selection P
36. Setting range Setting range Setting range Setting range Setting range Default setting Default setting 200 0 see note 2 Default setting Default setting Default setting 11 0 see notes 2 3 Default setting Default setting Default setting 1 9 see note 3 Chapter 6 Valid access levels Vit V f with Open Loop Control Vector Advanced Valid access levels Flux Vector Vit V f with Open Loop Control Vector Advanced Valid access levels Flux Vector Vit V f with Open Loop Control Vector Advanced Valid access levels Flux Vector Vit V f with Open Loop Control Vector Advanced Valid access levels Flux Vector Not ap plicable Vit V f with Open Loop Control Vector Advanced Valid access levels Flux Vector Not ap plicable Vit V f with Open Loop Control Vector Advanced Valid access levels Flux Vector Vit V f with Open Loop Control Vector Advanced Valid access levels Flux Vector Not ap plicable Vit V f with Open Loop Control Vector Advanced Flux Vector Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Motor Rated Slip 2 90 see Advanced note 3 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access leve
37. e Having conducted the above checks connect the power supply 4 Check the Display Status Check to be sure that there are no faults in the Inverter e If the display at the time the power is connected is normal it will read as follows Data Display Frequency Ref e When an fault has occurred the details of the fault will be displayed In that case refer to Section 8 Maintenance Operations 5 Initializing Parameters Initialize the parameters 6 Setting the Input Voltage Set the Inverter input voltage E1 01 to the correct voltage At the same time set the short pin for the 400 V class models of 18 5 KW or larger 7 Auto tuning Execute auto tuning in the open loop vector control mode When auto tuning is executed motor parameters are set automatically When this is not possible using auto tuning switch to V f control mode and set the V f pattern 8 No load Operation Start the no load motor using the Digital Operator e Set the frequency reference using the Digital Operator and start the motor using key sequences 9 Actual Load Operation Connect the mechanical system and operate using the Digital Operator When there are no difficulties using the no load operation connect the mechanical system to the motor and operate using the Digital Operator 4 3 Trial Operation Chapter 4 10 4 4 Operation Basic Operation Operation based on the basic settings required to start and stop the Inverter Refer to
38. function so that the voltage limit opera calculation in open loop vector tion control does not become saturated 0 Disabled Output voltage saturation is not limited Slip compensation is disabled Enabled Output voltage saturation is suppressed Speed accuracy is not reduced Note Be sure that there is suffi cient output current ca pacity in the inverter be cause the output current is about 10 higher when this function is enabled Output V limit The speed accuracy may be reduced when the in put voltage is very low Note When the control mode is changed the Inverter reverts to default settings The open loop vector control default settings are given above Torque Compensation C4 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range setting Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Torque Sets torque compensation gain compensa as a ratio tion gain Note Usually setting is not nec essary Adjust in the following cir cumstances When the cable is long increase the set value When the motor capacity is smaller than the capac ity of the Inverter Max applicable motor capac ity increase the set val ues Torq Comp When the motor is vibrat Gain ing decrease the set val ues When adjusting the gain be sure that the output current at low speeds does not exceed 100 of the Inverter s rated o
39. 0 0 0 cee e 10 2 Revision History 2000065 6c s2owrs l Ree zeerkkuesws3es R 1 ll Ii Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Function 1 2 Nomenclature 1 3 New Functions Introduction Chapter 1 1 1 Functions 1 2 The general purpose SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter provides full current vector control based on advanced control logic An auto tuning function allows for easy vector control The Digital Operator s display area features a 2 line by 16 character liquid crystal dis play Parameters can be displayed in up to seven languages including Japanese The parameter settings and monitor items can be understood at a glance providing an inter active feel during operation Introduction Chapter 1 m SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter Models e The following 200 and 400 V class 3G3FV Inverter models are available eA total of 21 types of Inverters are available for maximum applicable motor capacities of 0 4 to 300 kW Voltage class Protective structure Maximum applied motor capacity 200 V class NEMA1 type 3G3FV A2004 3 phase 3G3FV A2007 3GSFV A2015 3GSFV A2022 3G3FV A2037 3GSFV A2055 3GSFV A2075 3GSFV A2110 3GSFV A2150 Open chassis type 3G3FV B2185 3GSFV B2220 3G3FV B2300 3G3FV B2370 3G3FV B2450 3G3FV B2550 3G3FV B2750 E 400 V class NEMA1 type 3G3FV A4004 3 phase 3G3FV A4007 3GSFV A4015 3G3FV A4022 3G3FV A4037 3G3FV A4055 3GSFV A4075 3GSFV A411
40. 1 and 2 before connecting the DC reactor With DC and AC Reactors DC reactor optional 200 VAC 400 V SYSDRIVE 3G3FV AC reactor optional Note Be sure to remove the short bar on terminals 1 and 2 before connecting the DC reactor e Reactor Effects Harmonics are effectively suppressed when the DC reactor is used with the AC reactor as shown in the following table Harmonic suppres sion method Harmonic generation rate No reactor 5th har monic 7th har monic 11th harmon ic 13th harmon ic 17th harmon ic 19th harmon ic 23th harmon ic AC reactor DC reactor DC and AC reactors 2 36 Installation Chapter 2 Connecting the Braking Resistor e Connect the braking resistor as shown in the following diagram e When using a Braking Resistor Unit set L8 01 to 1 i e overheating protection of the braking resis tor and set L3 04 to 0 i e no decelerating stall prevention or 2 i e braking with stall prevention B1 O Inverter H B2 Q Braking resistor Caution The braking resistor s connection terminals are B1 and B2 Do not connect any other terminals Connecting any terminals other than B1 or B2 can cause the resistor to overheat resulting in damage to the equipment Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit e Connect the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to the Inverter a
41. 2 5 Installation m 3G3FV B2750 E B411K E B416K E e External Dimensions Two 14 dia Voltage class 200 V Model 3G3FV B2750 E Chapter 2 e Mounting Dimensions Four M12 Dimensions mm 400 max D2 158 400 V 2 6 B411K E 375 max 130 B416K E 400 max 158 Installation Chapter 2 m 3G3FV B418K E B422K E e External Dimensions 1084 Six 14 dia m 3G3FV B430K E e External Dimensions 1094 Six 14 dia 55 jr 5795 1550 UR 600 _103 3228 103 435max e Mounting Dimensions 285 565 4 Six M12 z 4 rd a a 7 e e 50 i 440 310 e Mounting Dimensions 298 515 Six M12 e gt E LA Mars L Pa ur ERN ite er Ed i pala e e e Y 50 440 310 H Installation Chapter 2 Two 4 dia Panel face 125 Front side of panel Back side of panel 2 1 2 Installation Conditions
42. A Advanced only Not applicable 6 8 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Note 2 These voltages are for the 200 V class Double the voltage for 400 V class Inverters Note 3 The default setting depends on the Inverter s capacity The default settings shown in the table are for 200 V class 0 4 to 1 5 kW Inverters Note 4 The default settings for E1 07 through E1 10 depend on the control mode The default set tings shown in the table are for open loop vector control Note 5 The four frequency settings must satisfy the following formula E1 04 Fax 2 E1 06 Fa gt E1 07 Fp 2 E1 09 Fm For flux vector control make the settings as follows E1 04 Fmax 2 E1 06 Fa gt E1 09 Fin Note 6 When making the V f characteristics a straight line set the same value in E1 07 middle out put frequency and E1 09 minimum output frequency In this case parameter E1 08 middle output voltage will be ignored User defined V f Pattern Output voltage V VMAX E1 05 Vc E1 08 Enos l i Frequency Hz FMIN Fp FA FMAX E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 E1 04 e Adjusting Output Voltage Adjust the output voltage when you want to output more torque at low speed such as in an elevator or when torque isn t really necessary and you want to reduce the output voltage to save energy e When generating more torque gradually increase the voltage but do not exceed 100 of the Invert
43. BCD special setting 5 digit input Only when 3G3FV PDI16H2 is used Binary input Set value is displayed in decimal notation e When binary input is used setting 7 this becomes the maximum frequency 100 speed reference when all bits are set to 1 3GSIV PD108 Maximum frequency reference when FFH 255 is set 3G3IV PD116H2 Maximum frequency reference when FFFH 4095 is set with 12 bits se lected Maximum frequency reference when 7530H 30000 is set with 16 bits selected e Setting 6 BCD special setting 5 digit input is valid only when the 3G3IV PD116H2 is used If the parameter 01 03 Display Scaling is set to 2 or a larger value normal BCD setting will be valid and the setting unit in the parameter 01 03 will be valid The sign bit is used as a data bit so only positive plus data can be set The second digit below the decimal point is set by bits 8x10 4x10 and 2x10 so the settings are made in units of 0 02 Hz If these three bits are 111 110 and 101 they will be recognized as 9 6 72 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 m Setting an Analog Monitor Card F4 When using a 3G3IV PAO08 PAO 12 Analog Monitor Card set the monitor items and gain with the fol lowing parameters Parameters F4 02 F4 04 F4 05 and F4 06 can be changed during operation while F4 01 and F4 03 cannot Parameter Display name Setting i Default Valid access level
44. Card Advanced Operation Terminal Function Digital Inputs Comments Function selection for multi function inputs Chapter 6 Control mode V f Open loop w PG Vector Flux Vector Digital Outputs Function selection for multi function outputs Analog Inputs Adjustment function selection for external analog inputs Analog Outputs Adjustment function selection for multi function analog outputs Serial Com Setup Not Used Do not change this setting Protection Motor Overload Sets electrical thermal functions that protect the motor PwrLoss Ridethru Selects the power loss processing method Stall Prevention Accel Decel Run stall prevention settings and selection Ref Detection Frequency detection settings and selection Fault Restart Fault restart function settings Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 by current Torque Limit Not used Can t be set Hdwe Protection Hardware overheating and phase loss protection settings Operator Monitor Select Selects the Operator s display and setting methods Key Selections Operator s key function selection and other parameters 6 2 2 Energy saving Control Function The energy saving control function is enabled when the energy saving command setting 63 has been set in a multi function input H1 01 through H1 06 I
45. Chapter 3 Mode MENU Operation mode Initialize mode Program mode I Auto tuning mode t Modified constants mode Note The above parameter levels are simplified levels used mainly in programming operation Group Function Parameter b Application b1 Sequence b1 01 Reference Source ADVANCED __ b1 02 Run Source b2 DC braking i b1 03 Stopping Method b2 01 Zero speed Level b2 02 DC Inj Current b3 Speed search b3 01 Spd Srch at Start b3 02 Spd Srch Current c Tuning C1 Accel Decel C1 01 Acceleration time 1 C2 S curve characteristic setting C1 02 Deceleration time 1 C2 01 SCrv Acc Start C2 02 SCrv Acc End C3 Motor slip compensation d Reference d1 Frequency C3 01 Slip Comp Gain reference presetting d1 01 Preset reference 1 d1 02 Preset reference 2 d2 Frequency upper lower limit d2 01 Ref Upper Limit d2 02 Ref Lower Limit d3 Jump frequency d3 01 Jump Freq 1 E Motor E1 V F pattern E1 01 Input Voltage
46. Label information and About this Manual Model numbers changed in Checking before Unpacking Changes to information on changing Digital Operator language Pages 1 2 1 6 and 3 13 Changes to information on changing Digital Operator language Page 1 5 Changed second item in Frequency Refer ences Pages 1 10 2 10 2 46 3 2 5 13 5 20 5 34 6 16 6 51 6 59 6 50 6 62 to 6 65 6 71 6 74 6 92 and 9 17 Added notes Page 1 11 Added section on new functions Pages 2 4 2 6 4 2 and 8 13 Changed warnings Page 2 10 Added to Multi function analog input sig nal level Page 2 21 Added information on frequence refer ence variable resistor and added graphic and note to bottom of page Pages 2 26 to 2 28 Replaced Wiring on Input Side of Main Circuit and added information on calculating inverter input power supply capacity Page 2 30 Added information on inverter motor cable length Page 2 35 Added setting for L3 04 Page 3 14 Added U1 32 to U1 38 Pages 3 25 6 2 6 9 6 13 6 31 and 6 35 Added E2 to E5 and F7 to F9 Page 3 30 Added section 3 8 Pages 5 4 to 5 5 5 8 and 5 10 Changed setting range to 0 to 4 and added descriptions and notes Pages 5 9 Added information to 2 to 39 setting and deleted This setting can t be used with flux vector control Pages 5 15 and 5 18 Added setting 17 Page 5 19 Added section section 5 2 Pages 5 22 and 5 28 Added PG Direction Minor Fault and V f over
47. Local Remote Selection operation signal selection Option Inverter Selection ON Optional Card Multi Step Reference 1 Switches between main speed and auxiliary speed when parameter H3 05 is set to 0 auxiliary frequency reference Multi Step Reference 2 Multi Step Reference 3 Jog Frequency Reference higher priority than multi step Multi Accel Decel 1 accel decel time selector 1 External Baseblock N O normally open contact External Baseblock N C normally closed contact Accel Decel Ramp Hold Pauses acceleration deceleration OH2 Alarm Signal Inverter overheating warning Terminal 16 Enable Enables the multi function analog input DIO Wl oj oj oj o ASR Selection Disables PG feedback and switches to normal V f control ASR Integral Reset Disables integral control Not used Do not input this setting UP command Always used with the DOWN command DOWN command Always used with the UP command Forward Jog command Forward jog at the speed in d1 09 Reverse Jog command Reverse jog at the speed in d1 09 Fault Reset Faults are reset when input goes OFF ON Fast Stop Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Motor 2 Selection Selection of motor 1 or motor 2 for two motor switching ON Motor 2 selected Fast stop N C OFF Decelerates to a stop when the emergency stop time set with C
48. Monitors the Inverter s internal voltage reference value for the motor s excitation current control 10 V 200 400 VAC 0 to 10 V possible CPU ID Manufacturer s CPU software ID number Can t be output ACR q Output Monitor s the current control output value for the motor s secondary current 10 V 100 ACR d Output Monitor s the current control output value for the motor s excitation current 10 V 100 OPE Detected Displays the first constant number for which an OPE error was detected Can t be output Zero Servo Pulse Multiplies the number of PG pulses by four to display the movement width at the zero servo stop point Can t be output PID Input PID reference PID reference bias PID feedback value The max frequency corresponds to 100 10 V Max frequency PID Output PID control output The max frequency corresponds to 100 10 V Max frequency 3 14 PID Setpoint PID reference PID reference bias The max frequency corresponds to 100 10 V Max frequency Fault Trace Display Current Fault Preparing for Operation Function Information on the current fault Last Fault Information on the last fault Frequency Ref Frequency reference value when the last fault occurred Output Freq Output frequency when the last fault oc curred Output Current Output current
49. Parameter Lists Chapter 7 m Sequence for Reference d4 Name Description Setting Default Control mode z etti Display P HERES V f V f Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Reference Sets whether or not frequencies frequency on hold will be recorded hold 0 Disabled when operation is function stopped or the power is selection turned on again starts at 0 Enabled when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again starts at the previous hold frequency Note This function is available when the multi function inputs accel decel Ramp Hold or UP DOWN commands MOP increase decrease are set Trim control Sets the increase decrease level frequency for analog frequency references as a percentage of the maximum frequency Note This function is available when the multi function inputs Trim Ctl Increase or Trim Ctl Decrease is set MOP Ref Memory Trim Control Lvl Torque Control d5 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 3 Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Torque con 0 Speed control C5 01 to trol selec C5 07 tion 1 Torque control Note This function is only avail able in flux vector control mode To use the function for switching between speed and torque control set to 0 and set the multi func tion input to speed tor
50. Serial Com Not used Do not set Option PCB Optional Card CompoBus D Communications Card or SYSMAC BUS I F Card EWS Not used Do not set m Setting Control Input Responsiveness b1 06 Parameter b1 06 is used to set the responsiveness of the control inputs forward reverse and multi function inputs it cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number A S setting Vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector pi 06 On inputScans oori Advamed O O o Settings 2mS 2 Scans Two scans every 2 ms Use when connecting transistor outputs 5mS 2 Scans Two scans every 5 ms Use when connecting contact outputs or switches Note Set the responsiveness to match the type of control inputs being used Use a setting of 1 if there is even one contact input 5 1 5 Acceleration Deceleration Time Settings m Acceleration Deceleration Time Units C1 10 Parameter C1 10 is used to set the units for the acceleration and deceleration time settings in C 1 01 through C1 08 Setting C1 10 to 0 allows the acceleration and deceleration times to be set very pre cisely but reduces the maximum time setting from 6000 0 s to 600 00 s This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector V
51. Settings for L8 17 Setting Function Disabled The carrier frequency is not reduced at low speed Enabled The carrier frequency is reduced at low speed For factory adjustment Do not use Disabled The OL2 detection level is not reduced at low speed Enabled The OL2 detection level is reduced at low speed 6 5 9 Operator Parameters o Operator Display Selection 01 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector User Monitor Sel 41038 6 Basicor Advanced Note This parameter can be changed during operation e n operation mode the frequency reference output frequency output current and output voltage can be monitored immediately if the default settings are being used One of these four values the output voltage can be changed to a different value When you want to monitor a value other than the output voltage set that value s number in parameter o1 01 e Use the last two digits from the U1 Monitor list U1 L to select a value Refer to page 3 12 for a table listing all of these U1 settings Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f v f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Power On Monitor 1t04 1 Basicor Advanced Note This parameter can be changed during operation 6 110 Advanced Operatio
52. The deceleration time when the NO A A A A 5 12 tion time 4 multi function input 5 18 multi accel decel time 1 and Decelera multi accel decel time 2 are tion Time 4 set to ON C1 09 Emergency The deceleration time when the NO B B B B 5 12 stop time multi function input Emergency 5 18 fast stop is set to ON Fast Stop Note This function can be used Time as a stop method when a fault has been detected C1 10 Accelera 0 0 01 second units 0 1 1 NO A A A A 5 11 tion decel 1 0 1 second units 5 18 eration time units Acc Dec Units 7 13 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range setting Vit vt Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Accelera Sets the frequency for automat tion decel ic acceleration deceleration eration switching Switching Below set frequency Accel de frequency cel time 4 above set frequency Accel decel time 1 Note The multi function input multi accel decel time 1 or multi accel decel time 2 take priority Acc Dec SW Freq Note The setting range for acceleration deceleration times will differ according to the setting for C1 10 the unit for acceleration deceleration time When C1 10 is set to 0 the setting range for accel eration deceleration times becomes 0 00 to 600 00 seconds m S curve Acceleration Deceleration C2
53. The following block diagram shows the structure of the speed loop Frequency reference Output frequency Detected speed U1 22 C5 02 04 m Gain Settings When using V f control with PG feedback set the gain at the minimum frequency and maximum fre quency e Max Frequency Gain Settings C5 01 and C5 02 Set ASR proportional gain 1 C5 01 and ASR integral time 1 C5 02 at the maximum frequency Parameter Display number name ASR P Gain 1 Setting range 0 00 to 300 00 Default setting Valid access levels Vif Control V f with PG Open Loop Vector ASR Time 1 0 000 to 10 000 s Note B Basic or Advanced Not applicable e Min Frequency Gain Settings C5 03 and C5 04 Set ASR proportional gain 2 C5 03 and ASR integral time 2 C5 04 at the minimum frequency Parameter Display Seiting range number name ASR P Gain 2 0 00 to 300 00 Factor Default setting Valid access levels Vif Control V f with PG Open Loop Vector Flux Vector ASR I Time 2 0 000 to 10 000 s Note B Basic or Advanced Not applicable The following graph shows how the proportional gain and integral time are calculated from parameters C5 01 through C5 04 P C5 01 I C5 02 P C5 03 C5 04 0 E1 04 Max frequency 5 50 Motor speed Hz Basic Operation Chapter 5 m Multi f
54. Wm Input Noise Filter Power Supply 3 phase 200 VAC 200V class 3 phase 400 VAC 400V class Omeon SYSDRIVE 3GSFV INVERTER t 3GSIV PLF Output Noise Filter 3 phase Induction Motor 3GSIV PAH 4U Analog Reference Card 3GSIV PAH 4B Analog Reference Card 3G3IV PDI08 Digital Reference Card 3GS3FV PDI16H2 Digital Reference Card 3G3FV PPGA2 PG Speed Control Card 3G3FV PPGB2 PG Speed Control Card 3G3FV PPGD2 PG Speed Control Card 3G3FV PPGX2 PG Speed Control Card CSS 3G3VF PDRT1 SIN CompoBus D Commu nications Card 3G3IV PSIG SYSMAC Bus Wire VF Card 3GS3IV PAO08 Analog Monitor Card 3GSIV PAO12 Analog Monitor Card 3G3IV PPO36F Pulse Monitor Card 9 7 Specifications Chapter 9 m Separately Mounted Options Scaling Meter KSTJ V11 Descriptions Connects to the multi functional analog output of the Inverter It displays the rotational speed of a machine or the line speed Analog Operator steel standard type 3GSIV PJVOP96 Allows frequency reference settings and ON OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a remote location 50 m max Frequency counter specifications 75 Hz 150 Hz 220 Hz Analog Operator plastic compact type 3GSIV PJVOP95 m Dedicated O
55. e Low speed Gain Adjustments C5 03 and C5 04 e Connect the actual load and adjust these parameters at zero speed e Increase ASR proportional gain 2 C5 03 until there is no vibration e Decrease ASR integral time 2 C5 04 until there is no vibration e High speed Gain Adjustments C5 01 and C5 02 e Adjust these parameters at normal operating speed e Increase ASR proportional gain 1 C5 01 until there is no vibration e Decrease ASR integral time 1 C5 02 until there is no vibration e Refer to Fine Adjustments on page 5 41 for details on making fine adjustments of high speed opera tion 5 43 Basic Operation Chapter 5 5 5 V f Control with PG With V f control with PG the user must set the motor parameters V f pattern PG Control Card settings and then adjust the speed control loop s gain 5 5 1 Setting the Motor Parameters a Inverter Input Voltage Setting E1 01 Set the Inverter s input voltage E1 01 to match the power supply voltage it cannot be changed during operation This setting is used as the reference value for functions such as the protection functions Parameter Display Setting Default Valid access levels number name range setting v f Mm m OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector E1 01 Input Voltage 155 to 255 VAC 200 Quick start Es or Advanced 310 to 510 400 Note The voltage settings shown in parentheses are the values for the 400 V class Motor Selection a
56. e The speed search function can be used to operate the motor without tripping when switching opera tion from a commercial power supply and the Inverter or starting a coasting motor e The speed search will begin after the minimum baseblock time has elapsed when the run command is input after the external search command has been turned ON e Either one of the external search functions can be set but not both 6 87 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Timing Chart Run command OFF ON External search command OFF ON 5 ms min Deceleration time set in b3 03 Maximum frequency or set frequency Frequency reference that was set Output frequency a Minimum baseblock time e Speed Torque Control Change Setting 71 OFF Speed control ON Torque control e With this setting the multi function input can be used to switch between speed and torque control Note Refer to 6 3 5 Speed Torque Control Switching Function for more details e Zero servo Command Setting 72 OFF Normal operation ON Locks position when the frequency speed reference falls below the zero speed level in b2 01 e With this setting the multi function input controls the zero servo function B9 01 and b9 02 e When the zero servo command is ON a position control loop is formed and the motor is completely stopped when the frequency speed reference falls below the excitation level set in b2 01 Note Refer to 6 3 3 Zero servo Fun
57. filter e Cable Length between Inverter and Motor As the cable length between the Inverter and the motor is increased the floating capacity between the Inverter outputs and the ground is increased proportionally The increase in floating capacity at the In verter outputs causes the high frequency leakage current to increase and this may adversely affect peripheral devices and the current detector in the Inverter s output section To prevent this from occur ring use a cable of no more than 100 meters between the Inverter and the motor If the cable must be longer than 100 meters take measures to reduce the floating capacity by not wiring in metallic ducts by using a separate cable for each phase and so on Also adjust the carrier frequency according to the cable length between the Inverter and the motor as shown in the table below Cable length 50 m max 100 m max More than 100 m Carrier frequency 15 kHz max 10 kHz max Set value C06 01 15 0 10 0 Set value C06 02 15 0 10 0 Set value C06 02 0 0 2 32 Installation Chapter 2 Note The carrier frequency setting range varies depending on the Inverter capacity 200 V class 18 5 kW max 400 V class 30 kW max 0 4 to 15 0 kHz 200 V class 22 to 75 kW 400 V class 37 to 160 kW 0 4 to 10 0 kHz 400 V class 185 to 300 kW 0 4 to 2 5 kHz e Single phase Motors Cannot Be Used The Inverter is not suited for the variable speed control of
58. high torque is required OL2 Chara and you want to set a L Spd higher carrier frequency Inverter overload characteris tics at low speed If flux vector control is be ing used and a large load is being applied continu ously at low speed either use a larger inverter or set the carrier frequency to 2 kHz in C6 01 7 2 8 Operator Parameter Lists m Monitor Select o1 Name Description De Control mode fault Display setting Vif Open Flux name with loop vector PG vector Monitor Set the number of the monitor selection item to be displayed in the earliest 4 monitor items U1 00 User Note The output monitor volt Monitor Sel age default setting can be changed 7 51 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description De Control mode fault setting Vit Open Flux with loop vector PG vector Display name Monitor Sets the monitor item to be selection displayed when the power is after turned on power on 1 Frequency reference 2 Output frequency Power On 3 Output current 4 Monitor The monitor item set for 01 01 Frequency Sets the units that will be set reference and displayed for the setting and frequency reference and display frequency monitor units 0 0 01 Hz units 1 0 0196 units Maximum frequency is 100 2 to 39 r min units Sets the motor poles Cannot be set in
59. line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter into the power supply line Connect to the power supply input side Output Noise Filter 3GSIV PLF Used to suppress noise that is generated by the inverter from affecting the power supply side Connect to the motor output side 9 9 Specifications Chapter 9 m Separately Mounted Options e Scaling Meter K3TJ V11 By connecting to the Inverter s multi function analog output analog monitor it is possible to display the number of rotations line speed and so on e Standard Models Control power supply Display KS3TJ V111R 100 to 200 VAC Red LED indicator K3TJ V111G Green LED indicator K3TJ V116R 24 VDC with insulation See note Red LED indicator K3TJ V116G Green LED indicator Note The power supply circuit and input circuit are insulated e Standard Specifications Sampling time 0 5s Display refresh period 0 5s Process value averaging method Simple average or movement average Number of process value 1 2 4 or 8 times averaging operations Max displayed digits 4 digits 1 999 to 49 999 Display 7 segment red or green LED with character height of 14 2 mm Decimal display Selected by the Up and Down Keys and parameter selector Scaling function Shift Scaling adjustment is possible with the Up and Down Keys and parameter selector Scaling range 1 999 to 9 999 Zero limit
60. o X Notapplicable Note 1 Set the torque reference filter s primary delay time constant in ms units Note 2 Increase the time constant setting if vibration occurs during torque control operation e Setting the Torque Compensation Bias e Set multi function analog input terminal 16 or frequency reference current input terminal 14 to torque compensation setting 14 e When the amount of torque loss at the load is input to one of these terminals it is added to the torque reference to compensate for the loss Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V A with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector H3 05 Terminal 16 Sel Oto1F 1F Basic or Advanced H3 09 Terminal 14 Sel 1to1F 1F Advanced Note 1 Set torque compensation setting 14 in the input terminal that wasn t set to torque reference setting 13 Note 2 These parameters cannot be changed during operation e Set the signal level for the terminal These parameters cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector H3 04 Term 16 Signal 0 or 1 Basic or Advanced H3 08 Term 14 Signal 0 to 2 Advanced Signal Level Settings Setting Function 0 to 10 V input When H3 08 is being set be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1 0 to 10 V input When H3 08 is be
61. 01 There are no parameters to set for 3G3IV PAI14U Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit VA with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector F2 01 Akt4inputSel 0 1 o BasicorAdvanced This parameter cannot be changed during operation 6 71 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Explanation of Settings Description 3 channel individual input CH1 terminal 13 CH2 terminal 14 CH3 terminal 16 3 channel additional input Sum of CH1 to CH3 is used as the frequency reference value Parameter b1 01 reference selection must be set to 1 external terminal except for when 3 channel input setting O is set When using a 3G3IV PAI14B the multi function input Option Inverter selection function setting 2 cannot be used m Setting a Digital Reference Card F3 When using a 3G3IV PDI08 PD116H2 Digital Reference Card set parameter b1 01 reference selec tion to 3 option and set the input method with parameter F3 01 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit VA with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector F3 01 DI Input Oto7 j o BasicorAdvanced This parameter cannot be changed during operation Explanation of Settings Setting Description BCD 1 unit BCD 0 1 unit BCD 0 01 unit BCD 1 Hz unit BCD 0 1 Hz unit BCD 0 01 Hz unit
62. 02 is exceeded undervoltage fault detection Pwr Enabled while CPU is Selection operating Restarts when power returns during control operations Does not detect undervoltage fault Momentary Sets the recovery time when power loss momentary power loss selection ridethru L2 01 is set to 1 in units of PwrL one second Ridethru t 7 44 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range setting Display Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Minimum Sets the Inverter s minimum baseblock baseblock time in units of one time BB second when the Inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough Note Sets the time for the mo tor s residual voltage to PwrL dissipate Baseblock t When an overcurrent oc curs when starting a speed search or DC injec tion braking increase the Set values Voltage Sets the time required to return restart time to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search in units of one second Note Set the time required for a 200 V class Inverter to re PwrL V F cover from 0 V to Rampt 200 VAC For the 400 V class In verter the time from 0 V to 400 VAC Under Sets the main circuit under voltage voltage UV detection level detection main circuit DC voltage in V level UV units Note Usually setting is not nec essary Insert a AC reac PUV Det tor and
63. 05 Ph Loss In Sel O0ori 0 Advanced 1 Note This parameter cannot be ose during operation 6 108 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e This function detects changes in the main circuit s DC voltage which indicate a power supply phase loss large imbalance in the power supply voltage or deterioration of the main circuit condenser Disabled Enabled Detects input power supply phase loss 3 phase imbalance or deterioration of the main circuit condenser Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number C S setting Vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector L amp 07 PhLossOutSel Oor 0 Advanced o O Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation e This function detects an Inverter output phase loss Disabled Enabled Detects an output phase loss at under 5 of the Inverter s rated output current e False phase loss detections may occur when the motor s capacity is small compared to the capacity of the Inverter In this case disable the detection function by setting L8 07 to O Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V f with Open Loop Control L8 10 GroundFautSel Oort 1 Advanced 1 j Settings Disabled No ground fault is protected Enabled The ground fault is protected e The ground fault protective function can be enabled or disabled
64. 09 Note 1 Reference 1 is selected when b1 01 is set to 0 Operator and the analog input terminal 13 or 14 is selected when b1 01 is set to 1 Terminals Note 2 The analog input from terminal 16 is selected when H3 05 is set to 0 Auxiliary Reference and reference 2 is selected for any other H3 05 setting 5 17 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Timing Chart Reference 8 Reference 7 Reference 4 Reference 3 Reference 2 Auxiliary speed Jog Reference Reference 1 Main speed Run Stop Multi step Reference 1 Multi step Reference 2 Multi step Reference 3 Jog Reference Note The jog reference setting has priority over the multi step reference settings e Setting 7 and 1A Multi Accel Decel Time Selector 1 and 2 Four acceleration times and four deceleration times can be set in the 3G3FV Set Multi Accel Decel 1 and 2 in multi function inputs and change the status of these inputs to switch between these accelera tion and deceleration times Multi Accel Decel 1 multi accel decel time selector 1 Multi Accel Decel 2 multi accel decel time selector 2 The following table shows which acceleration and deceleration times are selected by each possible combination of acceleration deceleration time selectors 1 and 2 Multi accel decel time selector Acceleration time Deceleration time 1 2 OFF or not set OFF or not set Acceleration time 1 C1 01 ON
65. 1 fault Saturation 2 Core saturation coefficient 2 fault The core saturation coefficients can t be tuned within the prescribed time e The rated current setting isn t correct Check and change the setting if necessary e There is a broken disconnected motor power wire Check and replace wiring components if necessary Resistance Motor wire resistance fault No load Current Motor no load current fault The motor terminal resistance or no load current setting can t be tuned within the prescribed time e The rated current setting isn t correct Check and change the setting if necessary e There is a broken disconnected motor power wire Check and replace wiring components if necessary PGO PG Open Broken PG cable detection Pulses aren t being input from the PG even though a rotation output is being sent to the motor e The cable to the PG is broken disconnected Check the wiring and correct any problems e The PG s power supply is broken disconnected Check the power supply voltage and correct if necessary PG Direction Motor direction error e The motor direction and PG direction are different Motor power lines are wrong Connect in following order U V W Encoder wiring is wrong Wire phase A phase B and correctly F1 05 is set incorrectly Set so that the directions agree Minor Fault Minor fault e A minor fault has occurred in the In
66. 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible Output Voltage Monitors the Inverter s internal output voltage reference value 10 V 200 400 VAC 0 to 10 V output DC Bus Voltage Monitors the DC voltage of the Inverter s internal main circuit 10 V 400 800 VDC 0 to 10 V output Output kWatts Monitors the output power This is an in ternally detected value 10 V Max motor capacity 0 to 10 V possible Torque Reference Monitors the internal torque reference value when vector control is used 10 V Rated torque 0 to 10 V possible status 3 12 Input Term Sts Input terminal Shows the ON OFF status of inputs U1 1 0 00000000 Terminal 1 ON Terminal 2 ON Terminal 3 ON Terminal 4 ON Terminal 5 ON Terminal 6 ON Terminal 7 ON Terminal 8 ON Can t be output Display Output Term Sts Output terminal status Preparing for Operation Function Shows the ON OFF status of outputs U1 11 00000000 ES ll 1 Terminals 9 10 ON 1 Terminal 25 ON 1 Terminal 26 ON Not used always 0 1 Terminals 18 19 20 ON Output signal levels for multi function analog outputs Can t be output Chapter 3 Valid access levels Vit V f Open Flux w PG Vec Vec tor tor Int Ctl Sts 1 Internal control status Shows the Inverter s operating status U1 1 2 00000000 1 Running 1 Ze
67. 4 types of PG Speed Control Cards but only 2 types can be used with vector control 3G3FV PPGB2 Phase A Phase B pulse inputs inputs for open collector 3G3FV PPGX2 Phase A Phase B Phase Z pulse inputs line driver inputs Select the Card according to the application and install it in the Inverter as described in 2 2 6 Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards m Setting the PG Pulse Number F1 01 Set the PG pulse generator or encoder pulse number in pulses revolution Set the number of phase A or phase B pulses in one motor revolution This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vf Vf with Open Loop Flux Control PG Vector Vector F1 01 PGPulses Rev 0 to 60 000 pr 1000 Q Note Q Quick start Basic or Advanced Not applicable m Setting the PG Rotation Direction F1 05 This parameter is used to coordinate the PG s rotation direction with the motor s rotation direction it cannot be changed during operation Generally phase A leads when the PG rotates in the clockwise direction looking from the input axis When a forward command is input to the inverter the motor rotates in the counterclockwise direction looking from the output axis These directions may be reversed in PG integrated motors or other mo tors 5 29 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Set whether phase A or phase B leads when the
68. 400 V class Inverters 5 27 Basic Operation Chapter 5 m Setting a User defined V f Pattern Setting F Parameters E1 04 through E1 10 can be set by the user when E1 03 has been set to F These param eters are read only when E1 03 isn t set to F Parameters E1 04 through E1 10 cannot be changed during operation When making the V f characteristics a straight line set the same value in E1 07 middle output frequen cy and E1 09 minimum output frequency In this case parameter E1 08 middle output voltage will be ignored Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f Vf with Open Loop Flux Control PG Vector Vector Max Frequency 40 0 to 400 0 Max Voltage 0 0 to 255 0 Base Frequency 0 0 to 400 0 Mid Frequency A 0 0 to 400 0 Mid Voltage A 0 0 to 255 0 Min Frequency 0 0 to 400 0 Min Voltage 0 0 to 255 0 Note 1 Q Quick start Basic or Advanced A Advanced only Not applicable Note 2 These voltages are for the 200 V class Double the voltage for 400 V class Inverters Note 3 The default setting depends on the Inverter s capacity The default settings shown in the table are for 200 V class 0 4 to 1 5 kW Inverters Refer to the graphs for Setting 1 on pages 5 26 and 5 27 for the default settings in 2 2 to 45 kW and 55 to 300 kW Inverters Note 4 The default settings for E1 07 through E1 10 depend
69. 9096 RH or less no condensation Note A protection cover is attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter Be sure to remove the protection covers before installing the 200 or 400 V Class Inverter that has an output of 15 kW or less to a panel e Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust Alternatively install it in a totally en closed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust e When installing or operating the Inverter always take special care so that metal powder oil water or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter e Do not install the Inverter on inflammable material such as wood m Ambient Temperature Control e To enhance operation reliability the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature rises e f the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment such as a box use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45 C 2 9 Installation Chapter 2 Protecting Inverter from Foreign Matter During Installation e Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling e Upon completion of installation always remove the cover from the Inverter Otherwise ventilation will be affected causing the Inverter to overheat 2 10 Installation Chapter 2 2 2 Wiring m Cautions and Warnings NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING
70. Also acts as the reset key when Key an fault has occurred See note Increment Key Selects modes groups functions parameter names and set values This key increases numbers when pressed Decrement Key Selects modes groups functions parameter names and set values This key decreases numbers when pressed Enter Key Enters modes functions constants and set values after they are set Ww ale NA DIEI Run Key Starts the 3G3FV running when the 3GSFV is in operation with the Digital Operator Stop Key Stops the 3G3FV running This key can be enabled or disabled with a parameter setting 02 02 in operation with the control circuit terminal s gt I o Note For safety reasons the Reset Key cannot be used when a run command forward reverse is be ing input Turn OFF the run command before attempting to reset Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 3 2 Modes This section describes the 3G3FV s various parameter setting and monitoring modes m Inverter Modes e The SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter s parameters and monitoring functions have been organized in groups so it is easier to make settings and read data These function groups are known as modes e The 3G3FV is equipped with 5 modes as shown in the following table Mode Primary function s Operation mode The Inverter can be run in this mode Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency referen
71. Chapter 6 Advanced Operation OL 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 Open loop Vector Control strasni n cece een ene e 6 2 6 1 1 Summary of Open loop Vector Control Functions 000000 6 2 6 1 2 Torque Limit Function ren e ee E eee eee 6 3 6 1 3 Adjusting Speed Feedback 0 0 0 eee cee eee 6 5 6 1 4 Setting Magnetic Flux Characteristics for Open loop Vector Control 6 6 6 1 5 Operation for Saturated Output Voltage 0 ee eee eee 6 6 6 1 6 Startup Torque Compensation 0 eee eee eee 6 7 6 1 7 Selecting Auto tuning Carrier Frequency 6 8 6 1 8 Setting Adjusting Motor Parameters sselelee ee 6 8 Normal V f Control ge 4555 er Oe ead ERU SPS Ee re OS Se ees 6 12 6 2 1 Summary of V f Control Functions 0 0 0 cee eee eee 6 12 6 2 2 Energy saving Control Function 0 0 eee ce eee eee 6 13 6 2 3 Hunting prevention Function 0 0 0 cee eee eee 6 14 6 2 4 Setting Motor Parameters 0 0 0 eee eee eee 6 15 Flux Vector Control esi deime Beene Geel gat elds Sai ve ee rs RV ves 6 16 6 3 1 Summary of Flux Vector Control Functions 0 000000 0 e eee eee 6 16 6 3 2 Droop Control Function 0 0 cece eee eens 6 17 6 3 3 Zero servo Function Position lock 0 00 eee ene 6 18 6 3 4 Torque Control aysina bhae a4 eels hae awe o ahs hard Side oe Regd Bes bans 6 20 6 3 5 Speed Tor
72. D1 m Separately Mounted Options e AC Reactor Yaskawa Electric 3G3IV PUZBABLI JA MH Connect this AC Reactor for controlling harmonic current generated by the Inverter or when the power supply capacity is extremely large compared with that of the Inverter It is also effective for improving the power factor Select an AC Reactor from the following tables according to the motor capacity Connection Example Applicable Range Wiring AC Reactor breaker g l F Q AC Reactor required X L1 oJo WOLI To Motor 8 4000 tor harmonizing L2 o 7 L2 power supply L3 6 gt M Obs 136 amp SYSDRIVE 600 AC Reactor l 9x notrequired ez 0 60 400 ME ERE E Inverter Capacity kVA 9 19 Specifications Chapter 9 e Standard Specifications and Dimensions mm e 200 V Class Maximum 3G3IV PUZBAB Current A Inductance Loss W Weight kg Figure applicable mH motor capacity 2 5A4 2MH 5A2 1MH 10A1 1MH 15A0 71MH 20A0 53MH 30A0 35MH 40A0 265MH 60A0 18MH 80A0 13MH 90A0 12MH 120A0 09MH 160A0 07MH 200A0 05MH 240A0 044MH 280A0 038MH Dimensions mm E F 9 20 Specifications Chapter 9 e 400 V Cl
73. DC injection braking time parameters b2 03 and b2 04 is longer than one second set the DC injection braking current to 5096 or less e For the DC injection braking time at start b2 03 set the DC injection braking operating time for when the motor is started e For the DC injection braking time at stop b2 04 set the DC injection braking operating time for when the motor is stopped DC Injection Initial Excitation Timing Chart Output frequency E1 09 The larger of b2 01 A Min output frequency or E1 09 Time TL tF b2 03 H b2 04 DC injection braking time at start DC injection braking time at stop m Setting Magnetic Field Compensation b2 08 When using the DC injection braking at startup initial excitation function to bring up the motor s mag netic flux before running machinery that requires high starting torque it may take some time for the magnetic flux to rise sufficiently This depends upon the motor s electrical time constant and is espe cially true with high capacity motors This function can be used to apply a stronger magnetic flux current when the DC injection braking at startup initial excitation function starts so that the magnetic field in the motor rises faster and more reliably Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f v f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector b2 08 Field Comp start
74. E E E E Max applicable 0 4 0 75 1 5 22 87 55 7 5 11 15 18 522 30 37 45 55 75 110 160 185 220 300 motor capacity Output characteristics Eei oat 1 4 2 6 3 7 4 7 6 1 11 14 121 26 31 37 50 61 73 98 130 170 230 260 340 460 kVA Rated output 1 8 3 4 4 8 6 2 8 0 14 18 27 34 41 48 65 80 96 128 165 224 302 340 450 605 current A Max output E i here 3 phase 380 to 460 VAC Corresponds to input voltage Max output 400 Hz Set by parameter ihe ene Power supply characteristics naed voltage 3 phase 380 to 460 VAC 50 60 Hz Rated fre quency Hz Allowable 15 to 10 voltage fluc tuation Allowable fre 5 quency fluc tuation Power con 0 06 0 09 0 11 0 13 0 15 0 22 0 36 0 46 0 57 10 66 0 88 1 1 1 3 1 4 1 9 24 13 1 42 15 0 16 9 9 8 sumption kW Approximate 3 0 3 0 4 0 14 5 45 60 60 11 11 27 27 44 44 44 79 80 135 145 360 360 420 weight kg 9 4 Specifications Chapter 9 Control Characteristics Model number A4004 A4007 A4037 A4075 A4110 A4150 B4185 B4220 B4300 3G3FV Power supply harmonic coun termeasures B4370 B4450 B4550 B4750 B411K B416K B418K B430K E E E E E DC reactor option connection
75. Input Voltage Setting E1 01 Set the Inverter s input voltage E1 01 to match the power supply voltage it cannot be changed during operation This setting is used as the reference value for functions such as the protection functions Parameter Display Setting Default Valid access levels number name range setting Vif m Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector E1 01 Input Voltage 155 to 255 VAC 200 Quick start eae or Advanced 310 to 510 400 5 35 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Note The voltage settings shown in parentheses are the values for the 400 V class Motor Selection Setting E1 02 Set the motor selection E1 02 to the type of motor to be used This setting is used as a basis for motor protection Parameter Display Setting Default Valid access levels number name range setting Vit v in Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector E1 02 Motor Selec ERE eee Quick start tion e Setting Setting Function Standard fan cooled motor general purpose motor Standard blower motor inverter exclusive motor Special motor special vector control motor m Precautions Before Auto tuning N Caution Do not connect a load to the motor when performing auto tuning Doing so may re sult in personal injury or equipment damage e The Inverter s auto tuning function automatically determines the motor parameters while a servo sys tem s auto tuning function determines the size of a load so these auto tuning fu
76. Inverter s ASR input 0 to 10 V Multi function analog output 2 terminal 23 Outputs the actual motor speed 0 to 10 V We recommend monitoring both the ASR input and the motor speed in order to observe a response delay or deviation from the reference value as shown in the following diagram ASR input command N Motor speed N Motor speed response Time 3 Give acceleration deceleration commands and adjust the gain while observing the waveform Motor If overshooting occurs speed Decrease C5 01 and increase C5 02 X If undershooting occurs Decrease C5 03 and increase C5 04 4 If the overshooting or undershooting can t be eliminated by adjusting the gain decrease the ASR limit C5 05 to lower the frequency reference compensation limit Since C5 05 can t be changed during operation stop the Inverter s operation and then decrease the ASR limit by 0 5 96 Perform step 3 again after the setting has been changed The ASR limit is the frequency limit for compensation by speed control loop Set this frequency limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency If the frequency limit is lowered too much the motor speed might not reach the target speed Verify that the target speed is reached during normal operation Parameter Display Setting Default Valid access levels number name range setting Vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector ctos ASRLimt 00102
77. Limit Maximum frequency Jump Frequency Maximum frequency PID Feedback Maximum frequency PID target value Maximum frequency Frequency bias 2 Maximum frequency added to H3 03 set value Forward Torque Limit Rated torque Reverse Torque Limit Rated torque Regenerative Torque Limit Rated torque Torque reference Rated torque Torque Compensation Bias Rated torque Speed Limit Rated torque Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Note Note Note Note Note Equivalent of 100 Input Control mode 10 V or 20 mA v f V f Open loop Flux w PG Vector Vector Disable analog input H3 05 OK OK OK OK Frequency Reference H3 09 Maximum frequency 1 The analog inputs signal level gain and bias are set with the following parameters Terminal 16 is the multi function analog input and terminal 14 is the frequency reference current input Terminal 16 signal level selector H3 04 0 to 10 V or 0 to 10 V Terminal 16 input gain H3 06 Terminal 16 input bias H3 07 Terminal 14 signal level selector H3 08 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA Terminal 14 input gain H3 10 Terminal 14 input bias H3 11 2 When a voltage input is being input to terminal 14 be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1 on the control board The input resistance will be destroyed if a voltage input i
78. Loss When the torque loss in the pump or fan is large The set mechanical loss will compensate for torque Torque Sets the motor s copper loss in 14 see compensati watts W note 1 on for motor loss Tcomp Iron Loss Note 1 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The values for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter are given above Note 2 The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter s rated output current The values for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter are given above Note 3 The setting range is between 0 00 and Inverter s rated current 0 1 7 27 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Motor 2 Setup E3 to E5 Reference pages 6 67 to 6 69 Name Description Setting Default Changes Control mode Display range setting during Vif V f with Open Flux vec name opera control PG loop tor tion vector Select Normal V f Control control V f Control With PG method of Feedback motor 2 Open loop Vector Control Flux Vector Control Control Method Motor 2 Sets the motor constants of maximum motor 2 when used for frequency two motor switching Max Note 1 Enabled when the mo Frequency tor 2 selection function is set for multi function Motor 2 input maximum voltage Set like E1 04 to E2 06 VMAX Changes motors after Max Inverter and motor stop Voltage Waits to change motor Motor 2 for 20 to 50 ms
79. Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 3 Vit Vf Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector S curve All sections of the S curve characteris characteristic time are set in tic time at seconds units accelera tion start Note When the S curve char acteristic time is set the SCrv Acc accel decel times will in Start crease by only half of S curve the S curve characteris characteris tic times at start and tic time at end accelera Output frequency tion end SCrv Acc End S curve characteris tic time at decelera tion start SCrv Dec 9 Start S curve characteris tic time at decelera tion end SCrv Dec End 7 14 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Motor Slip Compensation C3 Name Description Setting Default Control mode de Display uL Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Slip com Used to improve speed pensation accuracy when operating with a gain load Note Usually setting is not nec essary When actual speed is low increase the set value When actual speed is Slip Comp high decrease the set Gain value In flux vector control mode this function be comes gain to compen sate for slip caused by temperature variation Slip com Slip compensation primary pensation delay time is set in ms units primary Note Usual
80. Note The energy saving func tion is only enabled when Energy the frequency is greater Save Freq than the energy saving frequency and the speeds are consistent Zero Servo b9 Name Description Setting Default Control mode etti Display Paneer eset Vit V f Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Zero servo Used to adjust the strength of gain the zero servo lock Note Enabled when the zero servo command is set for the multi function input When the zero servo command has been input and the frequency refer ence drops below excita Zero Servo tion level b2 01 a posi Gain tion control loop is created and the motor stops Increasing the zero servo gain in turn in creases the strength of the lock Increasing it by too much will cause vibra tion Zero servo Sets the output width of the completion P lock completion signal width Note Enabled when the zero servo completion end is Set for multi function out put The zero servo completion signal is ON when the current position is within the range the zero servo position Zero Servo zero servo completion Count width Set the allowable position displacement from the zero servo position to 4 times the pulse rate of the PG pulse generator en coder in use 7 12 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 7 2 2 Tuning Parameters m Accele
81. OFF or not set Acceleration time 2 C1 03 OFF or not set ON Acceleration time 3 C1 05 ON ON Acceleration time 4 C1 07 Deceleration time 1 C1 02 Deceleration time 2 C1 04 Deceleration time 3 C1 06 Deceleration time 4 C1 08 Note The acceleration and deceleration times can be changed while the Inverter is operating 5 18 Basic Operation Chapter 5 e Setting 15 17 Fast Stop Emergency Stop When the multi function input that is set to Fast Stop is turned ON or OFF for an N C contact the motor will decelerate to a stop at the rate set with the deceleration time in C1 09 fast stop time To clear the emergency stop turn the run command OFF turn the fast stop input OFF or ON for an N C con tact and then turn the run command ON again e Setting 12 and 13 Forward and Reverse Jog Commands The jog function can operate in forward or reverse The forward jog and reverse jog commands have priority over other frequency reference commands Forward Jog command Runs forward at the jog reference frequency d1 09 Reverse Jog command Runs in reverse at the jog reference frequency d1 09 The inverter will stop operation with the stopping method is set in b1 03 if the forward jog and reverse jog commands are both on for more than 500 ms Turn ON either the forward jog command or the reverse jog command not both These jog commands can operate the
82. Operator s display and setting methods 6 5 2 Key Selections Operator s key function selection and other parame ters Application Parameters b m Setting Operation Source Selection b1 e The input methods of parameters or frequency references and the operation methods of the run com mand can be set in the Inverter in operation mode In addition the following advanced functions are available e The run command already set in the Inverter can be disabled or enabled when switching the Inverter to local mode from remote mode e The run command already set in the Inverter in any mode other than drive mode can be disabled or enabled e Set the parameter according to the application Parameter number Display name Setting range Default Valid access levels setting Vit Control d vim Open Loop Vector Flux Vector Set Explanation of Settings Setting Description The run command already set is disabled when the Inverter is switched to local mode from remote mode The Inverter will start operating with the run command input again mode The run command already set is enabled and the Inverter will start operating according to the present run command when the Inverter is switched to local mode from remote Note If parameter b1 07 LOC REM RUN Sel is set to 1 the run command will not be ignored In this case an Inverter may start operating immediately
83. Output Disabled open phase 1 Enabled Output open protection phase detected at less than selection 5 of Inverter s rated current Note Output open phase may be detected inadvertently when applied motor ca pacity is small for Inverter capacity In this case set to 0 Disabled Ground Disable ground fault fault protection protection Enable ground fault selection protection Ground Fault Sel Ph Loss Out Sel 7 50 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range setting Display Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Carrier L8 17 settings frequency Enable or disable the low speed reduction at carrier frequency reduction low speed function 0 Disable Don t reduce carrier frequency at low speed 1 Enable Reduce carrier frequency at low speed 2 3 Reserved for factory adjustments L8 19 settings 0 Disable Don t reduce the OL2 detection level at low speed 1 Enable Reduce the OL2 detection level at low Speed Note Set these parameters in one of the following com binations To reduce motor noise at low speeds set L8 17 to 0 and L8 19 to 1 When high torque is required at low speeds set L8 17 to 1 and L8 19 to 0 Note Do not set both L8 17 and L8 19 to 0 Doing so may damage the inverter Use a larger inverter if
84. PG speed deviation fault occurs they cannot be changed during operation 5 48 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Parameter F1 04 sets the conditions for detecting a PG speed deviation fault and the stopping method to be used when a fault is detected Parameter number Display name Setting range Valid access levels V f with Open Loop Vector Default setting Vif Control Flux Vector F104 PGDeviaionSe 0107 8 J B 7 B Note B Basic or Advanced Settings Setting Not applicable Stopping method Ramp to Stop C1 02 Fault Function Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the output frequency Coast to Stop Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the output frequency Fast Stop C1 09 Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the output frequency Continue Alarm Only Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the output frequency Ramp to Stop C1 02 Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the motor speed PG feedback Coast Stop Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02
85. Parameters C m Setting the S curve Characteristic Function C2 e Using the S curve characteristic function for acceleration and deceleration can reduce shock to the machinery when stopping and starting e With the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV S curve characteristic times can be set respectively for beginning accel eration ending acceleration beginning deceleration and ending deceleration Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector SCrv Acc Start Advanced SCrv Acc End Advanced SCrv Dec Advanced Start SCrv Dec End Advanced These parameters cannot be changed during operation e The relation between these parameters is shown in the following diagram Output frequency 6 58 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Note When the S curve characteristic time is set the acceleration and deceleration times will be lengthened as follows Acceleration time Selected acceleration time S curve at beginning of acceleration S curve at end of acceleration 2 Deceleration time Selected deceleration time S curve at beginning of deceleration S curve at end of deceleration 2 m Setting Motor Slip Compensation C3 e The motor slip compensation function calculates the motor torque according to the output current and sets gain to compensate for output frequency e This function is used to im
86. Reference Operator frequency reference settings Reference Limits Frequency upper and lower limit settings Jump Frequencies Prohibited frequency settings Sequence Hold for analog frequency reference Torque Control Parameter settings for torque control V f Pattern Sets the motor s V f characteristics Motor Setup Sets the motor parameters Control Method 2 Sets the control method of motor 2 V f Pattern 2 Sets the V f pattern of motor 2 Motor Setup 2 Motor setup for motor 2 Options PG Option Setup Parameter settings for a PG Card Al 14 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Reference Card DI 08 16 Setup Parameter settings for a Digital Reference Card AO 08 12 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Monitor Card Not used DO 02 Not used DO 08 Not Used Do not change these settings PO 36F Setup Parameter settings for a Pulse Monitor Card SI F G Setup SYSMAC BUS Interface card setup CP 916 Setup CompoBus D DeviceNet communications card setup 3 25 Preparing for Operation Terminal Function Digital Inputs Comments Function selection for multi function inputs Chapter 3 Control mode Vif Open loop w PG Vector Flux Vector Digital Outputs Function selection for multi function outputs Analog Inputs Function selection for analog inp
87. Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif VA with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector L8 01 DB Resistor Prot Qor1 o0 Basic or Advanced Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation Disabled Select 0 when a braking resistor isn t being used or a Braking Resistor Unit is being used Enabled Protects the braking resistor from overheating Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector L8 02 OH Pre Alarm Lvl 50 to 130 C 100 Advanced L8 03 OH Pre Alarm Sel 0 to 3 3 Advanced Note These parameters cannot be changed during operation e Parameter L8 02 specifies the detection temperature in C for the Inverter overheat OH pre alarm function An overheat pre alarm occurs when the temperature of the cooling fins reaches this level e Parameter L8 03 specifies the processing that will be performed when an overheat pre alarm occurs Setting Function Ramp to Stop Decelerates to a stop in the deceleration time set in C1 09 Fault Coast to Stop Coasts to a stop Fault Fast Stop Emergency stop in the fast stop time set in C1 09 Fault Alarm Only Continues operation Monitor display only Minor fault Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector L8
88. The Inverter parameters can be set in program mode The parameters which can be dis played and changed depend on the access level and control mode that are being used Refer to the following table to determine if a parameter can be changed m Parameter Groups An OK in the control mode column indicates that the parameter can be changed in that control mode Application Function Sequence Comments Settings such as the reference input method Control mode Vif Open loop w PG Vector Flux Vector DC Braking DC braking function settings Speed Search Speed search function settings Delay Timers Timer function settings PID Control PID control settings Reference Hold Accel deceleration time dwell function settings Droop Control Droop control speed drop settings Energy Saving Terminal input energy saving control settings Zero Servo Stop in the position loop Tuning Accel Decel Acceleration deceleration time settings S Curve Acc Dec S curve characteristics for accel decel times Motor Slip Comp Slip compensation function settings Torque Comp Torque compensation function settings ASR Tuning Speed control loop parameter settings Carrier Freq Carrier frequency settings Hunting Prev Hunting prevention function for V f control Factory Tuning Adjustment for open loop vector control Reference Preset
89. The Inverter s auto tuning function automatically determines the motor parameters while a servo sys tem s auto tuning function determines the size of a load so these auto tuning functions are funda mentally different e f a load is connected when auto tuning is performed not only will incorrect motor parameters be re corded but the motor may operate erratically resulting in dangerous conditions such as loads falling from vertical axis motors Never perform auto tuning with a load connected to the motor 3 28 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 m Auto tuning Operation Example Key sequence Display Explanation r Displays operation mode A Displays auto tuning mode Displays the rated voltage yey amp 18 2 When changing the rated voltage press the Enter Key again to enter input mode The digits will flash Use the Reset Up Arrow and Down Arrow Keys to change the rated voltage setting Writes the new setting iit K t Returns to the rated voltage display Displays the rated current Follow the procedure used to change for the rated volt age when changing this setting Displays the rated frequency Follow the procedure used to change for the rated volt age when changing this setting Displays the rated speed Follow the procedure used to change for the rated volt age when changing this setting Displays the number of poles Follow the p
90. V or W output Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction Operation and Adjustment Precautions N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING WARNING N WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover terminal covers bottom cover Operator and optional items Not doing so may result in electrical shock Do not remove the front cover terminal covers bottom cover Operator or optional items while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electrical shock or damage to the product Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands Doing so may result in electrical shock Do not touch the inside of the Inverter Doing so may result in electrical shock Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm Doing so may result in injury Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power interruption to avoid an unexpected restart if operation is set to be continued in the processing selection function after momentary power interruption is reset Doing so may result in injury Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator is valid only when function settings are performed Not doing so may result in injury NWARNING N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution Be sure to confirm that the RUN s
91. as 100 Terminal 16 Bias Signal 0 Oto 10 V Always cut selection jumper wire J1 terminal 14 1 Oto 10 V Always cut jumper wire J1 Sion 2 41020 mA Selection Set as for H3 05 Terminal 14 Note Cannot be set to 0 The Terminal 14 1F function will become Sel frequency reference 7 40 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range setting Vit vt Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Gain Ter Sets the input gain level when minal 14 terminal 14 is 10 V 20 mA The contents in the following table are taken as 100 Terminal 14 Gain Bias Termi Sets the input gain level when nal 14 terminal 14 is 0 V 4 mA The contents in the following table are taken as 100 Terminal 14 Bias Analog in Sets terminals 13 14 16 to put filter primary delay filter time time con constant in seconds units stant Note Effective for noise control Filter Avg etc Time e Description of Multi function Analog Input Terminal 16 Function Contents Control mode 0 Auxiliary frequency reference Maximum frequency OK OK OK OK 1 Frequency gain Frequency reference command OK OK OK OK value voltage 2 Frequency bias Maximum frequency HO0 03 OK OK OK OK 4 Voltage bias Motor r
92. attempt to open the cover under any circumstances Doing so may result in injury or death and may damage the product Never attempt to repair or disassemble the product We recommend that you add the following precautions to any instruction manuals you pre pare for the system into which the product is being installed Precautions on the dangers of high voltage equipment Precautions on touching the terminals of the product even after power has been turned off These terminals are live even with the power turned off Specifications and functions may be changed without notice in order to improve product performance Items to Check when Unpacking Check the following items when removing the product from the package Has the correct product been delivered i e the correct model number and speci fications Check the nameplate as shown below Inverter model MODEL SG3FV A2037 aH AC 3PH 200 220V 50H Input specification eur AC P 700 230 6OHz Output specification OUTPUT AC 3PH 0 230V 6 7kVA 17 5A LOT NO NRSGA01 621 4 MASS 4 5kg SER NO N507398 002 5 MADE IN JAPAN Ms Has the product been damaged in shipping Are any screws or bolts loose Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Alwa
93. be changed during operation but normally no adjustments are required Make ad justments in the following cases If the wiring distance between the Inverter and the motor is long raise the set value If the motor capacity is less than the Inverter capacity the maximum application motor capacity raise the set value If the motor generates excessive vibration lower the set value Set the torque compensation gain so that the output current at low speed rotation does not exceed 50 of the Inverter s rated output current If the setting exceeds 10096 of the Inverter s rated output current the Inverter may be damaged Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit VS vm OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector C4 02 Torq Comp Time 0 to See Advanced 10000 ae This parameter cannot be changed during operation Note When the control mode is switched the factory default setting changes as follows V f control 200 V f with PG 200 open loop vector 20 The torque compensation time constant does not normally need to be adjusted but make adjustments in the following cases If the motor generates excessive vibration raise the set value If motor responsiveness is low lower the set value m Setting the Carrier Frequency C6 The carrier frequency characteristics differ according to the control mode V f control and V f with PG control Carrier frequency variable setting possible
94. be used if operation is switched to local mode using the operation mode selection key Note 3 Regardless of the frequency source the values set for frequency reference parameters 2 to 8 d1 02 to d1 08 and the inching frequency reference parameter d1 09 will be enabled m Setting the Frequency Reference Units 01 03 Parameter 01 03 is used to set the units for setting and displaying the frequency reference it cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f n anh Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector 01 03 Display Scaling 0 to Basic or ros 39 999 Display Unit Settings Setting Function 0 0 01 Hz units 1 0 01 units The maximum frequency is 100 2 to 39 r min units Set the number of poles 40 to 39 999 Sets a particular value for the maximum frequency 4 This number is the 4 digit setting without the decimal point This number indicates the location of the decimal point How many digits there are after the decimal point For example set 01 03 to 12000 when you want to display 200 0 for the maximum frequency Note When the 40 to 39 999 range is used any scale can be set for the reference frequency For example the frequency reference can be set or displayed in units such as mm s or m min to coincide with a machine s linear operating speed 5 9 Basic
95. con nected to the Inverter due to the insufficient dielectric strength of each phase of the standard motor 10 4 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No 1516 E1 05 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code September 1996 Original production Revised content April 1997 The following constant numbers were added to Section 7 b1 07 C3 05 C5 08 C8 30 E1 11 E1 12 E1 13 F1 14 F8 01 H5 05 Page 1 2 Inverter model list updated 3 phase added Page 1 5 Low noise al Page 2 5 Dimensions Pages 2 12 and 2 13 nd harmonic countermeasure information clarified added for the new models Terminals and connections changed for the 200 V Class and 400 V Class tables Notes added New models reflected Pages 2 16 2 17 2 19 and 2 20 New models added Page 2 21 New wire sizes and tightening torque added Page 2 23 New mode Pages 2 26 and 2 29 Page 2 31 New mode s reflected in the information for wiring the power terminal of the Inverter Note added s reflected in the bottom output diagram Page 3 29 Motor selection explanation corrected Pages 5 19 and 5 34 Page 5 26 New mode Motor selection information corrected s reflected in the V f patterns Page 5 27 Note 2 reference removed
96. connected e Flux vector control was selected by setting A1 02 to 3 but a PG Speed Control Card isn t connected 8 12 Maintenance Operations Display OPE07 Analog Selection Meaning Multi function analog input selection error Chapter 8 Incorrect settings e The same setting other than 1F has been selected for H3 05 and H3 09 e A 3G3IV PA114B Analog Reference Card is being used and F2 01 is set to 0 but a multi function input H1 01 to H1 06 has been set to Option Inverter Selection 2 e Frequency Bias and Frequency Bias 2 are set at the same time OPE08 Function Setting Function setting error Functions that cannot be controlled by the current control mode are set For example the torque reference was set in V f control OPE10 V f Ptrn Setting V f data setting error e Parameters E1 04 E1 06 E1 07 and E1 09 do not satisfy the following conditions e E1 04 Fmax 2 E1 06 Fa gt E1 07 Fg E1 09 Fin OPE11 CarrFrg On Delay Parameter setting error e One of the following parameter setting errors exists e The carrier frequency upper limit C6 01 gt 5 KHz and the carrier frequency lower limit C6 02 lt 5 KHz e The carrier frequency gain C6 03 gt 6 and C6 01 lt C6 02 ERR flashing EEPROM R W Err A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM Try turning the power supply off and on again Try setting th
97. containing harmonics because the Inverter converts AC into DC The output current of the Inverter is comparatively high Therefore the ratio of harmonics in the output current of the Inverter is higher than that of any other electric machine Voltage Rectified Voltage Smoothed Voltage Current i A current flows into the capacitors The current is different from the voltage in waveform e Countermeasures with Reactors against Harmonics Generation e DC AC Reactors The DC reactor and AC reactor suppress harmonics and currents that change suddenly and greatly The DC reactor suppresses harmonics better than the AC reactor The DC reactor used with the AC reactor suppresses harmonics more effectively The input power factor of the Inverter is improved by suppressing the harmonics in the input current of the Inverter Note 18 5 to 160 kW Inverters have a built in DC reactor 185 to 300 kW Inverters cannot use a DC reactor e Connection Connect the DC reactor to the internal DC power supply of the Inverter after shutting off the power supply to the Inverter and making sure that the charge indicator of the Inverter turns off NWARNING Do not touch the internal circuitry of the Inverter in operation otherwise an electric shock or a burn injury may occur 2 35 Installation Chapter 2 e Wiring Method With DC Reactor DC reactor optional SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Note Be sure to remove the short bar on terminals
98. environment in which the maximum ambi ent operating temperature is exceeded Lower the motor s ambient temperature to within the accept able ambient operating temperature range e The withstand voltage between the motor s phases is insufficient When the motor is connected to the Inverter s output a surge is generated between the Inverter s switching and the motor s coil Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter s input power supply voltage i e 600 V for 200 V class and 1 200 V for 400 V class Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor s phases that is greater than the maximum surge voltage In particular when using a 400 V class Inverter use a special motor for Inverters If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio If noise is generated by Inverter switching implement the following measures Lower the Inverter s carrier frequency parameter C6 01 This will help to some extent by reduc ing the amount of internal switching e Install a 3G3EV PLNF or 3G3IV PFN Input Noise Filter at the Inverter s power supply input area e Install a 3G3IV PLF Output Noise Filter at the Inverter s power supply output area Use metal tubing Electric waves can be shielded by metal so encase the Inverter with metal steel If the Leakage Breaker Operates When the Inverter is Run The Inverter performs internal switching so there is a certain amount of leakage current This m
99. fault The rated slip setting can t be tuned within the prescribed time e A load is connected to the motor axis Remove the load Saturation 1 Core saturation coefficient 1 fault Saturation 2 Core saturation coefficient 2 fault The core saturation coefficients can t be tuned within the prescribed time e The rated current setting isn t correct Check and change the setting if necessary e There is a broken disconnected motor power wire Check and replace wiring components if necessary Resistance Motor wire resistance fault No load Current Motor no load current fault The motor terminal resistance or no load current setting can t be tuned within the prescribed time e The rated current setting isn t correct Check and change the setting if necessary e There is a broken disconnected motor power wire Check and replace wiring components if necessary Minor Fault Minor fault e A minor fault has occurred in the Inverter warning or alarm detected Refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance Operations for appropriate ac tions V f Over Setting V f setting too high 5 22 e The torque reference exceeded 100 and the non load current ex ceeded 70 of the rated motor current during auto tuning The settings are incorrect for the rated voltage or rated frequency Correct the settings The motor is connected to a load Disconnect the load Basic Operation Cha
100. fault occurred take steps to correct the cause of the fault and restart the Inverter It is possible to damage the Inverter by repeatedly resetting a fault without correcting the cause e To resume operation after a fault has occurred turn the run command OFF turn the fault reset input from ON to OFF and then turn the run command ON again A fault cannot be reset while the run com mand is ON e If a fault hasn t occurred turning the fault reset ON and OFF will have no effect on operation e PID Disable Setting 19 OFF Enables PID control ON Disables PID control Normal Inverter control e With this setting the multi function input switches between PID control and normal Inverter control e This function can be used to perform trial operation or jog operation with normal inverter control open loop control and then switch to PID control closed loop control using feedback after adjusting the system The PID disable function can also be used to switch to open loop control when there is a prob lem with the feedback value e Program Lockout Setting 1B OFF Write protects all parameters except for frequency monitor ON Allows parameters specified in Initialize mode to be changed e With this setting the multi function input can be used to write protect the Operator s parameters e When the input is OFF the Operation mode s frequency can be monitored and the frequency can be changed but other changes are prohibited
101. frequency selection FJOG command and RJOG command are ON Jog Reference 7 21 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 m Reference Limits d2 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 3 Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Reference Sets the output frequency upper frequency limit as a percentage of the upper limit maximum frequency Ref Upper Limit Reference Sets the output frequency lower frequency limit as a percentage of the lower limit maximum frequency Ref Lower Limit m Jump Frequencies d3 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 3 Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Jump Sets the center value of the frequency 1 jump frequency in Hz Jump Freq Note This function is disabled 1 by setting the jump fre quency to 0 Hz Always Jump ensure that the following frequency 2 applies Jump Freq d3 01 2 d3 02 2 d3 03 2 Operation in the jump fre quency range is prohib Jump ited but during accelera frequency 3 tion and deceleration Jump Freq speed changes smoothly without jump Jump Sets the jump frequency frequency bandwidth in Hz width Note The jump frequency will Jump be the jump frequency Bandwidth d3 04 7 22
102. from E1 07 in the table New models reflected in Note 3 Page 5 42 New mode Page 6 50 Setting the Pages 6 50 and 6 51 Page 6 58 Setting 16 s reflected in Note 2 Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload OL2 information added Note references added to the carrier frequency table Following note rewritten Motor 2 Selection added to the table Page 6 70 Settings 1C to 1E corrected and added to Page 6 79 Inverter model corrected for each Note 2 Page 7 16 Note references added to the carrier frequency table Following notes rewritten Page 7 24 Motor 2 Setup E3 to E5 list added Pages 7 26 and 7 27 Pages 7 29 and 7 31 F9 constant numbers added Setting values 16 and 1C motor 2 selection and motor 2 selected added Pages 8 4 and 8 7 High carrier frequency information added to OH and OL2 fault displays and OH minor fault display Page 8 17 Inverter overload information added Pages 9 2 to 9 4 Specifications completely updated Page 9 11 Control Unit corrected to Braking Unit Pages 9 11 and 9 13 Pages 9 21 and 9 23 Page 10 5 New model New models added Noise Filter models added Is added Revision code June 2000 Revision History Revised content Addition of 3G3FV LJ CUE changes accompa nying 3G3FV software changes changes to some display messages and other changes and improvements Specific changes are as follows Front matter Added General Precautions Warning
103. func tion properly and the mechanical system may vibrate e PID Control Reverse Characteristics Use the following parameter to set or adjust PID control characteristics Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V A with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector D5 09 Output Level Set 0 1 o Advanced 1 Explanation of Settings Contents Positive PID output Negative PID output 1 is added to the operation result of PID control Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e Positive or reverse characteristic PID control is possible e Set the characteristic according to the relationship between the Inverter s output frequency and the feedback value Positive characteristic The feedback value increases when the Inverter s output frequency in creases Negative characteristic The feedback value increases when the Inverter s output frequency de creases Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif Vs p Open Loop Control 25 0 Explanation of Settings e Use this parameter to set the multiplication ratio of the Inverter s final output under PID control e The entire PID control amount can be adjusted For frequency reference PID control the adjustment of PID control of the frequency reference can be made Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number CE setting Vif VA with
104. in no load status connect the mechanical system and operate with an actual load Connecting the System e After confirming that the motor has stopped completely connect the mechanical system e Be sure to tighten all the screws when fixing the motor axis in the mechanical system Operation using the Digital Operator e n case a fault occurs during operation make sure the Stop Key on the Digital Operator is easily acces sible e Use the Digital Operator in the same way as no load operation e First set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed m Checking Operating Status e Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed increase the frequency reference e After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction check that there is no vibration or abnormal sound from the motor Check the monitor display to ensure that the U1 03 output current is not becoming excessive 4 11 Ii pn Tl Chapter 5 Basic Operation 5 Common Settings 5 2 Open loop Vector Control 5 3 V f Control 5 4 Flux Vector Control 5 5 V f Control with PG Basic Operation Chapter 5 This section explains the basic settings required to operate and stop the Inverter The parameter settings described here will be sufficient for simple Inverter operations After the basic settings common to all of the control modes are intro
105. input from communications Operation CompoBus D Communications Card 0 Decelerate to stop in the time set in C1 02 Protective operation Coast to stop EFO Fault Protective operation Action Emergency stop in the time set in C1 09 Protective operation Continue operation Alarm Not used Trace Sample Tim 7 34 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode A r i Display ange setting V f V f Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Torque This setting enables or disables reference torque reference and torque torque limit limit values input from selection communications CompoBus D from Communications Card communica Note Always set to disable tions when using a CompoBus D Communications Card Disable torque reference torque limit from communications Enable torque reference torque limit from communications TorqueRef Lmt Sel Operation Selects the inverter operation to after perform when a communica communications CompoBus D tions error Communications Card error occurs 0 Decelerate to stop in the time set in C1 02 Protective operation Coast to stop BUS Fault Protective operation Sel Emergency stop in the time set in C1 09 Protective operation Continue operation Alarm 7 35 Parameter Lists Ch
106. is open Forward Reverse command Multi function input Sequential input common Timing Chart Sa 50 ms min Run command ON OFF Either is possible Stop command OFF Stop OFF Stop gies Forward 4 Reverse pa Stp pa Forward Forward Reverse command Forward Motor speed 5 16 Basic Operation Chapter 5 e Setting 3 to 6 Multi step References 1 through 3 and Jog Reference Eight frequency references and one jog reference can be used in the 3G3FV Set Multi step Reference 1 2 and 3 and Jog Frequency Reference in multi function inputs and change the status of these inputs to switch between these 9 frequency references Setting Function Multi step Reference 1 Also used for main speed auxiliary speed switching when Auxiliary Reference is set in multi function analog input H3 05 Multi step Reference 2 Multi step Reference 3 Jog frequency reference This setting has higher priority than the multi step references The following table shows which frequency is selected by each possible combination of multi step and jog reference settings Multi step Reference Jog Selected frequency 2 3 Reference Reference 1 d1 01 main speed frequency see note 1 Reference 2 d1 02 auxiliary speed frequency see note 2 Reference 3 d1 03 Reference 4 d1 04 Reference 5 d1 05 Reference 6 d1 06 Reference 7 d1 07 Reference 8 d1 08 Jog reference d1
107. leads with reverse command PG 1 Phase B leads with forward Rotation command Phase A leads Sel with reverse command F1 06 PG output Sets the division ratio for the 1 to 1 NO X B X B 5 30 ratio PG speed control card pulse 132 output Division ratio 1 n m n 0 1 m 1 to 32 F1 06 LJ m PG Output 2 Ratio Note This parameter is only ef fective when a 3G3FV PPGB2 is used The possible division ratio Settings are 1 32s F1 065 1 7 30 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range setti Display g ws Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Selecting Sets integral control during integral acceleration deceleration to control either enabled or disabled during 0 Disabled The integral accel decel function isn t used while accelerating or decelerating it is used at PG Ramp constant speeds PI I Sel Enabled The integral function is used at all times Overspeed Sets the overspeed detection OS method Frequencies above that detection set for F1 08 setas a level percentage of the maximum PG frequency which continue to exceed this frequency for the detection time F1 09 are detected as overspeed faults Overspd Level Overspeed OS detection time PG Overspd Time PG speed Sets the speed deviation deviation detection method detection Any speed
108. limit or torque control is being used and the output torque varies with the ambient temperature There is no change to the compensation during speed control operation Normally it isn t necessary to change this setting If the motor s internal parameters change at higher temperatures and the amount of slip increases this parameter can be set to adjust the amount of slip according to an internally calculated temperature rise This parameter cannot be changed during op eration Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector C3 01 Slip Come Gain 0 0t025 Factor 10 B IB Note 1 B Basic or Advanced Not applicable Note 2 Adjust the setting if the output torque varies with the ambient temperature when a torque con trol or torque limit is being used The compensation amount increases as the set value is increased This adjustment is not required during speed control operation 6 3 8 Operation for Saturated Output Voltage Previously the accuracy of motor speed for vector control was greatly reduced when the limit of the Inverter s voltage output was approached a voltage greater than that of the input power supply cannot be output Set the following parameter to control the output voltage so that the limit will not be reached thus maintaining speed accuracy Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access
109. low speed opera tion Parameter C5 03 sets the proportional gain of the speed loop ASR and C5 04 sets the integral time Both of these parameters can be changed during operation Parameter number Display name Setting range ASR P Gain 2 0 00 to 300 00 Factor Default setting Valid access levels Vif Control V f with PG Open Loop Vector Flux Vector ASR I Time 2 0 000 to 10 000 s Note B Basic or Advanced Not applicable Parameter C5 07 is the ASR Gain Switching Frequency Level ASR P Gain 1 and ASR I Time 1 are used when the frequency is above this level Below this level the proportional gain and integral time approach ASR P Gain 2 and ASR I Time 2 as the frequency approaches zero This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f with Open Loop Vif Control C5 07 ASR Gain SW Freq 0 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 0 Not applicable Note A Advanced 5 39 Basic Operation Chapter 5 The following graph shows how the proportional gain and integral time approach ASR P Gain 2 and ASR I Time 2 linearly as the frequency approaches zero P C5 01 1 C5 02 P C5 03 C5 04 Motor speed Hz 0 C5 07 P me Note If C5 07 is set to 0 0 ASR P Gain 1 and ASR I Time 1 are used for the proportional gain and inte gral time at all frequencies m Multi function Input Settings
110. mode The value for the 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter in open loop vector control mode is given above Note 2 For a 400 V Inverter if the carrier frequency is set to a value higher than the default setting the Inverter overload OL2 detection value will decrease m Hunting Prevention C7 Para Name Description Setting Default Chan Control mode Page meter range settin es No Display 3 auring Vt Vf Open Flux name opera control with loop vector tion PG vector Hunting 0 Disabled prevention 1 Enabled selection Note The hunting prevention function is used to stop a motor under a light load from hunting This function is exclusive ly for the V f control mode When greater responsive ness than vibration con trol is required set hunt ing prevention to dis abled Hunting Sets the ratio for hunting prevention prevention gain gain Note Usually setting is not nec essary Adjust in the following cir cumstances When vibration occurs due to a light load in Hunt Prev crease the set values Gain When the motor is stalled decrease the set values If the set values become too large the motor may stall as a result of non controlled current Hunt Prev Select 7 19 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 m Factory Tuning C8 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 3 Vif Vif Open Flux name control with l
111. more than 30 meters 2 44 Installation Chapter 2 1O Circuit Configuration TA1 PG power supply 12 V A phase pulse A phase monitor output pulse input B phase pulse monitor output B phase 1 pulse input TA2 150 180 Forward output pulses 3J n rf A phase pulses LJ L _ B phase pulses Note When connecting to a voltage output type PG encoder select a PG that has an output imped ance with a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler diode The E6B2 CWZ3E cannot be used e 3G3FV PPGD2 For V f With PG Feedback Mode Only SYSDRIVE Three phase Encoder 200 VAC 400 VAC 3G3FV E6B2 CWZ1X Power supply 5V Pulse output A B phase Pulse output gt A B phase ced Pulse monitor output Note 1 Twisted pair shielded wire must be used for signal lines Note 2 Do not use the pulse generator s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise Note 3 The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 50 meters 2 45 Installation Chapter 2 e 3G3FV PPGX2 For Flux Vector Control Mode Only Three phase SYSDRIVE 200 VAC 400 VAC 3G3FV Encoder EGB2 CWZ1X A phase pulse monitor output B phase pulse monitor output Z phase pulse monitor output Note 1 Shielded twisted pair wire must be used for signal lines Note 2 Do not use the
112. motor s leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor s rated voltage in parameter E2 06 Normally this value is not shown on the motor s nameplate so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer It is also acceptable to set the loss caused by the motor s leakage inductance as a percentage Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f V f with Open Loop Control E2 06 Leak Inductance 0 0 to 40 0 18 2 Not applicable Note The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The table shows the default settings for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters The default setting does not normally need to be changed because the Inverter in operation ad justs the leak inductance automatically Set the parameter if a high speed motor or any other mo tor with low inductance is used Parameters E2 07 and E2 08 are used in a frequency range even higher than the motor s rated fre quency It isn t necessary to set these parameters when operating below the motor s rated frequency Set the following values 6 10 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Motor core saturation coefficient 1 Core saturation coefficient when magnetic flux is 5096 Motor core saturation coefficient 2 Core saturation coefficient when magnetic flux is 75 Normally these values aren t shown on the motor s nameplate so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer Parameter Display name
113. mounting base For Invert ers of 3 7 kW or less there are two adjacent holes Insert the spacer into the 7CN hole The spacer cannot be easily removed if inserted into the wrong hole Be very careful to insert the spacer into the correct hole and in the proper direction 3 Referring to the enlarged illustration in the following diagram align the PG Speed Control Card with the catch position as shown by 1 and 2 and fit it precisely to the Option A connector Then pass the spacer through the spacer hole at the Card Refer to illustration A Check to be sure that it is precisely aligned with the 4CN position and snap it into the proper position Option A mounting spacer PG Speed Control Card Spacer mounting hole Accessory SRNT41028 9 Drsna Control x 4CN board G 7CN Inverter mounting base Option A e A g Connector pee ew m Lo d inverter mount Option UN 2CN i i ingbase Spacer mounting hole Option C d i PA Connector E o PG Speed OR ON ESPERTI Control Card i J i z Spacer ose eran panos f Mounting Y l onn WE H Option D IT base side Option D i Ei o deq Option A side Connector i t i i PP cee necne tetuer i xr E weesreeeepeeut d Spacer mounting OE e Ges S AN C cd ceceococoIhse EN i o oj Ne ud Front Enlargement Side 2 40 Installation Chapter 2 m PG Speed Control Card Terminal Blocks e 3G3FV PPGA2 F
114. name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f V A with Open Loop Control 02 07 Elapsed Time Set 0 to 65535 h Advanced 02 08 Elapsed Time Run O or 1 Advanced Note These parameters cannot be changed during operation e Set the initial elapsed time in parameter 02 07 The elapsed operating time will start from this value Note When parameter 02 07 is set to the initial elapsed time the accumulated operating time will be the same as the value set in the parameter U1 13 6 112 Chapter 7 Parameter Lists 7 1 Initialize Mode Parameters 7 2 Program Mode Parameter List Parameter Lists Chapter 7 This sections lists all parameters that can be used in the Program and Initialize modes Using the Lists Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range settmg Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector A1 00 Display Used to select the language 0to6 1 OK Q Q Q Q 3 18 Language displayed on the Digital Operator 0 English 1 Japanese 2 German 3 French Select 4 Italian Language 5 Spanish 6 Portuguese Note This parameter is not ini tialized by the initialize operation Parameter No The parameter number Name The parameter name Display name The parameter name displayed on the Digital Operator Description Details of the parameter function or setting value Setting range The
115. of harmonics from the Inverter e Harmonics Harmonic Currents with Voltages e Definition Harmonics consist of electric power produced from AC power and alternating at frequencies that are integral multiples of the frequency of the AC power The following are the harmonic frequencies of a 60 or 50 Hz commercial power supply Second harmonic 120 100 Hz Third harmonic 180 150 Hz Second harmonic 120 Hz Basic frequency 60 Hz Third harmonic 180 Hz e Problems Caused by Harmonics Generation The waveform of the commercial power supply will be distorted if the commercial power supply con tains excessive harmonics Machines with such a commercial power supply will malfunction or generate excessive heat Basic frequency 60 Hz Third harmonic 180 Hz Pr SMS Distorted current waveform NG Ny e Causes of Harmonics Generation e Usually electric machines have built in circuitry that converts commercial AC power supply into DC power Such AC power however contains harmonics due to the difference in current flow between AC and DC e Obtaining DC from AC using Rectifiers and Capacitors DC voltage is obtained by converting AC voltage into a pulsating one side voltage with rectifiers and smoothing the pulsating one side voltage with capacitors Such AC current however contains har monics 2 34 Installation Chapter 2 e Inverter The Inverter as well as normal electric machines has an input current
116. on the control mode The default set tings shown in the table are for V f control Note 5 The four frequency settings must satisfy the following formula E1 04 Fmax 2 E1 06 FA gt E1 07 Fg 2 E1 09 Fm For flux vector control make the settings as follows E1 04 Fmax E1 06 FA gt E1 09 Fin User defined V f Pattern Output voltage V VIMAR mer memor Ea Br manned E1 05 vc E1 08 VMIN E1 10 i Frequency Hz FMIN FB FA FMAX E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 E1 04 5 28 Basic Operation Chapter 5 5 4 Flux Vector Control With flux vector control vector control with PG make the settings for the PG Speed Control Card select the zero speed operation method set the various auto tuning pa rameters and then adjust the gain of the speed control loop To ensure high precision torque speed control use a motor specifically designed for vector control with an integrated PG Always use an Inverter with twice the motor s ca pacity when a large load 50 or more of the rated current is applied while in zero speed such as with a vertical axis load When setting up a separate PG encoder connect it directly to the motor axis If the PG is connected to the motor via gearing or belts responses can be delayed by backlash or torsion the delayed responses can generate vibration and make control impossible 5 4 1 PG Speed Control Card Settings m Available PG Speed Control Cards There are
117. possible DC reactor built in No item Control method Sine wave PWM high carrier frequency control Carrier frequen cy 0 4 to 15 kHz 2 0 to 15 kHz in vector control 0 4 to 10 kHz 2 0 to 10 kHz in vector control 0 4 to 2 5 kHz 2 0 to 2 5 kHz in vector con trol Speed control range 1 100 1 1000 with PG Speed control precision 10 295 0 02 with PG Speed control response 5 Hz 30 Hz with PG Torque charac teristics 150 at 1 Hz 150 at 0 rpm with PG A torque limit function is incorporated Torque control precision 5 with PG Torque control response 40 Hz with PG Frequency con trol range 0 1 to 400 Hz Frequency pre cision temperature characteristics Digital references 0 01 10 to 40 C Analog references 0 1 25 10 C Frequency set ting resolution Digital references 0 01 Hz Less than 100 Hz 0 1 Hz 100 Hz or higher Analog references 0 0 03 Hz 60 Hz 11 bits sign Output frequen cy resolution 0 001 Hz Overload capac ity 150 of rated current for one minute Frequency set ting signal 0 to 10 VDC 20 KQ 0 to 10 VDC 20 KQ voltage input or 4 to 20 mA 250 Q current input Acceleration De celeration time 0 01 to 6000 0 s 4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings Braking torque Approximately 20 Increment pos
118. purpose motor characteristics are used Operating time minutes Cold start Hot start i i Motor current 0 100 150 200 E2 01 is 100 Momentary Power Loss Settings L2 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit Vf with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector L2 01 PwrL Selection Oto2 o0 Basicor Advanced Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation Setting Function Disabled An under voltage fault is detected when there is a momentary power loss Enabled Restarts if power is restored within the L2 02 time An under voltage fault is detected for a longer power loss Enabled during CPU operation Restarts if power is restored while the CPU is operating An under voltage fault is not detected e This parameter specifies the processing that is performed when a momentary power loss occurs e When power loss ridethrough is enabled setting 1 or 2 operation will be restarted after a speed search if the power is restored within the allowed time interval e When power loss ridethrough is disabled setting 0 an under voltage fault will be detected if power is interrupted for more than 15 ms Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif Vif with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector L2 02 PwrL Ridethru t 0 0 to 2 0 Basic or Advanced Note 1 This parameter can
119. range from 0 to 10 V Voltage input within a range from 0 to 10 V With minus voltage rotation is in the opposite direc tion of the run command Current input within a range from 4 to 20 mA e Input by Optional Card The Inverter can be set to use any of the above types by designating it with parameters e A maximum of eight frequency references can be registered in the Inverter Including inching this enables multi step speed operation with up to nine speed steps via remote multi step reference inputs m PID Control e The Inverter has a PID control function enabling easy follow up control e Follow up control is a control method in which the Inverter varies the output frequency to match the feedback value from the sensor with the set target value e Follow up control can be applied to a variety of control operations depending on the contents detected by the sensor e PID control is available for the following applications e Speed control With a speed sensor such as a tacho generator the Inverter regulates the rotation speed of the motor regardless of the load of the motor or synchro nizes the rotation speed of the motor with that of another motor Pressure control With a pressure sensor the Inverter performs constant pressure control Flow rate control By sensing the flow rate of a fluid the Inverter performs precise flow rate control Temperature control With a temperature sensor the Inverter performs tem
120. range setting V f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Fb los Det Time i Advanced e These parameters are used to set reference values for detecting the loss of the feedback signal for PID control e Set parameter b5 13 to the detection level in 196 increments based on the feedback value correspond ing to the maximum frequency as 100 e Set parameter b5 14 to the detection time in 1 s increments so that the loss of the feedback signal will be detected when the time set elapses e PID Control Switching Function of Multi function Input By setting multi function inputs 1 through 6 the parameters H1 01 through H1 06 to the following func tions PID control characteristics can be selected e PID control ON OFF setting 19 ON PID control disabled The Inverter is in normal control PID or normal control function can be selected in advance e PID control integral value reset setting 30 ON The integral value is reset The PID integral value will be reset to zero and the integral function disabled This can be used to handle the friction of the mechanism when stopped or to reduce gain e PID control integral value hold setting 31 ON The integral value is retained The integral value in PID control can be fixed with the parameter set This can be used to handle the friction of the mechanism when stopped or to reduce gain or fluctuations 6 54 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e Adjusting PID C
121. rect Check the motor s E2 01 rated current setting OL2 Inv Overloaded The Inverter overload protection function has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value e The load is too large The acceleration time decel eration time and cycle time are too short Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceleration and cycle times e The V f characteristics voltage is too high Check the V f characteristics e The Inverter s capacity is too low Replace the Inverter with one that has a larger capacity e High carrier frequency Decrease the C6 01 setting Maintenance Operations Fault Display OL3 Overtorque Det 1 Meaning There has been a current greater than the setting in L6 02 for longer than the setting in L6 03 Chapter 8 Probable causes and remedies Make sure that the settings in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropriate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque OL4 Overtorque Det 2 There has been a current greater than the setting in L6 05 for longer than the setting in L6 06 Make sure that the current setting in L6 05 and time setting in L6 06 are appropriate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque OS Over speed The speed has been greater than the setting in F1 08 for longer than the setting in F1 09 e Overshooting Undershooting are o
122. select user parameter Parameters A2 01 to A2 32 only can be set read 2 QUICK START 3 BASIC 4 ADVANCED Select Used to select the control Control method for the Inverter Method 0 V f control 1 V f with PG 2 Open loop vector Control 3 Flux vector Method Note This parameter is not ini tialized by the initialize operation Initialize Used to initialize the parameters using the specified method 0 Noinitializing 1110 Initializes using the Init User parameters Parameters 2220 Initializes using a two wire sequence 3330 Initializes using a three wire sequence Password When a password has been set in A1 05 this function write protects the password input section of the Operation mode parameter Note If the password is Enter changed parameters Password A1 01 to A1 03 and A2 01 to A2 32 can no longer be changed Program mode parameters can be changed 7 3 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display g g Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Setting the Used to set a four digit number Password as the password Note This parameter is not usu ally displayed When the password A1 04 is dis Select played hold down the Re Password set Select Key and press the Menu Key and the password will be dis played Setting the Used t
123. set b1 01 and b1 02 to the required settings in advance Note 2 If b1 01 and b1 02 are set to 0 there is no difference in the two modes Note 3 Frequencies set from the Digital Operator using the speed setting will be entered in frequency reference parameters 1 to 8 d1 01 to d1 08 or the inching frequency reference parameter d1 09 regardless of whether the mode is Remote Mode or Local Mode Note 4 Multi function inputs 1 to 6 will be enabled regardless of whether the mode is Remote Mode or Local Mode The following settings however will be disabled in Local Mode Stop command 3 wire sequence selection Set value 0 Note 5 For safety reasons run signals input while changing from Local Mode to Remote Mode are usually ignored Input the run signal again after the mode has changed It is possible how ever to stop such run signals being ignored by setting the Local Remote Key selection parameter b1 07 to 1 If this setting is made when the mode changes from Local Mode to Remote Mode the Inverter will start running immediately Take steps to ensure the safety of the system for such operation 3 31 n Chapter 4 Trial Operation 4 1 Procedure 4 2 Operation Example Trial Operation Chapter 4 m Cautions and Warnings NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution 4 2 Turn ON the input power sup
124. set patterns VF Applicable for settings E1 04 to Selection E1 10 Maximum Output voltage V frequency VMAX FMAX E05 5o ome Max Frequency Maximum VC E VEEE voltage E1 08 VMAX VMIN E1 10 vax FB FA FAX FMIN Voltage Et 09 Et 07 E1 06 E1 04 Maximum voltage frequency Note To set V f characteristics FA in a straight line set the Base same values for E1 07 Frequency and E1 09 In this case the setting for E1 08 will Intermedi be ignored ate fre Always ensure that the quency four frequencies are set FB in the following manner Mid E1 04 FMAX Frequency E1 06 FA gt E1 07 FB A 2 E1 09 FMIN Intermedi For flux vector control ate voltage make the settings as fol toe EN 04 FMAX E zm Mia voltage E1 06 FA gt E1 09 A FMIN Minimum frequency FMIN Min Frequency Frequency Hz Minimum voltage VMIN Min Voltage 7 25 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range setting Display Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Mid Output Used to set the middle Frequency frequency and voltage in the B constant output area Normally this setting is not required Mid Note When using a high speed frequency motor set the characteris B tics of the constant output area gt Outpu
125. setting E1 02 Motor Selection E2 Motor setup E2 01 Motor Rated FLA F Options F1 PG Speed F1 01 PG Pulses Rev Control Card H Terminal H1 Multi function H1 01 Terminal 3 Sel input H2 Multi function H2 01 Terminal 9 Sel output L Protection L1 Motor protection L1 01 MOL Fault Select L2 instantaneous power L1 02 MOL Time Const failure compensation o Operator 01 Display setting 01 01 User Monitor Sel selection 01 02 Power On Monitor 02 Function 02 01 Local Remote Key selection 02 02 Oper Stop Key 3 27 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 3 6 Auto tuning Mode The auto tuning function automatically tunes and sets the required motor parameters when operating in the open loop or flux vector control modes When the rated voltage rated current rated frequency rated rotational frequency and number of poles listed on the motor s nameplate have been input and the Run Key is pressed the motor parameters calculated from these values are written to E1 01 through E2 08 automatically The auto tuning mode won t be displayed if V f control has been selected m Precautions for Auto tuning Operation N Caution Do not connect a load to the motor when performing auto tuning Doing so may re sult in personal injury or equipment damage e
126. setting allows only the user selected parameters up to 32 to be displayed or changed Select the desired parameters as User Parameters in parameters A2 01 through A2 32 This setting allows the parameters required to start the Inverter about 25 to be displayed or changed This setting allows the commonly used parameters to be displayed or changed This setting allows all parameters to be displayed or changed Setting Operation Only User Level Quick start Basic Advanced m Setting the Control Mode Use parameter A1 02 to select one of the four control modes This parameter is not initialized by the initialize operation and it cannot be changed during operation Valid access levels setting Vif VA with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector A1 02 Control Method 0t03 2 Quickstart Basic or Advanced Control Mode Settings Parameter Default number Display name Setting range Function V f control without pulse generator normal V f control V f control with pulse generator V f control using a PG Speed Control Card Vector control without pulse generator Vector control using the Inverter s internal speed information Vector control with pulse generator Vector control using a PG Speed Control Card Setting V f Control V f w PG Fdbk Open Loop Vector Flux Vector Control Mode Characteristics Characteristic Basic control method V f
127. settings S Curve Acc Dec S curve characteristics for accel decel times Motor Slip Comp Slip compensation function settings Torque Comp Torque compensation function settings ASR Tuning Speed control adjustment Carrier Freq Carrier frequency settings Hunting Prev Hunting prevention settings Factory Tuning Not used Can t be set Reference Preset Reference Frequency reference settings when using Operator Reference Limits Frequency upper and lower limit settings Jump Frequencies Prohibited frequency settings Sequence Up Down Accel Decel stop hold frequency setting Torque Control Not used Can t be set 6 36 V f Pattern Motor Setup Motor parameters Motor parameters are set manually Control Method 2 Control mode settings for second motor V f Pattern 2 Motor Setup 2 Parameter settings for second motor Advanced Operation Options Function PG Option Setup Parameter settings for a PG Speed Control Card Chapter 6 Control mode Vit w PG Open loop Vector Flux Vector Al 14 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Command Card DI 08 16 Setup Parameter settings for a Digital Command Card AO 08 12 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Monitor Card Not used Not used Do not change these settings PO 36F Setup Par
128. signals that are input Mode during mode switching are ignored Input Run signals after switching the mode LOC REM Run signals become RUN Sel effective immediately after switching to the Remote mode Operation Used to set the operation when for run a run command is input in a commands mode other than drive mode in modes 0 Run command ineffective other than Ignore run command drive mode Switch to drive mode and input the run command again in order to run Run command effective Run according to run RUNCMD command at PRG Note Safety precautions are re quired when using the 1 setting Note The 1 setting is not valid if b1 02 0 7 6 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 m DC Braking b2 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 3 Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Excitation Used to set the frequency which level DC starts DC injection braking the injection initial excitation for flux vector starting control in units of 0 1 Hz when frequency deceleration to stop is selected Note When b2 01 is less than E1 09 E1 09 becomes the DC starting frequency Only with flux vector con trol is b2 01 used DC Sets the DC injection braking injection current as a percentage of the braking Inverter rated current current Note The initial excitation cur rent for flux vector control DCInj d
129. so may result in equipment damage e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity e Locations close to power supplies Transportation Precautions ZN Caution A Caution A Caution Do not hold by front cover or panel instead hold by the radiation fin heat sink while transporting the product Doing so may result in injury Do not pull on the cables Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunc tion Use the eye bolts only for transporting the Inverter Using them for transporting the machinery may result in injury or malfunction Installation Precautions NWARNING NWARNING N Caution N Caution N Caution Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety A holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety Not doing so may result in injury Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of operation and power interruption Not doing so may result in injury Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clear ances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices Not doing so may result in fire or malfunction Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product Doing so may result in fire or malfunction Do not apply any s
130. spe cial motor for use with vector control or change to flux vector control m If Motor Deceleration is Slow e The deceleration time is long even when control resistance is connected e Stall prevention during deceleration enabled is set When control resistance is connected set pa rameter L3 04 stall prevention selection during deceleration to 0 disabled When this parameter is set to 1 enabled the factory set default control resistance is not used e The deceleration time setting is too long Check the deceleration time setting parameters C1 02 C1 04 C1 06 and C1 08 e Motor torque is insufficient If the parameter constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault then the motor s power is limit ed Consider increasing the motor capacity e The torque limit has been reached When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7 01 to L7 04 no torque will be output beyond that limit This can cause the deceleration time to be too long Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable If the torque limit has been set by multi function analog inputs H3 05 and H3 09 set value 10 to 13 check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable 8 17 Maintenance Operations Chapter 8 If the Vertical axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied e The sequence is incorrect The Inverter goes into DC braking status for 0 5 seconds after deceleration is completed This is the factory set d
131. sti de 1 1 2 Nornmeric at fe re esaet Ee e ERE weed Cera e Bite sh Weel DOW e Gosek ee E REA EE 1 8 New Functions T LL bRSeeRSHC UE RI eo ee Ae ee et e a 1 11 1 3 1 Software Ver VSG101040 esseeeeeeeee RR 1 11 1 3 2 Software Ver VSG101043 elsleeeeeeeee er 1 13 1 3 3 Software Ver VSG101113 seeeeeeeeee hr 1 14 1 3 4 Software Ver VSG101114 2 0 Rr s 1 17 Chapter 2 Installation 252299 44 Et err TE 2 1 2 2 IVIQUIUDE a us oec iuh EROR FAA CU LR CRUCE ADR RETOUR RERO ES LATE EUR 2 2 2 13 Dimensions re d tke be RU E e EUER UR E SN E 2 2 2 1 2 Installation Conditions lsleleseeleeeeee I 2 8 WINS cue sx eb UENIRE NUR ere DERART NAE UR Coen Sooke eed SS 2 11 2 2 1 Removing and Mounting the Front Cover 0 0 0 0 ee eee eee 2 12 2 2 2 Terminals i5 CR mf e p to Cep ER o ESE 2 14 2 2 3 Standard Connection Diagram 0 0 0c eee eee 2 18 2 2 4 Wiring Around the Main Circuit 0 ee eee eee 2 23 2 2 5 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals 2 39 2 2 6 Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards 0 0000000008 2 40 Chapter 3 Preparing for Operation 9M 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 Using the Digital Operator 4 syi sete ec ek EAS RORIS CUORE eS 3 2 Modes pehi rosata n ad a eC Beber PERDU oer C de a LE 3 3 Operation Mode eub bep ure pube esa ub bU pubes 3 10 Initialize Mode ose Rr b
132. stopped Applies initial excitation when flux vector control is being used e DC braking is used to prevent the motor from rotating due to inertia or external forces when the Inverter is stopped e DC braking is performed if the DC braking input is ON while the Inverter is stopped e f a run command or jog command jog frequency reference forward jog or reverse jog is input the DC braking will be cleared and motor operation will be started Run command OFF ON DC braking command OFF ON Output frequency DC braking DC braking E1 09 Min output frequency b2 01 Excitation level e External Search 1 Settings 61 OFF Normal operation ON Starts a speed search from the maximum frequency e External Search 2 Settings 62 OFF Normal operation ON Starts a speed search from the set frequency the present reference frequency The speed search function applies a lower voltage than normal and finds the speed at the current flow ing at that time The speed search is determined to be completed when the frequency is lowered from the maximum frequency or a set frequency and the current that is output falls below a fixed value When the speed search is completed the speed is accelerated to the frequency reference according to the acceleration time that has been set For V f with PG or flux vector control detection occurs at the motor speed with PG feedback so there is no need to set this function
133. t BasicorAdvanced e This parameter enables or disables the STOP on the Digital Operator it cannot be changed during operation Disabled The STOP Key is disabled when the run command is input from an external terminal Enabled The STOP Key is enabled at all times during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector User Defaults 0 1 o0r2 0 Basicor Advanced e This parameter is used to record or clear the user defaults it cannot be changed during operation Once the user defaults have been recorded parameter A1 03 can be used to initialize the Inverter s parameters to these defaults e f the message MAX Param Change is displayed the memory capacity is full Reduce the number of parameters that changed their default settings and register them again Note After the parameter 02 03 is set the Digital Operator s display will return to 0 when parameter registration processing is completed 6 111 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Setting Function No change Retain current settings Record user defaults Record the current parameter settings as user defaults Clear user defaults Clear the recorded user defaults Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Inverter Model amp Ot
134. the main circuit is turned off by the contact of the thermal relay e Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and induction noise Power MCCB 3G3FV 3G3IV PLF NE Yim ao aa se filter Induction noise Radio noise Induction Noise Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line causing the controller to malfunction Radio Noise Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make noise Signal line Controller 2 31 Installation Chapter 2 e Countermeasures Against Induction Noise As described previously a noise filter can be used to prevent induction noise from being generated on the output side Alternatively cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent induction noise Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces induction noise Power MCCB 3G3FV Metal pipe Signal line Controller e Countermeasures Against Radio Interference Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as the input and output lines To reduce radio noise install noise filters on both input and output sides and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible Steel box Power MCCB j 3G3FV supply IR Noise E e E Noise filter
135. the motor s nameplate This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit Vif with Open Loop Control E2 01 Motor Rated FLA 10 to 20096 Note 2 Quick start Basic or Advanced Note 1 The setting range is 10 to 20096 of the Inverter s rated output current Note 2 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter 5 23 Basic Operation Chapter 5 5 3 2 V f Pattern Selection E1 03 Set the V f pattern with parameter E1 03 This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif yn an Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector E1 03 V f Selection 0 to F Quick start Eu Not applicable or Advanced The V f pattern settings can be divided into two categories the 15 preset patterns settings O through E and custom user set patterns setting F The factory default setting for E1 03 is F user defined V f pattern but the contents of this setting are actually the same as setting 1 m Selecting a Preset V f Pattern Settings 0 through E Refer to the following table when selecting one of the 15 preset patterns Characteristics Applications Setting Specifications General purpose These patterns are for general purpose 50 Hz applications 60 Hz Use these patterns when there is a roughly proportional relationship between
136. the rotational speed and load such as in straight line conveyors Variable torque Use these patterns when there is a quadratic or cubic relationship between the rotational speed and load such as in fans or pumps 60 Hz Voltage saturation at 50 Hz 72 Hz Voltage saturation at 60 Hz 50 Hz cubic 50 Hz quadratic 60 Hz cubic 60 Hz quadratic 50 Hz low starting torque 50 Hz high starting torque 60 Hz low starting torque 60 Hz high starting torque 90 Hz Voltage saturation at 60 Hz 120 Hz Voltage saturation at 60 Hz 180 Hz Voltage saturation at 60 Hz High starting Normally it isn t necessary to use these torque patterns because starting torque is ensured by automatic torque boost functions High speed These patterns are for applications that operation must rotate at frequencies greater than 60 Hz A fixed voltage is applied at frequencies greater than 60 Hz moo oc moo ocn O N Note 1 Select a high starting torque V f pattern only in the following cases The wiring distance between the Inverter and motor is relatively large greater than 150 m A large torque is required at startup such as heavy axis loads e An AC or DC reactor is connected to the Inverter s input or output Note 2 The parameter settings for E1 04 through E1 10 will be changed automatically when one of these patterns is selected There are three possible settings for these param
137. the speed is limited as shown in the following table Signal polarity Run command Speed limit direction Voltage input Forward rotation Speed is limited in the forward direction Reverse rotation Speed is limited in the reverse direction Voltage input Forward rotation Speed is limited in the reverse direction Reverse rotation Speed is limited in the forward direction The speed limit value is zero for rotation opposite to the speed limit direction For example when a voltage is being input and the forward rotation command is ON the effec tive range of the torque control is from zero to the speed limit value in the forward direction when parameter d5 05 the speed limit bias is set to O Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector H3 01 Term 13 Signal Oor1 0 Basicor Advanced Note Set the signal level to match the speed limit voltage being input This parameter cannot be changed during operation e Limit with Parameter Setting d5 03 2 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number setting yr ve 2n Open Loop GODUOE em m 120 Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation e Set the speed limit as a percentage of the maximum frequency The max frequency is 100 The sign of the parameter setting and the direction of the run command dete
138. time selec time while the Inverter tion power is on is accumulated Elapsed Cumulative Inverter run Time Run time Only Inverter output time is accumulated 7 53 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range setting Display Vif Flux name control vector Factory use Do not set Init mode sel Note The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The values for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Invert er are given above 7 54 i AD hh Chapter Maintenance Operations 8 Protective and Diagnostic Functions 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 3 Maintenance and Inspection Maintenance Operations Chapter 8 8 1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions 8 1 1 Fault Detection When the Inverter detects a fault the fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator the fault contact output operates and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing the motor to coast to a stop The stopping method can be selected for some faults and the selected stopping method will be used with these faults Before restarting reset the error using one of the following procedures If the run com mand is ON the reset will be ignored Turn OFF the run command before resetting Turn ON the fault reset signal A multi function input H1 01 to H1 06 must be set to 14 Fault Reset Press the RESET Key on the Digital Opera
139. to EN standards The following function improvements were added to support noise reduction e Default Setting Change for Carrier Frequency Parameters C6 10 to C6 03 The default carrier frequency setting for 400 V class Inverters was changed for the reduction of output noise e Inverter Overload Function Change OL2 Detection The Inverter overload detection function was changed because the Inverter s rated output current would be reduced if it was set higher than the carrier frequency Note If an Inverter overload is detected before a motor overload 0L1 lower the Inverter s carrier fre quency setting Operation Selection after Switching to Remote Mode Parameter b1 07 Operation can be switched between Digital Operator and the frequency reference b1 01 and between Digital Operator and the run command b1 01 by setting the local remote selection using the Digital Operator s operation mode selection key or multi function inputs H1 01 to H1 06 The new function can be used to enable or disable run commands when switching between the two forms of operation Note If the run command is enabled when switching operation the Inverter can start operation immedi ately after switching operation You must take appropriate safety measures when using this func tion m PG Disconnection Detection PGO Detection Time Setting Parameter F1 14 A setting for PG disconnection PGO was added so that the detection time can be adjusted New Fu
140. to produce greater accuracy Improved PID Control Additions have been made to PID control to increase the range of possible applications e PID Control Reverse Characteristics Parameter b5 09 Previously only positive characteristic PID control in which the feedback value increases when the Inverter s output frequency increases was possible In addition to this reverse characteristic PID con trol is now possible in which the feedback value decreases when the Inverter s output frequency increases e Frequency Reference PID Control Parameters b5 01 and b5 10 A control method using the frequency reference and PID control has been added between the previous frequency reference or PID control This is ideal for applications in which the target speed is set but fine adjustments need to be made with PID control such as tension control e Reverse Motor Control for PID Control Parameter b5 11 Motor rotation in only one direction was possible for previous PID control but a reverse control setting has been added to produce rotation in the reverse direction when the PID control result is negative 1 14 Introduction Chapter 1 e Feedback Loss Detection for PID Control Parameters b5 12 to b5 14 A function has been added to detect the loss of the feedback signal e g as a result of line disconnec tion and specify the operation when an error is detected e PID Control Target Value Added to Multi function Inputs Parameters H
141. torque is too strong and malfunctions and short circuits may result if the tightening torque is too weak m Selecting the Number of PG Encoder Pulses e 3G3FV PPGA2 PPGB2 e The maximum response frequency is 30 kHz e Taking into consideration the encoder pulse deviation phase difference 90 45 and the waveform when the cable is long select a smaller number of pulses than the ones shown in the following table Motor s maximum speed r min 1 800 Number of encoder pulses p r 500 600 Maximum encoder frequency kHz 15 15 e 3G3FV PPGD2 PPGX2 e The maximum response frequency is 300 kHz e When the encoder pulse deviation phase difference 90 45 is taken into consideration the number of encoder pulses can be calculated by means of the following formula 60 x maximum response frequency 300 000 Hz Number of encoder pulses p r 2 x motor s maximum rotation speed r min e f the motor s maximum speed is less than 4 000 r min an encoder of 1 000 to 2 000 p r is recom mended Even if an encoder with higher than required resolution is selected it will not improve the speed control range or precision 2 48 IM Chapter 3 Preparing for Operation 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 Using the Digital Operator Modes Operation Mode Initialize Mode Program Mode Auto tuning Mode Modified Constants Mode Operation Mode Selection Key and Local Remote Selection Input Preparing for
142. use this function Level to lower the main circuit under voltage detection level KEB By decelerating simultaneously deceleration with a momentary power rate interruption this function produces regenerative energy and utilizes this energy to counter the power interruption Select the deceleration rate to be applied after the KEB command set value 65 or 66 set for multi function inputs is input Set as a percentage the deceleration frequency rate for when the time set in L2 02 has KEB elapsed after KEB command Frequency input If 80 is set deceleration will be performed taking the time set in L2 02 up to 80 of the output frequency when KEB is input If L2 06 is set to 0 0 C1 09 will automatically decelerate to the base so that the undervoltage UV of the main circuit will not be detected Note 1 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The values for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter arre given above 7 45 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Note 2 These are values for a 200 V class Inverter Values for the 400 V class Inverter are double m Stall Prevention L3 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display g g Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector L3 01 Stall pre 0 Disabled Acceleration as 0t02 1 NO B B B X 6 100 vention dur set With a large load the ing accel motor ma
143. useful when the load cannot sustain a torque above a certain level or regenerative torque above a certain level The two ways to apply a torque limit are listed below The lower torque limit will be used if both of these methods are set 1 Setting a torque limit with the parameters 2 Limiting torque with the analog inputs The precision of the torque limit is 5 for output frequencies above 10 Hz but the preci sion is lower for output frequencies below 10 Hz Use flux vector control if you want to apply a torque limit at low speed below 10 Hz m Setting a Torque Limit with Parameters Torque limits can be set separately for the 4 ways that torque can be applied forward torque reverse torque forward regenerative torque and reverse forward regenerative torque These parameters can not be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f V with Open Loop Flux Control PG Vector Vector Torque Limit Fwd 0 to 300 Not applicable Basic or Advanced Torque Limit Rev Torque Limit Fwd Rgn Torque Limit Rev Rgn 6 3 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 The following diagram shows the relationship between each parameter and the output torque Output torque Forward direction L7 01 L7 04 Regenerative torque Motor speed Reverse Forward Regenerative torque L7 03 L7 02 Reverse direction Note When t
144. when switched to remote mode from local mode Take necessary measures for safety 6 41 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit MS zm OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector b1 08 RUN CND at Advanced PRG Explanation of Settings Setting Description The run command in any mode other than drive mode is disabled The Inverter will start operating with the run command input again in drive mode A run command is enabled The Inverter will start operating according to the present run command in drive mode or any other mode Note The run command is disabled if the Digital Operator is specified with parameter b1 02 set to 0 Note If the parameter b1 08 is set to 1 the Inverter will start operating regardless of whether parame ters are adjusted in program mode or not Take necessary safety measures to prevent accidents m Setting DC Injection Braking b2 01 to 04 The DC injection braking function decelerates by applying a DC magnetic field to the motor DC injection braking time at start This is effective for temporarily stopping and then restarting without regenerative processing a mo tor coasting by inertia DC injection braking time at stop When there is a large load this is used to prevent coasting by inertia when the motor is not complete ly stopped by normal deceleration The stopping time can be shortened by lengthening the
145. will be automatically overwritten 4 8 Trial Operation Chapter 4 m Setting the V f Pattern e When auto tuning has not been executed correctly i e when Tune Aborted is displayed switch the control mode to V f control and set the V f pattern e Procedure for changing the control mode Key sequence Explanation it p fee ok Displays operation mode Displays initialize mode Puts the Unit in initialize mode Select Language display 2times EEF d Press the Up Arrow Key and the control mode select is i displayed Control mode select A1 02 is displayed iJ Pl E t 2 times Selects open loop vector control The set values are overwritten t Returns to the control mode select display Returns to the operation mode display e Set the control mode to V f control and then set the following three items These parameters cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit Vf with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Max Voltage Quick start Basic or Advanced Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit Vf with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Base Frequency Quick start Basic or Advanced Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif VA with Open Loop Flux Control Ve
146. 0 3GSFV A4150 Open chassis type 3G3FV B4185 3G3FV B4220 3G3FV B4300 3G3FV B4370 3G3FV B4450 3G3FV B4550 3G3FV B4750 E 3GSFV B411K E 3G3FV B416K E 3G3FV B418K E 3G3FV B422K E 3G3FV B430K E 1 3 Introduction Chapter 1 m Selection of Modes for Vector Control and V f Control e The 3G3FV has the following four control modes e Open loop vector control without PG Factory default e Flux vector control with PG e V f control without PG e V f control with PG PG stands for pulse generator encoder e Vector control is a method for removing interferences with magnetic flux and torque and controlling torque according to references Current vector control independently controls magnetic flux current and torque current by simultaneously controlling the motor s primary current and its phases This al lows smooth rotation and high torque along with accurate speed and torque control at very low speeds e Vector control can be replaced from the conventional V f control system If the motor parameter re quired for vector control is unknown it can be set automatically with the auto tuning function e The respective control modes are effective for the following applications Open loop vector control without PG General variable speed drive e Flux vector control with PG Simple servo drive high precision speed control torque control e V f control wit
147. 00 w 80 A Note A Advanced Not applicable 5 52 Chapter 6 Advanced Operation 6 1 Open loop Vector Control 6 2 Normal V f Control 6 3 Flux Vector Control 6 4 V f Control With PG Feedback 6 5 Common Functions Advanced Operation Chapter 6 6 1 Open loop Vector Control This section summarizes the functions that can be used with open loop vector control vector control without PG feedback and then provides detailed explanations of the functions that are specific to open loop vector control 6 1 1 Summary of Open loop Vector Control Functions An OK in the control mode column indicates that the parameter can be changed in that control mode The functions specific to open loop vector control are marked with a X and described in more detail later in this section Application Function Sequence Comments Settings such as the reference input method Control mode Vif w PG Open loop Vector Flux Vector DC Braking DC braking function settings Speed Search Speed search function settings Delay Timers Timer function settings PID Control PID control settings Reference Hold Accel deceleration time dwell function settings Not used Can t be set Energy Saving Not used Can t be set Zero Servo Not used Can t be set Tuning Accel Decel Acceleration deceleration time settings S Curv
148. 03 Reverse side Setting range Default setting Control mode Vit control Vif Open with loop PG vector Flux vector 7 49 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 m Hardware Protection L8 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 3 Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector DB resistor Disabled Braking resistor is protection not used or the Braking Resistor Unit is used DB Enabled Protects the Resistor braking resistor from Prot overheating Inverter Sets the detection temperature overheat for the Inverter overheat detection detection pre alarm in C pre alarm Note The pre alarm detects level when the cooling fin tem OH perature reaches the set Pre Alarm value Lvl Operation Sets the operation for when the after Inverter overheat pre alarm Inverter goes ON overheat 0 Ramp to stop in pre alarm deceleration time C1 02 1 Coastto stop 2 Fast stop in fast stop time C1 09 OH 3 Continue operation Monitor Pre Alarm display only Sel Note A fault will be given in set ting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in set ting 3 Input Disabled open phase 1 Enabled Detects if input protection current open phase power selection supply voltage imbalance or main circuit electrostatic Ph Loss In capacitor deterioration Sel OCCUIS
149. 096 of the mo tor s rated torque with a 10 V or 20 mA analog input 6 30 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 6 3 7 Setting Adjusting Motor Parameters m Adjusting the V f Pattern Normally it isn t necessary to adjust the V f pattern with flux vector control Adjust the V f pattern when you want to change the maximum frequency maximum voltage base frequency or minimum output frequency settings Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f Vf with Open Loop Flux Control PG Vector Vector Max Frequency 40 0 to 400 0 Max Voltage 0 0 to 255 0 Base Frequency 0 0 to 400 0 Min Frequency 0 0 to 400 0 Note 1 Q Quick Start Basic or Advanced A Advanced only Note 2 These voltages are for the 200 V class Double the voltage for 400 V class Inverters Note 3 The default setting for E1 09 depends on the control mode The default settings shown in the table are for flux vector control Note 4 The three frequency settings must satisfy the following formula E1 04 Fmax E1 06 Fa gt E1 09 Fryin V f Pattern Output voltage V VMAX E1 05 i Frequency Hz FMIN Fa FMAX E1 09 E1 06 E1 04 e Units for V f Pattern Settings The units used for V f pattern frequency settings can be changed when flux vector control has been selected This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Va
150. 0to 500 1 o Not applicable This parameter cannot be changed during operation Note When b2 08 is 100 it indicates the motor s no load current value motor magnetic flux current 6 43 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Timing Chart Run command OFF ON Output frequency The motor excitation current is limited to the Motor excitation current b2 08 LM motor s rated current or 8096 of the Inverter s rated current whichever is smaller Magnetic flux B current of b2 03 motor under i control b2 08 100 Control mode Baseblock time Speed control Startup DC braking initial excitation e The magnetic flux in the motor can be brought up faster by setting b2 08 greater than 100 so that a larger current flows when the DC injection braking at startup initial excitation function starts The magnetic flux will rise approximately twice as fast when b2 08 is set to 200 e The magnetic flux in the motor will rise more slowly when b2 08 is set below 100 In general do not set b2 08 below 100 although operation with b2 08 0 is the same as b2 08 100 and the magnetic flux is raised by the set DC injection braking current b2 02 e The sound generated from the motor during startup DC injection braking may increase as the magnet ic compensation value in b2 08 is increased e f the delay before the start of control due to the DC injection braking initial excitation time at start setting in b2 03 is
151. 1 02 A function was added to Run Source Selection so that the Inverter run command can be input via Devi ceNet communications e Communications External Fault Input Parameters F9 01 to F9 03 A function was added to support an external fault input from DeviceNet communications to stop the Inverter when an error occurs Sequence settings and operation designation for errors for the commu nications external fault input have been added m Two motor Switching Control A function was added to enable switching control between two motors using one Inverter The following function additions were made to support this new functionality e Control Mode Setting Second Motor Parameter E3 01 A control mode setting was added so that the second motor can be set to a different mode Note The control mode setting was limited to O V f control without PG or 2 open loop vector control but was changed in system version VSG101043 to support all control modes 0 to 3 e V f Pattern Settings for Second Motor Parameters E4 01 to E4 06 V f pattern settings were added so that the second motor can be set to a different pattern 1 11 Introduction Chapter 1 e Parameter Settings for Second Motor Parameters E5 01 to E5 06 Parameter settings were added so that different parameters can be set for the second motor a Inverter Output Noise Reduction The noise output by 400 V class Inverters was reduced to reduce the affect on peripheral devices and conform
152. 1 09 elapses Timer Function Input Used with the b4 ON OFF delay timers and timer output PID Disable Disables PID control Multi Accel Decel 2 accel decel time selector 2 Program Lockout Parameters write protected when OFF Trim Control Increase Adds the d4 02 trim control level to the analog frequency reference Trim Control Decrease Subtracts the d4 02 trim control level from the analog frequency reference Ref Sample Hold ON Retains the analog value Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Setting Function Control mode Vif Open loop Flux w PG Vector Vector Terminal 13 14 Switch Selects terminal 14 when ON External Fault Any combination of the following can be set as needed Input Normally open or normally closed Detection mode Always or During operation only Stopping method Decel Coast Emergency or Continue PID Integral Reset ON Resets the integral value with control disabled PID Integral Hold ON Retains the integral value DC Injection Activate Performs DC braking when ON External search 1 Speed search from max frequency External search 2 Speed search from frequency reference Energy saving operation according to b8 01 and b8 02 Not used Do not input this setting Speed Torque Control Change Torque Control when ON Zero servo Command Zero Servo operation when ON ASR Gain Switch ON Use proportional gain in C5 0
153. 1 4B 14 bits analog 3 inputs Digital Reference 3GSIV PDIO8 8 bit digital input BCD binary Card 3G3IV PDI16H2 16 bit digital input BCD binary PG Speed Control 3GSFV PPGA2 Open collector compatible single input Card 3G3FV PPGB2 Open collector compatible A B phase input 3G3FV PPGD2 Line driver compatible single input 3GSFV PPGX2 Line driver compatible A B phase input Analog Monitor Card 3G3IV PAO08 8 bit analog output 2 channels 3G3IV PAO12 12 bit analog output 2 channels Pulse Monitor Card 3GS3IV PPO36F Pulse frequency output DLO S 5550 0 0 o w 3 Insert the accessory spacer into the spacer mounting hole in the Inverters mounting base 4 Align the Optional Card connector with the connector position on the control board and then pass the spacer through the spacer mounting hole on the card Press firmly until the spacer snaps into place 5 Connect the Optional Card s FG connection line to the Inverter s FG terminal terminal 12 Option A 4CN Control board T0000 Option A connector s 2CN Option C connector 3CN Option D connector gee 6 ser EE TRA BEI Front View Side View m Setting a Analog Reference Card F2 When using a 3G3IV PAI14B PA114U Analog Reference Card set parameter b1 01 reference selec tion to 3 option When using a 3G3IV PATH 4B set the function for channels 1 to 3 with parameter F2
154. 17 multi step speed 7 Multi accel decel time 1 OK OK OK OK 5 18 8 Baseblock NO contact a Base block ON OK OK OK OK 6 79 9 Baseblock NC contact b Base block OFF OK OK OK OK 6 79 A Accel decel ramp hold ON Accel decel stopped OK OK OK OK 6 79 frequency on hold B OH2 alarm signal input ON OH2 will be OK OK OK OK 6 80 displayed 7 36 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Setting Function Control mode value Vif Open loop Flux w PG Vector vector Multi function analog input selection ON Enable V f mode selection ON Speed feedback control disabled normal V f control Speed control integral reset ON Integral control disabled Not used Do not set UP command MOP Increase Always set with the DOWN command DOWN command MOP Decrease Always set with the UP command FJOG command ON Forward rotation for jog frequency d1 09 RJOG command ON Reverse rotation for jog frequency d1 09 Fault reset Reset when turned ON Emergency stop Fast stop Normally open condition When ON Decelerate to a stop in the emergency stop time set in c1 09 Motor 2 selection Selection of motor 1 or motor 2 for two motor switching control ON Motor 2 selected Emergency stop N C ON Decelerate to a stop in the emergency stop time set in c1 09 Timer function input Functions are set with b4 01 b4 02 and the timer function is set at the same time PID control ON OF
155. 200 mA max see note Pulse input terminal Pulse input terminal Line driver input RS 422 level input Maximum response frequency 300 kHz Common terminal Pulse monitor output terminal Pulse monitor output terminal Line driver output RS 422 level output Shielded wire connection terminal Note 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time 2 41 Installation Chapter 2 e 3G3FV PPGX2 For Flux Vector Control Mode Only Terminal i Contents Specifications Power supply for pulse generator 12 VDC 5 200 mA max see note 0 VDC GND for power supply 5 VDC 5 200 mA max see note A phase input terminal Line driver input RS 422 level input Maximum response frequency 300 kHz A phase input terminal B phase input terminal B phase input terminal Z phase input terminal Z phase input terminal Common terminal 0 VDC GND for power supply A phase output terminal Line driver output RS 422 level output A phase output terminal B phase output terminal B phase output terminal Z phase output terminal Z phase output terminal Control circuit common Control circuit GND Note 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time 2 42 Installation Chapter 2 Wiring a PG Speed Control Card e 3G3FV PPGA2 For V f With PG Feedback Mode Only Three phase SYSDRIV
156. 3 OFF Calculate gain from C5 01 C5 03 and C5 07 e Parameter Settings The following table shows the setting information for multi function inputs 1 through 6 These parame ters cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vf V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Terminal 3 Sel Basic or Advanced Terminal 4 Sel Basic or Advanced Terminal 5 Sel Basic or Advanced Terminal 6 Sel Basic or Advanced Terminal 7 Sel Basic or Advanced Terminal 8 Sel Basic or Advanced Note 1 The default settings in parentheses are the default settings when the Unit is initialized for 3 wire control Note 2 The following table shows the settings and page references for some common functions 6 77 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Function s Setting s 3 Wire Control with forward reverse rotation input 0 Multi step References 1 through 3 and Jog Reference 3 through 6 Multi Accel Decel 1 and 2 acceleration deceleration time selectors 1 and 2 7 and 1A Fast Stop Emergency stop 15 and 17 Forward and Reverse Jog commands 12 and 13 Terminal 13 14 Switch 1F Timer Function Input 18 Energy saving operation 63 Two motor switching control 16 PID control integral reset 30 PID control integral hold 31 e Local Remote Selection Setting 1 OFF Opera
157. 3 05 and H3 09 A function was added so that both the analog frequency reference and the PID control target value can be input as analog signals for frequency reference PID control e PID Integral Hold Added to Multi function Inputs Parameters H1 01 to H1 06 A function was added to hold the the calculated integral value for PID control e Jump Frequencies Added to PID Control Parameters d3 01 to d3 04 The setting disabled frequencies jump frequencies have been enabled for PID control This function can be used to avoid frequency ranges that cause machine vibration during PID control Motor Startup Responsiveness Improved Compensation functions have been added to ensure faster motor startup e Startup Torque Compensation Function for Open loop Vector Control Parameters C4 03 to C4 05 A startup torque compensation function has been added to ensure faster startup for open loop vector control If this function is used high torque can be output immediately after startup to enable better con trol of lifting and lowering operations for large machines with high friction or cranes Note This function cannot be used during regenerative condition or when using a second motor e Magnetic Flex Compensation Parameter b2 08 Large capacity motors have large electrical constants and time is required to develop magnetic flex in the motor after power has been turned ON To improve this situation a magnetic flex compensation function has be
158. 5 38G3FV A2022 r 3G3FV A2037 1 L2 L3 1 2 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 3G3FV A2055 m 1 L2 L3 2 1 2 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 3G3FV A2075 r 1 L2 L8 2 1 492 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 3G3FV A2110 m 1 L2 L8 1 2 3 T1 T2 T3 3G3FV A2150 r 1 L2 L8 2 491 92 498 T1 T2 T3 3G3FV B2185 m 1 L2 L8 1 2 3 T1 T2 T3 14 0 5 to 5 5 1 2 3 T1 T2 T3 38 14 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B2300 L1 L2 L3 3 T1 T2 T3 100 22 S 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B2370 L1 L2 L3 3 T1 T2 T3 60 x 2P 22 S 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B2450 L1 L2 L3 3 T1 T2 T3 60 x 2P 22 jS 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B2550 L1 L2 L3 3 T1 T2 T3 60 x 2P 30 0 5 to 5 5 D o 3G3FV B2220 r N r C5 D o om o 2 24 Installation Voltage class 200 V Class 3G3FV B2750 E Terminal L1 L2 L3 3 T1 T2 T3 Terminal screw Chapter 2 Wire thickness mm 100 x 2P 50 Note The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 C Voltage class 400 V Class 3G3FV A4004 Terminal L1 L2 L3 J 1 2 BT B2 TT T2 T3 Terminal s
159. 5 Corrected analog input charac teristics Pages 6 76 6 79 and 6 90 Corrected information on setting ranges Page 7 77 Added information after second bullet Page 6 81 Changed factory setting for L3 03 and de leted note Page 6 82 Added setting 3 Page 6 89 Changed setting range of L8 02 Page 6 90 Changed 10 to 5 and added informa tion Page 6 92 Added sentence and note to 02 03 Pages 7 2 to 7 48 Added corrected parameters Page 8 2 Added to introduction Pages 8 5 and 8 5 Added changed PGO DEV OPR EFO EF8 E 15 BUS CPF21 CPF22 and CPF23 Page 8 8 Added changed PGO DEV EFO ERR CALL E 15 and BUS Pages 8 9 and 8 10 Added changed OPE03 OPEO7 OPE08 and ERR Page 8 15 Information added on vertical axes Page 8 17 Information added EF Pages 9 7 and 9 9 Diagrams changed and cards add ed Pages 9 13 and 9 14 Diagrams changed and model numbers changed Pages 9 14 and 9 15 Note added and minimum con nection resistances added to table Page 9 18 Losses added to table Page 9 20 1120 changed to 120 and 182 8 changed to 182 5 Pages 9 22 to 9 25 Models changed Page 10 5 Model numbers deleted October 2001 Page 1 4 Changed Starting drive to Starting torque Page 1 11 Updated software version information Page 1 16 Added information on PG speed deviation detection in software version VSG101114 Page 5 22 Changed paramete
160. 5 2 5 3 5 5 Table of Contents 5 1 5 Acceleration Deceleration Time Settings 0 0 0 eese 5 11 5 1 6 Disabling Reverse Operation b1 04 0 0 eee eee eee 5 13 5 1 7 Selecting the Stopping Method b1 03 0 0 0 2 eee eee eee 5 13 5 1 8 Multi function Input Settings H1 01 through H1 06 00 0 5 15 Open loop Vector Control 0 0 cece I I ai 5 20 5 2 1 Auto tuning Procedure sissie iua e cece ences 5 20 5 2 2 Auto tumng Faults vps a Ee A A A 5 21 M E Comttoll p EE LCD 5 23 5 3 1 Setting the Motor Parameters 0 0 eee e 5 23 5 3 2 V f Pattern Selection E1 03 2 0 0 0c cent eA 5 24 Flux Vector Control ies ses ee es bee SO as PEA SSE PEE Gas 5 29 5 4 1 PG Speed Control Card Settings 5 29 5 4 2 Setting the Zero speed Operation Parameters 0 0 0 0 e eee eee ee 5 33 34 3 Autotuning os scs EE Re AO RS ek OAS FR RO RC RACER SPERA NUS v 5 35 5 4 4 Speed Loop ASR Structure 2 0 ee e 5 39 5 4 5 Adjusting Speed Control Loop ASR Gain 0 0 0 0 000 5 41 Vii Control with PG Lb et se Sn daa eae ad edad ats uc 5 44 5 5 1 Setting the Motor Parameters 0 ee eee eee 5 44 5 5 2 V f Pattern Selection E1 03 2 0 0 0 teen eens 5 45 5 5 3 PG Speed Control Card Settings eene 5 46 5 5 4 Speed Loop ASR Structure 0 0 eee eee 5 50 5 5 5 Adjusting Speed Control Loop ASR Gain 0 0 00 000 5 51
161. 5 33 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Settings Setting Function RUN at Frequency Ref Operate according to the frequency reference E1 09 is invalid STOP Interrupt the output Coast when the frequency reference is below E1 09 RUN at Min Frequency Operate at E1 09 frequency Output the frequency set in E1 09 RUN at Zero RPM Zero speed operation Zero reference value when the frequency reference is below E1 09 Parameter E1 09 sets the minimum output frequency Set this minimum level to satisfy the require ments of the application Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f V with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector E1 09 Min Frequency 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 Quick start Basic or Advanced m Initial Excitation Function Settings b2 01 b2 03 and b2 04 With flux vector control the DC braking injection function is replaced by the initial excitation function The initial excitation function stops a motor that is rotating because of inertia These parameters cannot be changed during operation Parameter Name Setting Default Valid access levels number not displayed range setting Vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Excitation level 0 0 to 10 0 Basic or Advanced Initial excitation 0 00 to 10 00 Basic or Advanced time when starting Initial excitation 0 00 to 10 00 Basic or Advanced time when stopping
162. 9 are set to 1 frequency gain and if no voltage cur rent is input then the frequency reference will be zero Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct e Frequency reference 2 is specified with multi step speed operation and auxiliary frequency reference is not input If multi function analog input H3 05 is set to 0 auxiliary frequency reference and if multi step speed reference is used the auxiliary frequency reference will be treated as frequency reference 2 Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value terminal 16 are correct e The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input e The operation method selection is wrong If parameter b1 02 run source is set to 0 Digital Operator the motor will not operate when an ex ternal operation signal is input Set b1 02 to 1 control circuit terminal and try again Similarly the motor will also not operate if the Local Remote Key has been pressed to switch to Digital Operator operation In that case press the Local Remote Key again to return to the original setting The Local Remote Key is enabled set value 1 or disabled set value 2 by means of parame ter 02 01 It is enabled when drive mode is entered e A 3 wire sequence is in effect The input method for a 3 wire sequence is different than when operating by forward stop and reverse stop 2 wire sequence When 3 wire sequence is set the motor
163. Advanced Terminal 7 Sel Basic or Advanced Terminal 8 Sel Basic or Advanced Note The default settings in parentheses are the default values when the Unit is initialized for 3 wire sequence control with A1 03 5 15 Basic Operation Chapter 5 The parameter settings which are used most often are explained below Refer to Chapter 6 Advanced Operation or the parameter tables for details on the other settings e Setting 0 3 wire Control forward reverse command Setting 3 to 6 Multi step References 1 through 3 and Jog Reference e Setting 7 and 1A Multi Accel Decel Time Selector 1 and 2 e Setting 15 17 Fast Stop emergency stop e Setting 12 and 13 Forward and Reverse Jog Commands e Setting 1F Terminal 13 14 Switch e Setting 0 3 wire Control Forward Reverse Command When a value of 0 is set for any one of the multi function inputs H1 01 through H1 06 3 wire control is established and the multi function input terminal for which 0 was set becomes the forward reverse command terminal When the Unit is initialized for 3 wire sequence control with A1 03 a setting of 3330 multi function input 3 terminal 5 becomes the input terminal for the forward reverse command Wiring Example Run switch Stop switch NC Rus Run command Operates when the run switch is closed Stop command Stops when the stop switch
164. Agree 2 setting 13 Set the speed detection range in Hz Signed value Fref Set Agree 2 setting 14 Frequency Detection 3 setting 15 Frequency Detection 4 setting 16 e Set the corresponding setting in the multi function output H2 01 H2 02 or H2 03 to output the de sired Fref Fout Agree signal Fref Set Agree signal or Frequency Detection signal There is a timing chart showing the operation of these signals on the following page 6 103 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector L4 05 RefLossSel 0ori 0 Advanced 1 1 Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation Stop Operate according to the frequency reference value Continue operation at 8096 speed Continue operation with a speed that is 8096 of the value when the frequency reference was lost e The frequency reference is considered lost when the frequency reference voltage drops by 90 for more than 400 ms 6 104 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e Frequency Detection Operation Related parameter Fref Fout Agree L4 01 Speed Agree Level L4 02 Speed Agree Width Fref Fout Agree 1 L4 03 Speed Agree Level amp L4 04 Speed Agree Width Fref Fout Agree 2 Frequency reference Output frequency or motor speed Ama E Multi function output setting 2 Fre
165. B411K B416K B418K B422K B430K E E E E E E Location Indoors no corrosive gas oil spray metallic dust etc Ambient operat ing temperature 10 to 45 C NEMAT type 10 to 40 C 10 to 45 C Open chassis type Ambient operat ing humidity 9096 RH max with no condensation Storage temper ature 20 to 60 C Altitude 1 000 m max Insulation resis tance 5 MQ min Do not carry out the insulation resistance test or withstand voltage test Vibration with stand Vibration frequency less than 20 Hz 9 8 m s 1G max 20 to 50 Hz 2 m s 0 2G max Protective struc ture 9 6 Both enclosed NEMA1 type and open chassis type IP00 Open chassis type IP00 Specifications Chapter 9 9 2 Option Specifications Separately Mounted Options Dedicated Options KSTJ V11 Scaling Me er 3G3IV PJVOP96 Analog Operator standard steel 3G3IV PJVOP95 Analog Operator compact plastic BB 3G3HV PUZDAB DC Reactor 3G3IV PCDBR raking Unit 3G3FV PCN 3GS3IV PLKEB NH 3J ifi ji biking Resistor Unit 3GSIV PERF 150WJ Braking Resistor 25 Digital Operator Connection Cable ar 3G3IV PUZBAB AC Reactor 3GSIV PNF
166. Check the communications line and correct the trouble e Hardware on the Master end is faulty Check the Master and take necessary mea sures e Communications data was damaged due to noise Use twisted pair cables for communications lines and ground all the shields on the Master end e The Optional Card was damaged If wiring is correct and if the problem persists replace the Optional Card Maintenance Operations Fault Display BUS Option Com Err Meaning CompoBus D communications error Communications error occurred in the CompoBus D Communications Card Chapter 8 Probable causes and remedies e Communications cable was broken short cir cuited or wired incorrectly Check wiring of communications cables and correct the fault e Hardware on the Master end is faulty Check the Master and take necessary mea sures e Data was damaged due to noise Change to special communications cables or shielded cables and ground the shields on the Master end or power supply end Separate communications cables from other lines and install a noise filter on the power sup ply e The Optional Card was damaged If wiring is correct and if the problem persists replace the Optional Card CPFOO COM ERR OP amp INV Communications with the Operator were not established within 5 seconds after the power was turned on e The Digital Operator s connector isn t connected pr
167. Control Voltage frequency control open loop V f w PG Fdbk Voltage frequency control with speed compensation Open Loop Vector Current vector con trol without PG Flux Vector Current vector con trol with PG Speed detector Not required Required pulse generator Not required Required pulse generator Optional Speed Detectors Not required 3GS3FV PPGA or 3GS3FV PPGD2 Not required 3G3FV PPGB2 or 8G3FV PPGX2 Speed control range 1 40 1 40 1 100 1 1 000 Starting torque 150 3 Hz 150 3 Hz 150 1 Hz 150 0 Hz Speed control precision 2 to 3 0 03 0 2 0 02 Torque limit Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Torque control Not possible Not possible Not possible Possible Example applications e Multiple motors e Simple speed feedback control e Variable speed drive applications e Simple servo drives e Precision speed control e Torque control Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 Example The following example shows how to change parameter A1 02 to select Flux Vector control vector con trol with pulse generator Key sequence Display Explanation E Pb Displays operation mode Displays initialize mode Puts the Unit in initialize mode Select Language display 2times Displays the Control Method display TRINE Displays the parameter sett
168. D control Re sponse is possible with respect to changes both in target values and the control object Target value i P O d D B En Feedback value Control object M Basic PID Control This is the basic form of PID control When the D control response is adjusted to follow changes in the control object overshooting and undershooting can occur with changes in the target value M Target value gt P O TE Control object Feedback value e Inverter s PID Control Function The following illustration is a block diagram of the Inverter s internal PID control Frequency reference 2 through 8 Inching frequency Frequency reference input voltage Frequency reference O b1 01 3 Frequency reference from Optional Card 5 Other than H3 03 or b1 01 H3 09 set to C H3 03 or H3 09 C i s H3 03 or H3 09 H3 03 or H3 09 B n SS Lee Target value Multi function analog input or frequency ref erence input current Multi function analog input or frequency ref erence input current 6 48 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Frequency reference Proportional gain P Target value U1 38 Feedback value PID upper limit b5 06 Integral time I Derivative time D Integral I upper limit Multi
169. DC injec tion braking time or increasing the DC injection braking current Parameter Display name Setting i Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V fwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector DC Inj Start Freq 0 0 to Basic or Advanced 10 0 DC Inj Current 0 to 100 Basic or Advanced DC Inj 0 0 to Basic or Advanced Time Start 10 00 DC Inj 0 0 to Basic or Advanced Time Stop 10 00 These parameters cannot be changed during operation e For the excitation level 62 01 set the frequency for beginning DC injection braking at the time of deceleration If the excitation level is lower than the minimum output frequency E1 09 the DC injec tion braking will begin from the minimum output frequency Note 1 In flux vector control mode DC injection braking becomes the initial excitation starting fre quency at the time of deceleration In that case braking starts from the excitation level regard less of the minimum output frequency setting Note 2 The excitation level is also used as the operating frequency for the zero servo function for flux vector control only 6 42 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e For the DC injection braking current 62 02 set the value for the current that is output at the time of DC injection braking DC injection braking current is set as a percentage of Inverter rated output current with the Inverter rated output current taken as 100 If the
170. E 200 VAC 400 VAC 3G3FV E6B2 CWZ3E Encoder 12 V voltage output i A B phase __ B Pulse 0 V j Pulse monitor output Three phase SYSDRIVE 200 VAC 400 VAC 3G3FV E6B2 CWZ3C Encoder Open collector output A B phase Pulse monitor output c N ooh WON Note 1 Twisted pair shielded wire must be used for signal lines Note 2 Do not use the pulse generator s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise Note 3 The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 30 meters 2 43 Installation Chapter 2 1O Circuit Configuration TAI PG power Pulse input Pulse monitor output Note When connecting to a voltage output type PG encoder select a PG with an output impedance of no more than 3 kQ e 3G3FV PPGB2 For Flux Vector Control Mode Only Three phase 200 VAC SYSDRIVE 400 VAC 3G3FV Encoder E6B2 CWZ6C A phase pulse output Power supply 12 V B phase pulse output A phase pulse monitor output B phase pulse monitor output Note 1 Twisted pair shielded wire must be used for signal lines Note 2 Do not use the pulse generator s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise Note 3 The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be
171. E2 03 at the rated voltage and rated frequency Normally this value isn t shown on the motor s nameplate so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer Parameter Display name Setting range Units Default Valid access levels number setting vi v f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Motor Rated Slip 0 00 to 20 00 Advanced Quick Start Basic No Load Current 0 00 to 2 90 or Advanced see note 2 Note 1 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The table shows the default settings for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters Note 2 The setting range is between 0 00 and 0 1 less than the Inverter s rated current Note 3 These settings are used as reference values for the motor slip compensation function Set the motor s terminal resistance phase to phase in parameter E2 05 Normally this value isn t shown on the motor s nameplate so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer Parameter Display name Setting range Default Valid access levels number Modi d dl setting v f v f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Note 1 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The table shows the default settings for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters Note 2 This setting is used as a reference value for the torque compensation function Parameter Display name Setting range Default Valid access levels number setting vf V f with Open Loop
172. F ON PID control disabled Multi accel decel time 2 Parameter write access ON Parameters can be overwritten OFF All parameters other than frequency monitor are write protected Trim control increase ON d4 02 frequencies are added to analog frequency references Trim control decrease ON d4 02 frequencies are subtracted from analog frequency references Sample hold analog frequency reference ON Hold analog value Frequency reference terminal 13 14 selection ON select terminal 14 Valid only when H3 09 is set to 1F External fault Desired settings possible Input mode contact a contact b Detection mode Normal during operation Stopping method Ramp to stop coast to stop fast stop or continue operation Reset PID control integration ON resets the PID control integration value Hold PID control integration ON maintains the PID control integration value 7 37 Parameter Lists Setting value Function DC injection braking command ON DC operation Control mode Chapter 7 Vif w PG Open loop Vector Flux vector External speed search command 1 Maximum frequency ON speed search External speed search command 2 Set frequency ON speed search Energy save mode ON Energy saving control set for b8 01 b8 02 External speed search command KEB deceleration operation for momentary power interrup
173. F insulation Motor s terminal resistance Q at 115 C x 0 87 Parameter Display name Setting range Default Valid access levels number setting vit V f with Open Loop Control E2 05 0 000 to 65 000 9 842 Note The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The table shows the default settings for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters Set the voltage drop caused by the motor s leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor s rated voltage in parameter E2 06 Normally this value is not shown on the motor s nameplate so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer It is also acceptable to set the loss caused by the motor s leakage inductance as a percentage Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V f with Open Loop Control E2 06 Leak Inductance 0 0to30 0 18 2 Not applicable Note 1 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The table shows the default settings for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters Note 2 The default setting does not normally need to be changed because the Inverter in operation adjusts the leak inductance automatically Set the parameter if a high speed motor or any oth er motor with low inductance is used Parameters E2 07 and E2 08 are used in a frequency range even higher than the motor s rated fre quency It isn t necessary to set these parameters when operating below the motor s rated frequency Se
174. Flex Vector Control 40 to 39999 User desired display Set the desired values for setting and display for the max frequency Display Scaling Set four digits without the dec imal point Set the position of the decimal point in the first digit Example When the max fre quency value is 200 0 set 12000 V f pattern Set the V f pattern setting units setting E1 04 06 09 set units units 0 Hzunits 1 r min units Note Effective only in the flux control vector mode Display Units Not used Do not set Address Display m Key Selections o2 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 g Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Local Re Sets the Digital Operator mote Key Local Remote Key enabled disabled 0 Disabled Local Re 1 Enabled Switches between mote Key the Digital Operator and the parameter settings 7 52 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range setti Display g es Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Stop Key Sets the Stop Key in the run mode 0 Disabled When the run command is issued from Oper Stop and external terminal the Key Stop Key is disabled Enabled Effective even during run
175. Function This function enables switching control between two motors using one Inverter The following function additions were made to support this new functionality e Setting Control Mode and Motor Parameters for Second Motor Set the following parameter for the second motor The settings of parameters E1 and E2 are used for the first motor If the motor is operated in flux or open loop vector control mode set the motor selection for auto tuning to 2 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector E 01 ControMethod 0103 2 Advanced 1 1 j Explanation of Settings Setting Description Normal V f control V f control with PG Open loop vector control Flux vector control Set the control mode for the second motor The set value will not be set to the default value when the Inverter is initialized 6 67 Advanced Operation Parameter number Parameter number Parameter number Parameter number Parameter number Parameter number Parameter number Parameter number 6 68 Display name Max Frequency Display name Max Voltage Display name Base Frequency Display name Mid Frequency Display name Mid Voltage Display name Min Frequency Display name Min Voltage Display name Motor Rated FLA Setting range Setting range Setting range
176. H1 01 through H1 06 e ASR Integral Reset Setting E When one of the multi function inputs is set to E the input can be used to switch the speed control loop between P control and PI control P control integral reset is used when the multi function input is ON e ASR Proportional Gain Switch Setting 77 When one of the multi function inputs is set to 77 the input can be used to switch between proportional gain 1 and proportional gain 2 Proportional gain 2 C5 03 is used when the multi function input is ON This input has higher priority than the ASR switching frequency set in C5 07 ASR Gain Switch signal ON a multi function input OFF Proportional gain determined by motor speed Proportional gain P C5 03 gain setting C5 02 C5 02 Note The gain is changed linearly in integral time 1 C5 02 The integral time setting isn t switched 5 40 Basic Operation Chapter 5 m Adjusting Speed Loop ASR Responsiveness C5 06 and Integral Limit C5 08 Normally it isn t necessary to make this adjustment but parameter C5 06 can be used when adjusting the gain doesn t remove motor vibration or adjusting the gain removes vibration but results in poor re sponsiveness A high C5 06 setting lowers the responsiveness of the speed control loop but makes it difficult for vibration to develop This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting range Units Default Valid access lev
177. I RE VERE NE n ege 3 18 Program Mode e ahs sate sie dee Bare Riek Ss PN OES Me ORAS Bd Ste abe Cleese GB ed Bhs bh ane 3 25 Auto tuning Mode cees ls eire ee Ee RS Sh a VA Oe See ee 3 28 Modified Constants Mode 0 0 mihe ee 3 30 Operation Mode Selection Key and Local Remote Selection Input 3 31 Chapter 4 Trial Operation nie diet ete cee ovine e A L 4 1 4 2 Procedure 4 e mE o Re ACAD qe oo sed e e HUGE ERU REQUE S Rude 4 3 Operation Examples veo eee hae ote CE eee ws ber cals ee nU e 4 5 4 2 1 Power Connection scere beh otg piita behead ade SORS 4 5 4 2 2 Checking the Display Status 0 0 ee eee eee 4 5 4 2 3 Initializing Parameters 0 0 eee eee nee 4 6 4 2 4 Setting Input Voltage 0 neces 4 6 4 2 5 Auto tunihg o bien eked Ge SEE Ier es FREE erp ee ed Ged D Ege 4 8 4 2 6 No load Operation s ang eee e 4 10 4 2 7 Actual Load Operation oo ceos seg Rb RE RR dees 4 11 Chapter 5 Basic Operation 0 cece cece eere 54 5 1 COMMON SEIN ES ss pk a hU doe pare EROR ARSE AER e io UU RUM UR eas 5 2 5 1 1 Setting the Access Level and Control Mode 00 00 0000 0000s 5 2 5 1 2 Frequency Reference Settings from Control Circuit Terminals 5 4 5 1 3 Frequency Reference Settings from Digital Operator 0 5 8 5 1 4 Run Source and Responsiveness Settings 00 0 0 5 10
178. ILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine System or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended t
179. Installation Chapter 2 e Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals Never connect a power supply to output terminals T1 U T2 V and T3 W If voltage is applied to the output terminals the internal circuit of the Inverter will be damaged e Never Short or Ground Output Terminals If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Invert er casing an electric shock or grounding will occur This is extremely hazardous Also be careful not to short the output wires e Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter Never to connect a phase advance capacitor or LC RC noise filter to the output circuit Doing so may result in damage to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn e Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch or Magnetic Contactor Do not connect an electromagnetic switch or magnetic contactor to the output circuit If a load is con nected to the Inverter during running an inrush current will actuate the overcurrent protective circuit in the Inverter e Installing a Thermal Relay This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating If however more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or multi polar motor is used always install a thermal relay THR between the Inverter and the motor and set n033 to 0 no thermal protection In this case program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor on the input side of
180. Inverter independently It isn t necessary for a forward reverse command to be input e Setting 1F Terminal 13 14 Switch When this function is set in a multi function input that input terminal can be used to switch between terminal 13 and terminal 14 OFF The analog input from terminal 13 is used as the main speed frequency reference ON The analog input from terminal 14 is used as the main speed frequency reference When terminal 14 is used as the frequency reference set 1F frequency reference in parameter H3 09 this parameter is the function selector for frequency reference current terminal 14 A setting fault OPEOS will occur if this function is selected without setting 1F in H3 09 When H3 09 is set to 1F frequency reference but none of the multi function inputs is set to 1F ter minal 13 14 switch the sum of the inputs from terminals 13 and 14 will be used as the main speed frequency reference 5 19 Basic Operation Chapter 5 5 2 Open loop Vector Control Open loop vector control is vector control without pulse generator input Auto tuning is the only setting for basic operation with open loop vector control When the voltage limit restricted by the input power supply is reached near the rated motor speed vector control cannot be established and speed accuracy will be reduced To operate with the greatest speed precision near the rated speed either select a motor with a
181. LF3110KB x 4P PLF3110KB x 4P PLF3110KB x 5P 9 28 PLF3110KB x 6P Specifications e External Dimensions mm Model S3G3IV PLF310KA Terminal Chapter 9 7 x 4 5 dia PLF320KA 7 x 4 5 dia PLF350KA 7 x 4 5 dia PLF310KB 7 x 4 5 dia PLF320KB 7 x 4 5 dia PLF335KB 7 x 4 5 dia PLF345KB 7 x 4 5 dia PLF375KB 9 x 6 5 dia PLF3110KB Dimensions 9 x 6 5 dia e Noise Filter Connection Example Input Output Noise SYSDRIVE Noise BECEN Filter i Filter Three phase L1 6 id ori inductive motor L2 6 d 25 da sb iM L3 60 36 O038 6 0 i 9 29 Chapter 10 e Appendix 10 1 Notes on Using the Inverter for a Motor Appendix Chapter 10 10 1 Notes on Using the Inverter for a Motor m Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter power loss is slightly higher than when operated with a commercial power supply In addition cooling effects also diminish in the low speed range resulting in an increase in the motor temperature Therefore the motor torque should be reduced in the low speed range The following graph shows the allowable load characteristics of a standard motor If 10096 torque is continuously required in the low speed rang
182. Monitor Card DO 02 Setup DO 08 Setup Not Used Do not change these settings PO 36F Setup Parameter settings for a Pulse Monitor Card SI F G Setup Parameter settings for a SYSMAC BUS Interface Card 6 40 CP 916 Setup Parameter settings for a CompoBus D Communica tions Card Advanced Operation Terminal Function Digital Inputs Comments Function selection for multi function inputs Chapter 6 Control mode V f Open loop w PG Vector Flux Vector Digital Outputs Function selection for multi function outputs Analog Inputs Adjustment function selection for external analog in puts Analog Outputs Adjustment function selection for multi function analog outputs Serial Com Setup Not Used Do not change this setting Protection Motor Overload Sets electrical thermal functions that protect the motor PwrLoss Ridethru Selects the power loss processing method Stall Prevention Accel Decel stall prevention settings and selection Ref Detection Frequency detection settings and selection Fault Restart Fault restart function settings Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 Torque Limit Torque limit settings Hdwe Protection Hardware overheating and phase loss protection set tings Operator Monitor Select Selects the
183. N CATEGORY II IP20 OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN Mg Input specifications Output specifications e Checking the Model 3G3FV A2037 CUE L Specifications Maximum applicable motor capacity Voltage class Installation type Series name 3G3MV Series Specifications Japanese model English model Model conforming to EN standards Model conforming to EN and UL cUL standards Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity Voltage Class 2 Three phase 200 V AC input 200 V class 4 Three phase 400 V AC input 400 V class Installation Type A Panel mounting IP10 min or closed wall mounting models C Closed wall mounting models IPOO min e Checking for Damage Check the overall appearance and check for damage or scratches resulting from transportation Checking the Accessories Note that this manual is the only accessory provided with the 3G3MV Set screws and other necessary parts must be provided by the user About this Manual This manual is divided into the chapters described in the following table Information is organized by application area to enable you to use the manual more efficiently Chapter Contents Chapter 1 Overview Describes features and nomenclature Also describes new functions Chapter 2 Installation Provides information required for system design such as product dimensions installation dimensions per
184. Note 2 If the Inverter s input voltage is extremely lower than the rated motor voltage the accuracy of the speed of the motor may not be maintained even with the output voltage suppressed 6 6 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 6 1 6 Startup Torque Compensation With open loop vector control a starting torque compensation can be input to decrease the torque ref erence s rise time at startup This function is effective for equipment in which a starting torque is required such as machinery with a high friction load or cranes Unlike flux vector control the compensation is input only at startup m Starting torque Compensation Function Settings Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vf v f with Open Loop Control PG Vector F TorqCmpQG 5start 0 0 to 200 0 Advanced R TorqCmpQG hstart 200 0 to 0 0 Advanced TorqCmp Delay T 0 to 200 Advanced These parameters cannot be changed during operation Timing Chart Frequency reference L 0 Runcommand OFF ON Time constant C4 02 ve 3 C4 03 forward C4 04 reverse Torque compensation value Output frequency Larger of b2 01 E1 09 foo and E1 09 Note The Inverter s torque reference value is at its lower limit with the torque compensation value shown above e When using this compensation function set the starting torque compensation value to the friction load in regula
185. OMRON Mi USER S MANUAL SYSDRIVE 3G3FV High function General purpose Inverter Thank you for choosing this SYSDRIVE 3G3FV series product Proper use and handling of the product will ensure proper product performance will length product life and may prevent possible accidents Please read this manual thoroughly and handle and operate the product with care 1 To ensure safe and proper use of the OMRON Inverters please read this USER S MANUAL Cat No 1516 E1 to gain sufficient knowledge of the devices safety information and precautions be fore actual use 2 The products are illustrated without covers and shieldings for closer look in this USER S MANU AL For actual use of the products make sure to use the covers and shieldings as specified 3 This USER S MANUAL and other related user s manuals are to be delivered to the actual end users of the products 4 Please keep this manual close at hand for future reference 5 If the product has been left unused for a long time please inquire at our sales representative NOTICE This manual describes the functions of the product and relations with other products You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible Although care has been given in documenting the product please contact your OMRON representative if you have any suggestions on improving this manual The product contains potentially dangerous parts under the cover Do not
186. Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector n1 jOuputRevSet o1 o awana O y Explanation of Settings Contents Reverse rotation disabled If the final output is negative the output will be limited to O and the motor will not rotate in the reverse direction Reverse rotation enabled If the final output is negative the motor will rotate according to the output value e Set this parameter to enable or disable the motor to rotate in the reverse direction if the Inverter s final output under PID control is negative The reverse direction means the direction opposite to the direction specified by the run command in put Therefore if a run command is input for reverse rotation the motor will rotate in the forward direc tion If a run command is input for forward rotation input the motor will rotate in the opposite e The parameter is by default set to 0 in consideration of safety Set this parameter according to the application Note 1 If the parameter is set to 1 the motor will rotate in the reverse rotation when run command for forward rotation is input Take necessary safety measure for the prevention of accidents Note 2 If parameter b1 04 Disabling Reverse Operation is set to 1 the motor will not rotate in the reverse direction even with the parameter b5 11 set to 1 e Feedback Loss Detection for PID Control This function is used to detect the loss of the feedback signal e g as a result of line disc
187. Open loop vector control and flux vector control Constant frequency The carrier frequency upper limit only is set The carrier frequency does not normally need to be adjusted but make adjustments in the following cases If the wiring distance between the Inverter and the motor is long lower the carrier frequency The standards are 15 mHz or less for a wiring distance of 50 meters or less 10 mHz or less for 100 me ters or less and 5 mHz or less for over 100 meters If there are great irregularities in speed or torque lower the carrier frequency Setting the Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload OL2 For a 400 V Inverter if the carrier frequency is set to a value higher than the default setting the Inverter overload detection value will decrease in consideration of an increase in the heat that will be generated by the change in the carrier frequency Since the detection value is set to decrease by approximately 15 for an increase of 2 kHz carefully set the frequency so that the rated motor cur rent can be output 6 61 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Carrier Freq Max Basic or Advanced Carrier Freq Min Advanced Carrier Freq Gain Advanced These parameters cannot be changed during operation Note The setting range and the factory default setting vary ac
188. Operation Chapter 3 3 1 Using the Digital Operator DRIVE FWD REV REMOTE Operation Mode Indicators E NE NEST NE Ll DRIVE Lit when in operation mode FWD Lit when there is a forward command input REV Lit when there is a reverse command input SEQ Lit when the forward reverse command from the control circuit terminal is enabled REF Lit when the frequency reference from bs control circuit terminals 13 and 14 is enabled Data Display Two line LCD that displays data for monitoring pa OMRON DIGITAL OPERATOR PJVOP430E rameter names and set values with 16 characters per line LOCAL Z REMOTE Keys JOG Execute operations such as setting parameters FWD monitoring JOG and auto tuning REV e e Function Operation Mode Switches between Operator and parameter setting run command and Selection Key frequency reference This key can be enabled or disabled with a parameter setting 02 02 Menu Key Displays each mode D m o El m ij Escape Key Returns to the status before the Enter Key is pressed Jog Key Enables JOG operation when the 3G3FV is in operation with the Digital Operator Forward Reverse Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the 3G3FV is in Rotation Selection Key operation with the Digital Operator Reset Digit Selection Selects digits for parameter settings
189. Operation Chapter 5 m Presetting Frequency Reference Values d1 01 through d1 09 Parameters d1 01 through d1 08 contain preset reference values 1 through 8 The setting range for all of the values is 0 to the max frequency These 8 parameters can be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting i Default Valid access levels number range setting V f Vif with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Reference 1 0 to max 1 Quick start Basic or Advanced Reference 2 0 to max Quick start Basic or Advanced Reference 3 0 to max Quick start Basic or Advanced Reference 4 0 to max Quick start Basic or Advanced Reference 5 0 to max i Basic or Advanced Reference 6 0 to max Basic or Advanced Reference 7 0 to max Basic or Advanced Reference 8 0 to max Basic or Advanced Note 1 The units for these values are set in o1 03 Note 2 The frequency reference s initial value and set value will change when o1 03 is changed For example if preset reference 1 is set to 6 00 Hz and o1 03 is changed to 1 0 0196 units the setting for preset reference 1 will become 10 00 Note 3 When using preset references 2 through 8 be sure to set Multi Step Reference 1 2 and 3 in the multi function inputs H1 01 through H1 06 as required When using the Jog function set the jog frequency reference in parameter d1 09 The setting range for this value is 0 to the max f
190. Operation mode Initialize mode Program mode Application b1 Sequence b1 01 Reference source b1 02 Run source Parameter to be changed r b1 03 Stopping method Tuning C1 Accel Decel C1 01 Accel Time 1 Reference C2 S Curve Acc Dec C1 02 Decel Time 1 Mode Group Function Parameter e Setting the Parameter in the Quick start Access Level The parameter level will be displayed when the Enter Key is pressed at the program mode display Key sequence Display Explanation ik Plum db Displays operation mode 2 times b kd Displays program mode Be amp Puts the Unit in program mode Displays the b1 01 Reference source selection iz Displays the b1 02 Run source selection d Displays the b1 03 Stopping method selection i Displays C1 01 Acceleration time 1 H Selects the parameter so that the leading 0 flashes The digit that can be changed flashes 2 times Fi Moves the cursor so that the 1 digit flashes RESET Fi i Changes the 1 to a 2 Writes the new setting Returns to the C1 01 Acceleration time 1 display Returns to the program mode display Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 e Setting the Parameter in the Basic Access Level The function level will be displayed when the Enter Key is pressed at the program mode displ
191. Reference Card is used 0 3 channel individual Channel 1 terminal 13 Channel 2 terminal 14 Channel 3 terminal 16 3 channel addition Addition Al 14 Input values are the frequency Sel reference Note When set to 0 select 1 for b1 01 In this case the multi function input Op tion Inverter selection cannot be used Digital Sets the Digital Reference Card Reference input method Card input BCD 1 unit selection BCD 0 1 unit BCD 0 01 unit BCD 1 Hz unit BCD 0 1 Hz unit BCD 0 01 Hz unit BCD special setting 5 digit input Binary input Note Setting 6 is effective only when the 3G3FV PDI16H2 is used but the input will be BCD and the units will be set in o1 03 if DI Input 01 03 has been set to 2 or higher When F3 01 is set to 7 input the following values as the max frequency 3GSIV PD108 FF hex 255 decimal 3GSFV PD116H2 FFF hex 4 095 decimal for 12 bits or 7530 hex 30 000 decimal for 16 bits 7 32 Parameter Lists Name Display name Channel 1 output monitor selection AO Ch1 Select Channel 1 gain AO Ch1 Gain Channel 2 output monitor selection AO Ch2 Select Channel 2 gain AO Ch2 Gain Description Effective when an Analog Monitor Card is used Monitor selection Set the number of the monitor item to be output U1 00 Gain Set the multiple of 10 V for outputtin
192. ReverseOper Oor 0 Basic or Advanced Settings Reverse Enabled Allows reverse operation Reverse Disabled Prohibits reverse operation 5 1 7 Selecting the Stopping Method b1 03 Parameter b1 03 sets the stopping method used when a stop command is input This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector b1 03 Stopping Method Oto3 0 Quickstart Basic or Advanced 5 13 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Settings Only settings 0 and 1 can be used with Flux Vector control Setting Function Ramp to Stop Deceleration stop Coast to Stop Free run stop DC Injection to Stop DC braking stop Stops faster than free run without regenerative operation Coast w Timer Free run stop with timer Run commands are ignored during deceleration time The following diagrams show the operation of each stopping method The deceleration time in the diagrams refers to the selected deceleration time Deceleration times 1 through 4 are set with C1 02 C1 04 C1 06 and C1 08 Deceleration Stop b1 03 0 Run command Note 1 Decelerates to a stop at a rate set with the ON OFF s selected deceleration time Note 2 If the run command turns back ON during deceleration deceleration will be stopped DC braking as soon as the run comm
193. Setting to table Pages 5 22 and 5 41 Added setting 2 Page 5 24 Corrected voltage for setting of 7 to 9 V Pages 5 27 6 6 and 6 27 Changed setting range for E1 04 Page 5 28 Added information to introduction Pages 5 30 and 5 44 Added F1 14 Pages 5 33 to 5 34 Added E1 02 Page 5 38 Added C5 08 Pages 5 39 and 5 48 Added information on 3G3FV CUE CE Page 6 5 Added sections 6 1 3 to 6 1 7 Page 6 6 Added section on startup torque compensa tion Pages 6 7 and 6 50 Changed percentage to 100 Pages 6 7 6 12 6 28 and 6 34 Changed setting range for E2 03 and added note Pages 6 8 and 6 29 Changed descriptions of E2 05 and E2 06 Pages 6 12 and 6 34 Added E2 10 Page 6 14 Made corrections to b7 01 and b7 02 Page 6 30 Added sections 6 3 8 and 6 3 9 Page 6 36 Added section Setting Operation Source Selection b1 Page 6 37 Added b2 08 Page 6 38 Changed factory settings for b3 02 and b3 03 Pages 6 41 to 6 43 Added PID control functions Page 6 45 Changed end of setting range for b5 01 to 4 Page 6 54 Added information for settings for second motor Page 6 56 Changed information for binary input set ting Page 6 56 Made changes to analog monitor card set tings Page 6 57 Added F8 and F9 Page 6 58 Added settings 15 16 17 1E 30 and 31 Page 6 60 Added information on external baseblock Page 6 65 Add setting 1E Page 6 73 Added C and D Pages 6 74 and 6 7
194. Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V f with Open Loop Control Note It is possible to operate the motor with the default settings but motor efficiency may decrease 6 11 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 6 2 Normal V f Control This section summarizes the functions that can be used with normal V f control V f con trol without PG feedback and then provides detailed explanations of the functions that are specific to normal V f control 6 2 1 Summary of V f Control Functions An OK in the control mode column indicates that the parameter can be changed in that control mode The functions specific to normal V f control are marked with a x and described in more detail later in this section Application Function Sequence Comments Settings such as the reference input method Control mode Vif w PG Open loop Vector Flux Vector DC Braking DC braking function settings Speed Search Speed search function settings Delay Timers Timer function settings PID Control PID control settings Reference Hold Accel deceleration time dwell function settings Not used Can t be set Energy Saving Multi function input Energy saving control settings Zero Servo Not used Can t be set Tuning Accel Decel Acceleration deceleration time settings S Curve Acc Dec S curve characteristics f
195. This function is valid with V f control and V f with PG control Parameters C7 01 and C7 02 cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector C7 01 HuntPrevSelect 0 1 Advanced Not applicable Disables the hunting prevention function Enables the hunting prevention function Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit vm un OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector C7 02 Hunt Prev Gain 0 0 to Multi 1 00 Advanced Not applicable 2 50 ples Normally it isn t necessary to change these parameters Adjust these parameters as follows if hunting occurs with a light load 6 38 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e Increase the setting in C7 02 if vibration occurs when operating with a light load If the setting is increased too much the current can fall to the point where stalling occurs e Decrease the setting in C7 02 if stalling occurs e Disable the hunting prevention function C7 01 0 if high responsiveness is more important than suppressing vibration 6 4 4 Setting Motor Parameters The motor parameters other than the V f pattern parameters are described below Calculate the rated slip E2 02 from the value shown on the motor s nameplate with the following equa tion and set this value Rated slip 2 rated frequency Hz rated s
196. UV detection During baseblock 1 ON during baseblock Operation reference ON Operator Run command remote operation ON Operator Overtorque detection 1 NO contact a ON overtorque detection Loss of frequency reference Effective when operation selection is 1 for L4 05 frequency reference missing DB overheat ON Resistance overheat or braking Tr fault Fault ON Faults other than CPF00 CPF01 have occurred Not used Do not set Minor fault ON Report displayed Fault reset command active Timer output Frequency ref out agree 2 Detection width L4 04 Desired frequency ref setting agree 2 ON Output frequency L4 03 detection width L4 04 Frequency detection 3 ON output frequency L4 03 detection width L4 04 Frequency detection 4 ON output frequency z L4 03 detection width L4 04 Overtorque detection 1 NC Contact b OFF torque detection Overtorque detection 2 NO Contact a ON torque detection Overtorque detection 2 NC Contact b OFF torque detection During reverse run ON during reverse run During baseblock 2 OFF During base block Motor 2 selected ON motor 2 selected Regenerating ON Regenerating Restart enabled ON Restart enabled Motor overload OL1 pre alarm ON 9096 or more of the detection level Inverter overheat OH pre alarm ON Temperature is above L8 02 During torque limit current limit ON During torque limit
197. a more effective level by adjusting parame ters C4 02 torque compensation time constant C8 08 AFR gain and C3 02 slip compensation primary delay time in order Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting e Vibration and hunting are occurring with V f control The gain adjustment may be insufficient Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting parame ters C4 02 torque compensation time constant C7 02 hunting prevention gain and C3 02 slip compensation primary delay time in order Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting e Vibration and hunting are occurring with flux vector control The gain adjustment may be insufficient Adjust the various types of speed control loop ASR gain For details refer to Chapter 5 Basic Operation of this manual If the mechanical system s resonance point coincides with the Inverter s operating frequency and the vibration cannot be eliminated in this way increase the ASR primary delay time parameter C5 06 and then try adjusting the gain again e Vibration and hunting are occurring with V f w PG control The gain adjustment may be insufficient Adjust the various types of speed control loop ASR gain For details refer to Chapter 5 Basic Operation of this manual If the vibration cannot be eliminated in this way set the hunting prevention selection parameter C7 01 to 0 disabled and then try adjust ing the gain again e Vibration
198. added to the previous NO function m Bias Function for Reverse Motor Control for Multi function Inputs Parameters H3 05 and H3 09 A function has been added for reverse motor operation by establishing a frequency bias 2 setting D for the multi function inputs that causes reverse operation when the sum of the bias values is negative m Run Command Selection Outside of Drive Mode Parameter b1 08 A function has been added to enable or disable run command inputs in mode other than Drive Mode e g Program Mode or Initialize Mode Note If this function is used a run command can be input and Inverter operation stared even when adjusting parameters in Program Mode Proper safety measures must be taken to prevent dan gerous situations Motor Core Loss Adjustment for Torque Compensation Parameter E2 10 A motor core loss setting has been added to enable fine adjustment of torque compensation totally automatic torque boast in V f control without PG and V f control with PG control modes m Changes in Default Settings and Setting Ranges The defaults and setting ranges for the following parameters have been changed for applications e Cumulative Operation Time Display Change Parameter 02 07 Previously 0 was display when the default value was set for the cumulative operation time but this has been changed to display the current cumulative operation time as the default e New Parameter Setting Ranges Parameter number Parameter na
199. after maximum Inverter input voltage Cannot use motor 1 frequency parameters and motor 2 Base parameters at same Frequency time Motor 2 Motor selection signal intermedi will be enabled when ate fre the motor 2 selected quency function is set for multi Mid function output Frequency If the control method for motor 1 is different from O that for motor 2 all oth ata vollage er parameters of motor 9 2 Will be set to default Mid Voltage Settings Motor 2 minimum frequency Min Frequency Motor 2 minimum voltage Min Voltage Motor 2 rated current Motor Rated FLA Motor 2 rated slip Motor Rated Slip 7 28 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Changes Control mode Display range setting during Vif V f with Open Flux vec name opera control PG loop tor tion vector Motor 2 Sets the motor constants of no load motor 2 when used for current two motor switching Note 1 Enabled when the mo No Load tor 2 selection function Current is set for multi function input Motor 2 Set like E1 04 to E2 06 number of motor poles Changes motors after Inverter and motor stop Number of Waits to change motor Poles for 20 to 50 ms after Inverter input Motor 2 Cannot use motor 1 phase to parameters and motor 2 phase re parameters at same sistance time Motor sel
200. age V Max output 400 Hz Set by parameter frequency Hz ower supply characteristics Rated volt 3 phase 200 to 230 VAC 50 60 Hz age V Rated fre quency Hz Allowable 1596 to 10 voltage fluc tuation Allowable 5 frequency fluctuation Power con 0 07 sumption kW Approximate 3 0 weight kg 9 2 Specifications Chapter 9 Control Characteristics Model number A2004 A2007 add 3G3FV Power supply harmonic countermea sures ld A2037 wa A2075 A2110 A2150 B2185 nd B2300 B2370 B2450 e B2750 E DC reactor option connection possible DC reactor built in Control meth od Sine wave PWM high carrier frequency control Carrier fre quency 0 4 to 15 kHz 2 0 to 15 kHz in vector control 0 4 to 10 kHz 2 0 to 10 kHz in vector control Speed control range 1 100 1 1000 with PG Speed control precision 10 296 0 02 with PG Speed control response 5 Hz 80 Hz with PG Torque charac teristics 150 at 1 Hz 150 at 0 rpm with PG A torque limit function is incorporated Torque control precision 5 with PG Torque control response 40 Hz with PG Frequency control range 0 1 to 400 Hz Frequency pre cision temperature characteris tics Digital references 0 01 10 to 40 C Analog references 0 1 25 10 C
201. al Control during Acceleration Deceleration Enable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration with F1 07 when you want the motor s speed to closely follow the frequency reference during acceleration and deceleration Integral operation causes the speed to reach the target speed as fast as possible but may result in overshooting or under shooting 1 Set F1 07 to 1 to enable integral operation at all times 2 Make the parameter settings shown below in order to observe the speed waveform while making fine adjustments to the gain Parameter Setting Explanation H4 01 Analog output selection terminal 21 Settings that allow multi function analog output 1 H4 02 Analog output gain terminal 21 to be used to monitor the ASR input H4 03 Analog output bias terminal 21 H4 04 Analog output selection terminal 23 Settings that allow multi function analog output 2 H4 05 Analog output gain terminal 23 to be used to monitor the motor speed H4 06 Analog output bias terminal 23 H4 07 Analog output level selection This setting allows a 0 to 10 V signal range to be monitored 5 51 Basic Operation Chapter 5 The multi function analog outputs have the following functions with these parameter settings Ter minal 22 is the multi function analog output common There are separate commons terminals 27 and 37 for the 3G3FV L CUE CE Multi function analog output 1 terminal 21 Outputs the
202. alculated from n and m with the following equation m Division ratio se n The possible division ratio settings 1 32 S F1 065 1 F1 06 5 30 Basic Operation Chapter 5 m Setting and Adjusting the Fault Detection Functions e PG Disconnection Stopping Method F1 02 This parameter sets the stopping method that is used when the signal from the PG is lost Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector F102 PGFdbklossSel 0t03 H BB Note B Basic or Advanced Not applicable Settings Setting Function Ramp to Stop Deceleration stop using deceleration time 1 C1 02 Coast to Stop Free run stop Fast Stop Emergency stop using the fast stop time C1 09 Alarm Only Continue operation This setting can t be made with flux vector control e PG Disconnection Detection Time F1 14 A PG disconnection will be detected if a disconnection status lasts for the following time or longer Note The motor speed will not be controlled while the PG is disconnected Set this time as short as possible in any application where safety cannot be ensured Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector e Overspeed Settings F1 03 F1 08 and F1 09 Overspeed refers to
203. ame Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit Vs vim OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector 01 02 Power On 1104 Basic or n Monitor The following example shows how to change parameter o1 02 so that the output current is displayed at startup The procedure continues from the end of the previous example Key sequence Display Explanation i 5o itor ci Monitor Select display See the previous example p i Displays the Power On Monitor display i Displays the parameter setting for 01 02 2times x Sets the parameter to output current Writes the new setting Returns to the Power On Monitor display Returns to the function selection o1 display Returns to the program mode display Note In this example the setting is changed in the Basic access level 3 17 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 3 4 Initialize Mode The initialize mode is used to select the language displayed by the Unit the access level and the control mode it is also used to initialize the Unit s parameters m Selecting the Display Language Use parameter A1 00 to select the language displayed by the Unit Messages can be displayed in 0 English 1 Japanese 2 German 3 French 4 Italian 5 Spanish or 6 Portuguese This parameter is not initialized by the initialize operation and it can be changed during operation Note The language that is set will be indicate
204. ameter settings for a Pulse Monitor Card SI F G Setup Parameter settings for a SYSMAC BUS Interface Card CP 916 Setup Parameter settings for a CompoBus D Communica tions Card Terminal Digital Inputs Function selection for multi function inputs Digital Outputs Function selection for multi function outputs Analog Inputs Adjustment function selection for external analog inputs Analog Outputs Adjustment function selection for multi function ana log outputs Not used Do not change these settings Protection Motor Overload Sets electrical thermal functions that protect the mo tor PwrLoss Ridethru Selects the power loss processing method Stall Prevention Accel Decel stall prevention settings and selection Ref Detection Frequency detection settings and selection Fault Restart Fault restart function settings Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 Torque Limit Not used Can t be set Hdwe Protection Hardware overheating and phase loss protection settings Operator Monitor Select Selects the Operator s display and setting methods Key Selections Operator s key function selection and other parame ters 6 4 2 Energy saving Control Function The energy saving control function is enabled when the energy saving command setting 63 has been set in a multi function i
205. ameters A2 01 through A2 32 can be changed only in the Advanced access level and cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels numbers range setting Vif Vit Open Loop Flux Control with PG Vector Vector A2 01 to User parameter 1 to 61 01 to Advanced A2 32 User parameter 32 02 08 3 22 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 The following restrictions apply to setting displaying parameters when the access level is set to the user level Mode Accessible parameters Operation The Quick start level parameters can be displayed Initialize The Quick start level parameters can be set or displayed Program Only the parameters specified in A2 01 through A2 32 can be set or displayed Auto tuning The parameters cannot be displayed Modified constants The parameters cannot be displayed Setting Example The following example shows how to specify parameter C1 01 Acceleration time 1 in user parameter A2 01 and set the access level to the user level Key sequence Display Explanation n Displays operation mode Displays initialize mode Puts the Unit in initialize mode Select Language display Displays the User Parameters display Displays the parameter setting for A2 01 Selects the parameter so that the leading digit flashes The digit that can be changed flashes Al 2ti Lisp i Sets the first digit to C MR At this point the ot
206. an excessive motor speed These parameters set the conditions for an overspeed fault and the stopping method that is used when an overspeed fault occurs they cannot be changed during operation Parameter F1 03 sets the stopping method that is used when an overspeed fault occurs Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f V with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Fros PGOverspeedSel 003 B B Note B Basic or Advanced Not applicable Settings Setting Function Ramp to Stop Deceleration stop using deceleration time 1 C1 02 Coast to Stop Free run stop Fast Stop Emergency stop using the fast stop time C1 09 Alarm Only Continue operation This setting can t be made with flux vector control 5 31 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Parameter F1 08 sets the overspeed detection level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency Parameter F1 09 sets the length of time that the motor speed must exceed the overspeed detection level in order to generate an overspeed fault Parameter number Valid access levels V f with Open Loop PG Vector Default setting Display name Setting range Vif Control PG Overspd Level PG Overspd Time 0 to 120 0 0 to 2 0 Note A Advanced Not applicable e PG Speed Deviation Settings F1 04 F1 10 and F1 11 PG speed deviation refers to the diffe
207. anced Operation Chapter 6 Be sure to set the jump frequency so that d3 03 d3 02 lt d3 01 Internal frequency reference Set frequency reference d3 03 d3 02 d3 01 m Hold Reference Memory Selection d4 01 Parameter d4 01 selects whether the held frequency during motor operated potentiometer MOP sim ulation operation is stored when operation is stopped MOP operation is enabled by making either of the following settings for the multi function inputs H1 01 to H1 06 Accel decel ramp hold set value A UP command set value 10 DOWN command set value 11 MOP increase decrease When hold status is established by these external signals specify whether or not the output frequency is to be retained When this function is enabled operation is re started after power up using the frequency reference val ue that was retained Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number usd MR bat NO setting Vit vn E OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector per i pe qe Je uem cc L Memory This parameter cannot be changed during operation Explanation of Settings Setting Description Disabled Held frequency during MOP operation is not retained If a stop command is given or if power is removed the frequency reference is reset to OHz Restart after operation stoppage or power up begins at zero Enabled Held frequency during MOP operation is retained If a stop command is given or if power is
208. and 200 of the Inverter s rated current The value for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters is shown Note 5 The setting range is between 0 00 and 0 1 less than the Inverter s rated current The value for 200 V class 0 4 kw Inverters is shown e Switching Control for Two Motors Set a multi function input 1 to 6 the parameters H1 01 to H1 06 to 16 for motor switching When the motor switching input turns ON the constants of the second motor will be selected Switch the following 6 69 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 external wires to the second motor when the constants are selected By setting the multi function con tact output or the multi function output 1 or 2 to 1C for motor selection the status of the switching of the motor can be checked The output will turn ON when the second motor is selected e Power wires U V and W e PG signal line if PG is selected e Peripheral circuits e g a motor brake and a thermo switch for excessive heating detection Note 1 Two motor switching control is not possible while the Inverter is in operation If an attempted is made to switch the motor while the Inverter is in operation the message Motor Running will flash Note 2 Switch the motor while the motor is not rotating Do not attempt to switch the motor while it is coasting to a stop otherwise a main circuit overvoltage OV or overcurrent OC fault will re sult Note 3 Other than the motor constants the same parameters are use
209. and hunting are occurring with PID control Check the vibration cycle and individually adjust the P I and D Refer to page 6 55 8 19 Maintenance Operations Chapter 8 If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped The DC braking is not operating properly If the motor continues operating at low speed without com pletely stopping and after a deceleration stop has been executed it means that the DC braking is not decelerating enough Adjust the DC braking as follows Increase the parameter b2 02 DC injection braking current setting Increase the parameter b2 04 DC injection braking time at stop setting m If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started or Fan Stalls DC braking is insufficient at startup Generation of 0 V and stalling can occur if the fan is turning when it is started This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC braking before starting the fan In crease the parameter b2 03 DC injection braking time at start setting If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference e The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range When the jump frequency function is used the output frequency does not change within the jump fre quency range Check to be sure that the jump frequency parameters d3 01 to d3 03 and jump fre quency width parameter d3 04 settings are suitable e The frequency reference upper limit has been reached The output frequency upper limit is determined b
210. and turns ON and the motor will be accelerated at the speci fied frequency _ DC braking time at stop b2 04 Output frequenc P 3 y Deceleration time Excitation level b2 01 NE Free run Stop b1 03 1 Run command ON OFF The inverter output is shut OFF Output frequency When the stop command is input d and the run command goes OFF Note 1 After the stop command is input run commands are ignored until the minimum base block time L2 03 has elapsed Note 2 Do not input the run command again until the motor has slowed down sufficiently If the run command turns ON the motor will rapidly decelerate to a low frequency and a main circuit overvoltage OV or overcurrent OC will be detected If necessary use a timed free run stop and set the deceleration time to a value large enough to ensure sufficient deceleration restarting is not possible during the deceleration time Use one of the multi function inputs 1 to 6 H1 01 to H1 06 for a speed search find the speed during the free run stop and ensure that acceleration is smooth 5 14 Basic Operation Chapter 5 DC Braking Stop b1 03 z 2 DC Injection Note After the stop command is input and the minimum baseblock time L2 03 has elapsed DC braking is applied and the motor stopped The DC braking time depends upon the output fre Run command on OFF quency when the stop command is input and the DC braking time at stop setting in
211. application Function Classified by function Parameter Individual parameter settings 1 6 Introduction Chapter 1 e The 3G3FV allows the following three kinds of access levels to be set in order to further simplify pa rameter setting An access level is a range of parameters that can be set or referenced e Quick start e Basic e Advanced Sets reads parameters required for trial operation Factory setting Sets reads parameters that are commonly used Sets reads all the parameters that can be used e In general press the Enter Key to move from an upper to a lower level This varies somewhat howev er according to the access level as shown in the following diagram For the Quick start access level which has few parameters that can be set pressing the Enter Key jumps directly to the Parameter level whereas for the Advanced access level which has many pressing the Enter Key first leads to the Group level Mode MENU Operation mode Initialize mode Program mode Auto tuning mode _ Modified constants mode Group Function Parameter b Application b1 Sequence b1 01 Reference source ADVANCED b1 02 Run source BASIC QUICK START p1 03 Stopping method b2 DC braking b2 01 Zero speed level b2 02 DC injection braking c
212. apter 7 7 2 6 Terminal Parameter Lists Digital Inputs H1 Parame Name Description Setting Default Control mode No i terno Display range j setting V f con V f with Open Flux name 4 trol PG loop vector vector Multi func Terminal 3 Sel tion input 1 Terminal 3 selection Multi func Terminal 4 Sel tion input 2 Terminal 4 selection Multi func Terminal 5 Sel tion input 3 Terminal 5 selection Multi func Terminal 6 Sel tion input 4 Terminal 6 selection Multi func Terminal 7 Sel tion input 5 Terminal 7 selection Multi func Terminal 8 Sel tion input 6 Terminal 8 selection Note The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3 wire sequence e Digital Input Functions List Setting Function Control mode value Vif Open loop Flux w PG Vector vector 0 3 wire control Forward Reverse command OK OK OK OK 5 16 1 Local Remote selection ON Operating OFF OK OK OK OK 6 78 Setting parameters 2 Option Inverter selection ON Option OK OK OK OK 6 78 3 Multi step speed reference 1 OK OK OK OK 5 17 When H3 05 is set to 0 this function is combined with Main auxiliary speed switch 4 Multi step speed reference 2 OK OK OK OK 5 17 5 Multi step speed reference 3 OK OK OK OK 5 17 6 Jog frequency reference has priority over OK OK OK OK 5
213. arameter o1 01 Use parameter o1 01 to select the values that will be monitored at startup Use the last two digits from the U1 Monitor list U1 to select a value For example the torque reference is U1 09 so input 9 to select the torque reference Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit V A with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector User Monitor Sel 4to28 6 Basic or Advanced The following example shows how to change parameter o1 01 so that the output power is monitored at startup instead of the output voltage Key sequence Explanation E npo Displays operation mode Displays program mode Puts the Unit in program mode JI Pll E Displays function selection o1 Puts the Unit in function selection o1 Monitor Select Displays the parameter setting for 01 01 2 times i DEM 5 Sets the parameter to output power Writes the new setting t Returns to the Monitor Select display Note In this example the setting is changed in the Basic access level Power On Monitor Parameter 01 02 Use parameter 01 02 to indicate which value will be displayed when the Unit is started A setting of 1 indicates the frequency reference 2 indicates the output frequency 3 indicates the output current and 4 indicates the value set in parameter 01 01 3 16 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 Parameter Display n
214. as been brought within the zero servo completion width b9 02 after the zero servo command was input e This output function indicates that zero servo position control has been completed e The output is turned ON after the zero servo command is input and the difference between the zero servo operation starting position and the current position is within the zero servo completion width b9 02 m Multi function Analog Input Frequency Reference Current H3 05 H3 09 e Parameter Settings Parameter number Valid access levels V f with Open Loop Vector Default setting Display name Setting range Vif Control Flux Vector Terminal 16 Sel 0 to 1F E 1F Basic or Advanced Terminal 14 Sel 1to 1F m 1F Advanced Note These parameters cannot be changed during operation Function Auxiliary reference H3 05 Equivalent of 100 Input 10 V or 20 mA Maximum frequency Control mode V f w PG Open loop Vector Flux Vector Frequency Gain Frequency ref of terminal 13 Frequency Bias Maximum frequency added to H3 03 Voltage Bias Rated voltage E1 05 Accel Decel Change Accel Decel times C1 DC Brake Current Inverter s rated output current Overtorque Level Rated torque or Inverter s rated output Setting in L6 05 is ignored Stall Prevention Level Inverter s rated output current Reference Lower
215. ass Maximum applicable motor capacity 3G3IV PUZBAB 1 3A18 0MH Current A Inductance mH Loss W Weight kg 2 5A8 4MH 5A4 2MH 7 5A3 6MH 10A2 2MH 15A1 42MH Figure 20A1 06MH 30A0 7MH 40A0 53MH 50A0 42MH 60A0 36MH 80A0 26MH 90A0 24MH 120A0 18MH 150A0 15MH 9 21 Specifications Chapter 9 Dimensions mm E F Figure 1 M Terminal L Detailed diagram of M 4 J Mounting bolt mounting hole 2L NINI N N N N N N N N N N N Figure 2 M Terminal Nameplate L Detailed diagram of A Fik mounting hole 4 J Mounting bolt e Simple Input Noise Filter and Input Noise Filter 3G3EV PLNFD Yaskawa Electric 3G3IV PFN P da Simple Input Noise Filter Input Noise Filter 9 22 Schaffner The Simple Input Noise Filter is connected to the power input side to eliminate the noise in the power line connected to the Inverter and suppress noise leaking from the Inverter to the power line Specifications Applicable Models 200 V class Chapter 9 400 V class Maximum motor ca pacity New model 3G3EV PLNFD2103DY Maximum motor ca pacity kW 0 2 to 0 75 New model 3G3EV PLNFD4053DY 3G3EV PLNFD2153DY 1 5 2 2
216. ated voltage E1 05 OK JOK 5 Accel decel change Set acceleration and OK IOK IOK OK deceleration times C1 01 to C1 08 6 DC injection braking current Inverter rated output current OK IOK JOK 7 Overtorque detection level Motor rated torque OK IOK IOK OK 8 Stall prevention level during run Inverter rated output current OK JOK 9 Frequency reference lower limit Maximum frequency OK JOK OK OK level A Jump frequency Maximum frequency OK JOK OK OK B PID feedback Maximum frequency OK IOK IOK OK C PID target value Maximum frequency OK OK OK OK D Frequency bias 2 rotates in Maximum frequency HO0 03 OK OK OK OK reverse with negative values 10 Forward side torque limit Rated torque OK OK 11 Reverse side torque limit Rated torque OK OK 12 Regeneration side torque limit Rated torque OK OK 13 Torque reference torque limit at Rated torque OK speed control 14 Torque compensation bias Rated torque OK 15 Forward reverse side torque limit Rated torque OK OK 1F Not used terminal 14 frequency OK JOK OK OK reference 7 41 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 m Analog Outputs H4 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range Seng Vit vit Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector H4 01 Multi func Sets the number of the monitor 1t038 2 NO B B B B 6 95 ti
217. ation of an oil lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz consult with the manufac turer e Synchronous Motor A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control If a group of synchronous motors is individually turned ON and OFF synchronism may be lost e Single phase Motor Do not use an Inverter for a single phase motor The motor should be replaced with a 3 phase motor m Power Transmission Mechanism Speed Reducers Belts and Chains If an oil lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism oil lubrica tion will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range The power transmission mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is oper ated at a speed higher than 60 Hz 10 3 Appendix Chapter 10 Motor Burnout Due to Insufficient Dielectric Strength of Each Phase of the Motor Surge occurs among the phases of the motor when the output voltage is switched If the dielectric strength of each phase of the motor is insufficient the motor may burn out The dielectric strength of each phase of the motor must be higher than the maximum surge voltage Normally the maximum surge voltage is approximately three times the power voltage imposed on the Inverter Be sure to connect a dedicated motor to the 400 V Inverter A standard motor may burn out if it is
218. ation time to be too long Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable If the torque limit has been set by multi function analog inputs H3 05 and H3 09 set value 10 to 13 check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable e The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low If the value set for L3 02 stall prevention level during acceleration is too low the acceleration time will be too long Check to be sure that the set value is suitable e The stall prevention level during running is too low If the value set for L3 06 stall prevention level during running is too low the speed will drop before outputting torque Check to be sure that the set value is suitable If the Motor Does Not Operate According to Reference e The motor runs faster than reference e The frequency reference bias setting is wrong The frequency reference bias set in parameter H3 03 is added to the frequency reference Check to be sure that the set value is suitable e Frequency bias is set for multi function analog inputs When 2 frequency bias is set for multi function analog inputs H3 05 and H3 09 a frequency corre sponding to the input voltage current is added to the frequency reference Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable 8 16 Maintenance Operations Chapter 8 e A signal is being input to the frequency reference current terminal 14 When 1F frequency
219. ault will occur if only one of these commands is set e Be sure to set parameter b1 02 the run command source selector to 1 external terminal The up down function won t operate with any other b1 02 setting e The frequency up down commands operate according to the normal acceleration deceleration times in C1 01 through C1 08 e The upper and lower limits for the output frequency with the up down commands are determined by the following settings Reference upper limit d2 01 100 Reference lower limit d2 02 100 Upper limit Maximum frequency E1 04 x Lower limit Maximum frequency E1 04 x When frequency reference voltage terminal 13 or frequency reference current terminal 14 is being used as a frequency reference input the greatest frequency value becomes the lower limit 6 81 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e When the up down function is being used the output frequency will be accelerated to the lower limit if a run command is input e When the up down function and jog frequency reference are both assigned to multi function inputs an ON jog frequency reference input has the highest priority e Multi step References 1 through 8 are all disabled when the up down function has been set e The output frequency held by the up down function will be stored in memory if d4 01 the frequen cy reference hold function selector is set to 1 This output frequency will be retained even after a power interr
220. aution The Inverter might be damaged when using the fault restart function Understanding that the Inverter might be damaged be sure to take the following pre cautions Always set up a no fuse breaker NFB Set up a sequence that will stop peripheral equipment when an Inverter fault occurs e The fault restart function automatically restarts the Inverter even when an internal fault occurs during Inverter operation e Use this function only when continuing operation is more important than damaging the Inverter e The fault restart function is effective with the following faults With other faults the protective opera tions will engage immediately without attempting to restart operation OC Over current GF Ground fault PUF Fuse blown OV Main circuit over voltage UV1 Main circuit under voltage PF Main circuit voltage fault LF Output open phase HF Braking resistor overheated RR Braking transistor failure OL1 Motor overload OL2 Inverter overload OL3 Overtorque OL4 Overtorque e The fault restart count is cleared when operation is normal for 10 minutes after a fault restart is per formed or the power is turned off and then on again e When one of the multi function outputs H2 01 H2 02 or H2 03 is set to 1E Restart Enabled the output will be ON while the fault restart function is in progress Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number CE setting Vif V A with Open L
221. ax Frequency reference power supply 715 VDC 15 VDC power supply for frequency refer ence 15 VDC 10 20 mA max Frequency reference input voltage Frequency reference voltage input terminal Either 0 to 10 V or 0 to 10 V can be se lected as the parameter H3 01 0 to 10 VDC In put impedance 20 kQ 0 to 10 V In put impedance 20 kQ Frequency reference input current Current input terminal for frequency refer ence 4 to 20 mA In put impedance 250 kQ Multi function analog input Set by parameter H3 05 0 to 10 VDC In put impedance 20 kQ 0 to 10 V In put impedance 20 kQ Frequency reference input common Common for analog input signal Shielded wire connection ground Shielded terminal for sequence input fre quency reference input Multi function contact output Multi function contact output common Set by parameter H2 01 during running Contact output SPST NO 30 VDC 1A max 250 VAC 1A max Multi function output 1 Set by parameter H2 02 zero speed detection Open collector output Multi function output 2 Set by parameter H2 03 agree output ref erence detection 48 V 50 mA max Multi function output 1 and 2 common Common for terminals 25 26 Fault output NO condition Fault output NC condition Fault output common When fault occurs Terminals 18 to 20 Cl
222. ay Key sequence Display Explanation MENU vn r npo Displays operation mode 2 times d x Displays program mode Puts the Unit in program mode Displays the b1 Sequence function selection Displays the b2 DC Braking function selection Displays the C1 Accel Decel function selection Displays C1 01 Acceleration time 1 Selects the parameter so that the leading 0 flashes The digit that can be changed flashes 2 times F i Moves the cursor so that the 1 digit flashes RESET Changes the 1 to a2 Writes the new setting Returns to the C1 01 Acceleration time 1 display Returns to the program mode display Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 e Setting the Parameter in the Advanced Access Level The group level will be displayed when the Enter Key is pressed at the program mode display Key sequence Display Explanation MENU vn r npo Displays operation mode 2 times d E Displays program mode Puts the Unit in program mode Displays the Group b Application group selection Displays the Group C Tuning group selection Displays the C1 Accel Decel function selection Displays C1 01 Acceleration time 1 Selects the parameter so that the leading 0 flashes The digit that can be changed flashes 2 2 times F i Moves the cursor so that the 1 digit flashes Changes the 1 to a 2 Writes the new setting Returns
223. ay cause the leakage breaker to operate and cut off the power supply Change to a leakage breaker with a 8 18 Maintenance Operations Chapter 8 high leakage detection level i e a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit with an operating time of 0 1 s or more or one that incorporates high frequency measures i e one designed for use with Inverters It will also help to some extent to lower the Inverter s carrier frequency parameter C6 01 In addition remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened In general approximately 5 mA of leakage current occurs for each meter of cable m If There is Mechanical Vibration e The machinery is making unusual sounds e There may be resonance between the mechanical system s characteristic frequency and the carrier frequency If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is vibrating with a high pitched whine it may indicate that this is occurring To prevent this type of resonance adjust the carrier fre quency with parameters C6 01 to C6 03 e There may be resonance between a machine s characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the Inverter To prevent this from occurring either use the jump frequency functions in parameters d3 01 to d3 04 or install rubber padding on the motor base to reduce vibration e Vibration and hunting are occurring with open loop vector control The gain adjustment may be insufficient Reset the gain to
224. b2 04 as shown in the graph below Output frequency 23 braking DC braking time 4 b2 04x 10 Min baseblock time L2 03 ie gt DC braking time Note Lengthen the min baseblock time L2 03 when an over current OC occurs during stopping When the power to b2 04 an induction motor is turned off the counter electromotive force generated by the residual magnetic field in the mo 10 tor can cause an overcurrent to be detected when DC braking is applied Output frequency when the stop command is input 100 Max frequency e Free run Stop with Timer b1 03 3 Note After the stop command is input run commands are ignored until the time tg has elapsed The time tg depends upon the output frequency when the Run command stop command is input and the deceleration time ON OFF on i oN Time i EE to Output frequency Deceleration time Output frequency when the stop command is input 100 Max frequency 5 1 8 Multi function Input Settings H1 01 through H1 06 Parameters H1 01 through H1 06 set the multi function inputs in accordance with the application Thes e 6 parameters cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Units Default Valid access levels number range setting See v f V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Terminal 3 Sel Basic or Advanced Terminal 4 Sel Basic or Advanced Terminal 5 Sel Basic or Advanced Terminal 6 Sel Basic or
225. because the thermal value is reset each time that the power is turned off e f the Overload OL1 alarm 1F is set in one of the multi function outputs H2 01 through H2 03 the output will be turned ON when the electronic thermal value reaches 90 of the overload detection level Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control L1 02 MOL Time Const 0 1 to 5 0 Basic or Advanced Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation e Normally it isn t necessary to change this setting The default setting is a 150 1 minute endurance e This setting specifies the electronic thermal detection time e Set the protection time for a 150 load imposed after hot starting and continuously operating the Inverter with a rated current Set the protection time at rated speed if a general purpose motor is used The rated current of the general purpose motor will decrease if the frequency drops Therefore the Inverter will automatically shorten the detection time at low frequency e When the motor s overload endurance level is known set the hot start overload resistance level for the motor but be sure to allow some margin for safety e Decrease this setting when you want to detect an overload more quickly 6 97 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Electronic Thermal Time Characteristics In this example L1 02 is set to 1 minute the motor is operating at 60 Hz and general
226. ccess levels number range setting v f Vf with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Spd Agree Level 0 0 to 400 0 i Basic or Advanced Spd Agree Width 0 0 to 20 0 Basic or Advanced Spd Agree Lvl 400 0 to f Advanced 400 0 Spd Agree Wdth 0 0 to 20 0 Advanced Note These parameters cannot be changed during operation e Set these parameters when outputting one of the frequency agree or frequency detection signals from a multi function output settings 2 3 4 5 13 14 15 or 16 The following table shows the relationship between these parameters and the output signals Parameter Related output settings Parameter function Speed Agree Level Fref Set Agree 1 setting 3 Set the speed that you want to detect in Hz Absolute value Frequency Detection 1 setting 4 Th i l h Frequency Detection 2 setting 5 e set speed is an absolute value so the speed is detected in forward or reverse Speed Agree Width Fref Fout Agree 1 setting 2 Set the speed detection range in Hz Absolute value Fref Set Agree 1 setting 3 Frequency Detection 1 setting 4 Frequency Detection 2 setting 5 Speed Agree Level Fref Set Agree 2 setting 14 Set the speed that you want to detect in Hz Signed value Frequency Detection 3 setting 15 Frequency Detection 4 setting 16 Set positive values for forward negative values for reverse Speed Agree Width Fref Fout
227. ccurring Adjust the gain again e The reference speed is too high Check the reference circuit and reference gain e The settings in F1 08 and F1 09 aren t appropriate Check the settings in F1 08 and F1 09 The PG is disconnected The Inverter is outputting a frequency but PG pulses aren t being input e The is a break in the PG wiring Fix the broken disconnected wiring e The PG is wired incorrectly Fix the wiring e Power isn t being supplied to the PG Supply power to the PG properly e The torque limit is set to 0 through CompoBus D communications Applies only to flux vector con trol Set F9 05 to 0 torque limit disabled DEV Speed Deviation The speed deviation has been greater than the setting in F1 10 for longer than the setting in F1 11 e The load is too large Lighten the load e The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short Lengthen the acceleration time and decelera tion time e The load is locked Check the mechanical system e The settings in F1 10 and F1 11 aren t appropriate Check the settings in F1 10 and F1 11 e The torque limit is set to 0 through CompoBus D communications Applies only to flux vector con trol Set F9 05 to 0 torque limit disabled Maintenance Operations Fault Display OPR Oper Disconnect Meaning Faulty Digital Operator connection The Digital Operator conne
228. ces or output current displaying fault information or displaying the fault history Initialize mode Use this mode when selecting the language displayed on the Digital Operator selecting the access level for setting reading parameters selecting the control mode or initializing the parameters Program mode Use this mode when setting reading the parameters required for operation The program mode functions are subdivided into the following groups Application Operation mode selection DC control speed search etc Tuning Acceleration deceleration times S curve characteristics carrier frequencies etc Reference Settings related to frequency control Motor V f characteristics and motor parameters Option Settings for Optional Cards Terminal Settings for sequential I O and analog I O Protection Settings for the motor and inverter protection functions Operator Selects the Digital Operator s display and key functions Auto tuning Usable only with the vector control mode mode Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor parameters in the vector control mode The motor parameters are calculated and set automatically Modified Use this mode to set read parameters that have been changed from their factory set constants mode values m Switching Modes e Once the Unit has been put into operation mode by pressing the Menu Key the Increment and Decre ment Keys can be pressed to switch to other mod
229. changed Parameter Display Setting Default Valid access levels number name range setting Vit i mn Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector C8 30 Carrier in 0 to 2 Advanced tune Settings Setting Description The auto tuning carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz The auto tuning carrier frequency is set according to the set value of parameter C6 01 The auto tuning carrier frequency is set to 5 kHz Note The default setting does not normally need to be changed Adjust the parameter with the parame ter C6 01 set to 0 or 1 if auto tuning cannot be executed 6 1 8 Setting Adjusting Motor Parameters m Adjusting the V f Pattern Normally it isn t necessary to adjust the V f pattern with open loop vector control Adjust the V f pattern when you want to change the maximum frequency setting or decrease the Inverter s output voltage or when stalls are occurring during no load operation It is possible to make user defined V f pattern set tings E1 04 through E1 10 in open loop vector control mode The preset V f patterns cannot be se lected Parameter Display name Setting its Default Valid access levels number range setting v f V f with Open Loop Control PG Vector Max Frequency 40 0 to 400 0 Max Voltage 0 0 to 255 0 Base Frequency 0 0 to 400 0 Mid Frequency A 0 0 to 400 0 Mid Voltage A 0 0 to 255 0 Min Frequency 0 0 to 400 0 Min Voltage 0 0 to 255 0 Note 1 Q Quick Start Basic or Advanced
230. cording to the Inverter capacity The table shows a value of 200 V class 0 4 kW In the vector control modes the carrier frequency is determined by the carrier frequency upper limit parameter C6 01 In the V f control modes both with and without PG the carrier frequency can be changed in response to the output frequency by setting the carrier frequency lower limit parameter C6 02 and the carrier fre quency proportional gain parameter C6 03 Carrier frequenc 3 y The coefficient K varies depending on the carrier frequency upper limit as described below C6 01 C6 02 7 Output frequency x C6 03 x K Output frequency E1 04 Maximum output frequency To make the carrier frequency constant either set the same value for parameters C6 01 and C6 02 or set the carrier frequency proportional gain parameter C6 03 to 0 i e fix at upper limit value The following settings will generate a parameter setting fault OPE11 Carrier frequency upper limit C6 01 gt 5 0 kHz and carrier frequency lower limit c6 02 S 5 0 kHz Carrier frequency proportional gain C6 03 6 and C6 01 C6 02 If the lower limit is set higher than the upper limit the lower limit will be ignored and carrier frequency will be fixed at the upper limit Note For a 400 V Inverter if the carrier frequency is set to a value higher than the default setting the Inverter s rated output current will decrease If the Inverter s ov
231. crew 0 5 to 5 5 Wire thickness mm 2 to 5 5 3G3FV A4007 L1 L2 L3 CO 1 2 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 2 to 5 5 3GS3FV A4015 L1 L2 L3 CO 1 2 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 2 to 5 5 3GS3FV A4022 L1 L2 L8 2 1 492 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 2 to 5 5 3G3FV A4037 L1 L2 E30 1 2 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 2to5 5 3 5 to 5 5 3G3FV A4055 L1 L2 L8 1 2 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 3 5 to 5 5 3G3FV A4075 L1 L2 L3 CO 1 2 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 3G3FV A4110 L1 L2 L3 C 1 2 BT B2 T1 T2 T8 3G3FV A4150 L1 L2 L8 1 2 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 3G3FV B4185 L1 L2 L3 1 2 3 T1 T2 T3 14 8 ns 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B4220 L1 L2 L8 1 2 3 T1 T2 T3 22 8 r s 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B4300 L1 L2 L8 1 2 3 T1 T2 T3 22 8 ns 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B4370 L1 L2 L8 1 2 3 T1 T2 T3 30 14 s 0 5 to 5 5 2 25 Installation Voltage class 400 V Class 3G3FV B4450 Terminal L1 L2 L8 1 2 3 T1 T2 T3 Terminal screw Chapter 2 Wire thickness mm 50 14 s 0 5 to 5 5 3G3FV B4550 L1 L2 L3
232. ction Position lock for more details e ASR Gain Switch Setting 77 The gain is set according to the values in C5 01 C5 03 and C5 07 The gain is set to the value in C5 03 ASR proportional gain 2 e With this setting the multi function input switches the proportional gain used in speed control ASR The integral time is not changed Note Refer to 5 4 4 Speed Loop ASR Structure for more details on parameters C5 01 C5 03 and C5 07 6 88 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 m Multi function Output Settings H2 Setting Function Control mode Vif Open loop Flux w PG Vector Vector During RUN 1 Zero speed Fref Fout Agree 1 Detection width in L4 02 Fref Set Agree 1 Detection width in L4 02 Frequency Detection 1 L4 01 output frequency L4 01 Frequency Detection 2 Output frequency gt L4 01 Inverter Ready Initialization completed no faults DC Bus Undervoltage Main circuit voltage too low Baseblock 1 Option Reference ON Frequency reference from Operator Remote Operation ON Run command from Operator Torque Detection 1 N O Loss of Reference Valid when L4 05 is set to 1 DB overheat DC braking resistor overheating or faulty Fault A fault other than CPFOO or CPF01 occurred Minor Fault Alarm display olol DW coo uo o 2jonmcoio Reset Command Active Fault reset command in progress Timer Output Fref Fout A
233. ction was broken during Inverter operation Detected when the parameter is set as follows 02 0621 Chapter 8 Probable causes and remedies e Wiring cable is broken e The Digital Operator or Inverter contacts are faulty After disconnecting the connectors and then connecting them again or cleaning the connec tors restart the power supply e Parameter was set incorrectly Set 02 06 to 0 elf the problem persists replace the cables or Inverter EFO Opt External Fit External fault Communications option e An external fault was input from an Optional Com munications Card Reset the external fault from the Optional Com munications Card Remove the cause of the external fault input EF3 External Fault 3 External fault Input terminal 3 EF4 External fault Input terminal 4 EF5 EF6 EF7 External fault Input terminal 5 External fault Input terminal 7 EF8 External fault Input terminal 6 External fault Input terminal 8 e An external fault was input from a multi function in put Reset external fault inputs to the multi function inputs Remove the cause of the external fault E 15 SI F G Com Err SYSMAC BUS communications error An error occurred in the SYSMAC BUS communications line disrupting communications e The communications line was broken short cir cuited or wired in reverse
234. ctor Vector Motor Rated FLA Quick start Basic or Advanced Note 1 Inverter rated current ratio Note 2 The default setting for rated current differs according to the type of Inverter 4 9 Trial Operation Chapter 4 e Check the values on the motor nameplate and set each of the parameters E1 05 Maximum voltage VMAX Sets the motor rated voltage E1 06 Base frequency FA Sets the motor rated frequency E2 01 Motor rated FLA Sets the motor rated current e The setting procedure for these three parameters is as follows Key sequence Display Explanation E b Displays operation mode 2 times b ck Displays program mode RE if Puts the Unit in program mode 14 times Press the Up Arrow Key to display the maximum Li voltage see note Displays the maximum voltage frequency see note 5 times Hi Press the Up Arrow Key to display the rated current see note MENS BA Bok Returns to the operation mode display Note When there are discrepancies between the displayed values and the rated values set each value separately 4 2 6 No load Operation e Operate the Digital Operator in with the motor in the no load state not connected to the mechanical system Setting the Frequency Reference e Set the frequency reference on the frequency reference monitor in the operation mode e The following is an operation example with the frequency reference set to 10 Hz Key sequenc
235. d After setting H3 05 to 0 set any one of the multi function inputs H1 01 through H1 06 to a value of 3 Multi step Reference 1 When a multi function analog input has been set to Auxiliary Reference it is treated as frequency reference 2 during multi step operation so it can t be used unless Multi step Ref erence 1 has been set Set terminal 16 s signal level with H3 04 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number vere setting Vif V fwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector H amp 04 Term i6 Signal 0ori 0 BasicorAdvanced Terminal 16 Signal Level Settings 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 10 VDC input 10 to 10 VDC 10 to 10 VDC input A negative voltage is a command for rotation in the opposite direction m Adjusting the Analog Inputs There are three parameters used to adjust the analog inputs the gain and bias set separately for each input and the filter time constant a single value for all of the inputs The gain and bias can be adjusted separately for each analog input terminals 13 14 and 16 eGain Setthe frequency corresponding to a 10 V 20 mA input as a percentage of the maximum The maximum frequency set in E1 04 is 100 e Bias Set the frequency corresponding to a 0 V 4 mA input as a percentage of the maximum The maximum frequency set in E1 04 is 100 Set terminal 13 s gain and bias with H3 02 and H3 03 Both settings can be changed durin
236. d This function is valid with V f control and V f with PG control Parameters C7 01 and C7 02 cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector C7 01 Hung Prev Select 0 1 Advanced Not applicable C7 01 Settings Disables the hunting prevention function Enables the hunting prevention function Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control Normally it isn t necessary to change these parameters Adjust these parameters as follows if hunting occurs with a light load e Increase the setting in C7 02 if vibration occurs when operating with a light load If the setting is increased too much the current can fall to the point where stalling occurs e Decrease the setting in C7 02 if stalling occurs e Disable the hunting prevention function C7 01 0 if high responsiveness is more important than suppressing vibration 6 14 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 6 2 4 Setting Motor Parameters The motor parameters other than the V f pattern parameters are described below Calculate the rated slip E2 02 from the value shown on the motor s nameplate with the following equa tion and set this value Rated slip 2 rated frequency Hz rated speed r min x number of poles 120 Set the no load current
237. d setting 72 to one of the multi function inputs H1 01 through H1 06 e The zero servo status is entered when the frequency speed reference falls below the zero speed level b2 01 e Be sure to leave the run command input ON If the run command is turned OFF the output will be interrupted and the zero servo function will become ineffective e Adjust the holding strength of the zero servo position lock with parameter b9 01 Zero Servo Gain Increasing this setting increases the holding strength although vibration will occur if the setting is too high Adjust the holding strength after adjusting the speed control ASR gain e To output the zero servo status externally assign the Zero Servo End signal setting 33 to one of the multi function outputs H2 01 through H2 03 The Zero Servo Count setting in b9 02 is enabled when one of the multi function outputs has been set to 33 e The Zero Servo Count specifies the allowed offset from the starting position and the Zero Servo End signal remains ON as long as the position is within this range starting position Zero Servo Count e Set the Zero Servo Count to four times the number of pulses from the PG pulse generator or encoder as shown in the following diagram For example when a 1 000 p r encoder is being used the number of pulses would be 4 000 p r after multiplying by four e The Zero Servo End signal will go OFF when the zero servo command is turned OFF e These param
238. d by the first and second mo tors When connecting a PG check that the two motors have the same number of PG pulses The default settings of some constants vary with the motor control mode In that case when the second motor is selected the constants will be set to default values Motor switching selection OFF ON Co tactor for E operation OFF motor switching Motor 2 operation OFF ON Motor selection output OFF ON Approx 200 ms _ Approx 50 ms lt ra Approx 500 ms for flux vector control or V f control with PG feedback Forward reverse command OFF ON Turn ON the forward reverse command only after checking the status of motor 1 motor 2 and the motor selection monitor 6 5 6 Option Parameters F m Installing Optional Cards A maximum of three Optional Cards can be installed in the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV The installation location of each is determined by the type of Card Be sure to install the Cards in their correct locations e Installation Procedure 1 Turn off the Inverter s main circuit power supply Wait at least one minute or at least three minutes for models of 30 kW or more and then remove the Inverter s front cover Check to be sure that the CHARGE light is turned OFF Check the Optional Card s installation location A C or D 6 70 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Type of card Specifications Location Analog Reference 3G3IV PAH 4U 14 bit analog 2 inputs voltage current Card 3G3IV PAI
239. d from exceeding the specified limit in these cases e f the speed limit is exceeded during torque control operation a suppressing torque proportional to the divergence from the speed limit is added to the torque reference The suppressing torque is ap plied opposite to the motor rotation e There are two ways to set the motor speed limit a parameter setting or an analog input value e Speed Limit Selection Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V f with Open Loop Control d5 03 Speed Limit Sel tor2 1 Notapplicable Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation Settings The speed limit is set from one of the analog frequency reference terminals 13 or 14 The speed limit is set to the value in parameter d5 04 e Speed Limit Selection Settings e Limit with Analog Input d5 03 1 6 22 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 The speed limit value is set by the input voltage to frequency reference voltage terminal 13 When frequency reference current terminal 14 has been set to frequency reference by setting parameter H3 09 to 1F this terminal is also used as an input terminal for the speed limit In this case the actual speed limit value is the sum of the voltage input value at terminal 13 and the current input value at terminal 14 The polarity of the speed limit signal and the direction of the run command determine the direction in which
240. d on the display Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control A1 00 Select Language 0t06 Jo Quickstart Basic or Advanced Example The following example shows how to change parameter A1 00 so that Japanese is displayed instead of English Key sequence Display Explanation Ek E db Displays operation mode m z Displays initialize mode Puts the Unit in initialize mode Select Language display Displays the parameter setting for A1 00 Sets the display language to Japanese Writes the new setting E b t E DD Returns to the Select Language display m Setting the Access Level Use parameter A1 01 to select the parameter access level This level determines which parameters can be displayed and changed The parameters which can be displayed and changed also depend upon the control mode being used This parameter can be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector A1 01 AccessLevel 0104 2 Quick start Basic or Advanced 3 18 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 Access Level Settings Function This setting allows operation mode and initialize mode to be displayed or changed Use this setting to prevent parameter settings from being changed This
241. described in more detail in this chapter Function Fref Fout Agree 1 Setting Fref Set Agree 1 Frequency Detection 1 Frequency Detection 2 Torque Detection 1 N O Loss of Reference Timer Output Fref Fout Agree 2 Fref Set Agree 2 Frequency Detection 3 Frequency Detection 4 Torque Detection 1 N C Torque Detection 2 N O Torque Detection 2 N C Motor Selection Inverter Ready DC Bus Undervoltage Baseblock 1 Option Reference Remote Operation DB overheat Fault Minor Fault Reset Command Active Reverse Direction Baseblock 2 Motor 2 Selected Regenerating Current Torque Limit Speed Limit 6 90 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e Inverter Operating 1 During RUN 1 Setting 0 OFF The run command is OFF and there is not output voltage ON The run command is ON and voltage is being output e Inverter Operating 2 During RUN 2 Setting 37 The Inverter is not outputting a frequency Baseblock DC braking initial excitation or stopped The Inverter is outputting a frequency e These outputs can be used to indicate the Inverter s operating status Run command OFF ON Baseblock command OFF ON Output frequency During RUN 1 output OFF ON Dwing RUN ouput OFF ON e Excitation Setting 1 The
242. details of the fault will be displayed In that case refer to Section 8 Maintenance Operations Fault The display will differ depending on the type of fault 4 5 Trial Operation Chapter 4 4 2 3 lnitializing Parameters e Initialize the parameters using the following procedure Returns to default settings e To initialize the parameters set 2220 in A1 03 Initialize e After initialization the access level is set to Quick start A1 01 The following table shows the setting method for Quick start Key sequence Display Explanation Frequency reference display Displays operation mode Displays initialize mode Puts the Unit in initialize mode I 5 Displays the Initialize display Displays the parameter setting for A1 03 Changes the setting to 2 wire Initialization Writes the set values Entry Accepted is displayed for approximately 0 5 seconds Returns to the Initialize display i bI t Returns to the initialize mode display 4 2 4 Setting Input Voltage e Set the input voltage of the Inverter E1 01 according to the current voltage This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Input Voltage 200 400 Quick start Basic or Advanced Note The setting range or the default set
243. detection range the motor speed PG feedback Fast Stop C1 09 Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the motor speed PG feedback Continue Alarm Only Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the motor speed PG feedback Note 1 In order to detect faulty contacts and so on inserted at the Inverter output side select detec tion when the frequency reference matches the output frequency Note 2 The detection conditions vary as shown below depending on the software version In Ver VSG101114 and later versions both functions are provided VSG101043 and earlier software Set values 0 to 3 VSG101113 software Set values 4 to 7 Parameter F1 10 sets the PG speed deviation detection level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency Parameter F1 11 sets the length of time that the difference between the motor speed and reference speed must exceed the PG speed deviation detection level in order to generate a PG speed deviation fault DEV Valid access levels V f with Open Loop PG Vector Parameter number Default setting Display name Setting range Vif Control Flux Vector PG Deviate Level PG Deviate Time 0 to 50 0 0 to 10 0 Note A Advanced Not applicable 5 49 Basic Operation Chapter 5 5 5 4 Speed Loop ASR Structure
244. deviation above the level DEV F1 10 set level set as a PG Deviate percentage of the maximum Level frequency which continues for the deviation detection time PG speed F1 11 is detected as a speed deviation deviation tne DEY Note Speed deviation is the dif ference between actual PG Deviate motor speed and the ref Time erence command speed Number of Sets the number of teeth on the PG gear gears if there are gears teeth 1 between the PG and the motor PG Gear Motor speed r min Teeth1 No of pulses input from PG x 60 No of PG pulses F1 01 x Number of F1 13 F1 12 PG gear teeth 2 Note A gear ratio of 1 will be PG Gear used if either of these pa Teeth2 rameters is set to 0 PG Discon Used to set the PG nection disconnection detection time Detection PGO will be detected if the Time detection time continues beyond PGO Time the set time Note The setting range will change when the control mode is changed The setting range for Open loop vector control is given above 7 31 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Other Options Setup F2 to F9 Name Description Setting Default Control mode i range setti Display 9 TS Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Analog Sets the functions for channels Reference 1 to 3 which are effective when Card the 3G3IV PAI14B Analog selection
245. duced the basic set tings specific to each control mode will be explained Read the common settings first and then skip to the explanation for the control mode that will be used Even when your application requires special functions such as torque control or PID control make these basic settings first and then skip to the explanations of those special functions Refer to Chapter 6 Advanced Operation 5 1 Common Settings 5 1 1 Setting the Access Level and Control Mode m Setting the Access Level A1 01 Parameter A1 01 is used to select the parameter access level This level determines which parameters can be displayed and changed This parameter can be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V f with Open Loop Control A1 01 Accesslevel 0to4 2 Quickstart Basic or Advanced Access Level Settings The control mode setting also affects which parameters can be displayed and changed Setting Function Operation Only This setting allows the operation mode and initialize mode to be displayed or changed Use this setting to prevent parameter settings from being changed User Level This setting allows only the user selected parameters up to 32 to be displayed or changed Select the desired parameters as User Parameters in parameters A2 01 through A2 32 Quick start This setting allows the parameters required to start the Invert
246. e operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor 9 3 Specifications Chapter 9 Model number A2004 A2007 A2015 A2037 A2075 A2110 A2150 B2185 B2300 B2370 B2450 B2750 3G3FV E Grounding Protection by electronic circuits protection Charge indica Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx 50 V or more tor internal LED Environment Model number A2004 A2007 A2015 A2037 A2075 A2110 A2150 B2185 B2300 B2370 B2450 ere 3G3FV Location Indoors no corrosive gas oil spray metallic dust etc Ambient oper 10 to 45 C NEMAt type 10 to 40 C 10 to 45 C Open chassis type ating tempera ture Ambient oper 90 RH max with no condensation ating humidity Storage tem 20 to 60 C perature Altitude 1 000 m max Insulation 5 MQ min Do not carry out the insulation resistance test or withstand voltage test resistance Vibration with Vibration frequency less than 20 Hz 9 8 m s 1G max 20 to 50 Hz 2 m s 0 2G max stand Protective Both enclosed NEMA1 type and open chassis type IP00 Open chassis type IP00 structure General Specifications for 400 V Inverters Model number A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4037 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 B4185 B4220 B4300 B4370 B4450 B4550 B4750 B411K B416K B418K B422K B430K 3G3FV E E
247. e use a special motor for use with invert ers Allowable Load Characteristics of Standard Motor 24 ED or 15 minutes 24 ED or 15 minutes 24 ED or 15 minutes 100 80 T 10 orque 96 80 90 03 10 20 60 Frequency Hz e High speed Operation When using the motor at a high speed 60 Hz or more problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing durability e Torque Characteristics The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when operated with a commercial power supply Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor to set a proper V f pattern e Vibration The 3G3FV Series uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration When the motor is operated with the Inverter motor vibration is almost the same as when operated with a commercial power supply Motor vibration may however become greater in the following cases e Resonance with the natural frequency of the mechanical system Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in variable speed mode If resonance occurs install vibration proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump function to skip any frequency resonating the machine e Imbalanced rotor Take special care when the motor is operated at a higher speed 60 Hz or more 10 2 Appendix Chapter 10 e Noise Noise is almost the same as when the motor is op
248. e Acc Dec S curve characteristics for accel decel times Motor Slip Comp Slip compensation function settings Torque Comp Torque compensation function settings ASR Tuning Not used Can t be set Carrier Freq Carrier frequency settings Hunting Prev Not used Can t be set Factory Tuning Adjustment for open loop vector control Reference Preset Reference Frequency reference settings when using Operator Reference Limits Frequency upper and lower limit settings Jump Frequencies Prohibited frequency settings Sequence Up Down Accel Decel stop hold frequency setting Torque Control Not used Can t be set V f Pattern Motor Setup Motor parameters Motor parameters are set by the auto tuning function Control Method 2 Control mode settings for second motor V f Pattern 2 Motor Setup 2 Parameters for second motor Options 6 2 PG Option Setup Not used Can t be set Al 14 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Command Card DI 08 16 Setup Parameter settings for a Digital Command Card AO 08 12 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Monitor Card DO 02 Setup DO 08 Setup Not Used Do not change these settings PO 36F Setup Parameter settings for a Pulse Monitor Card SI F G Setup Parameter settings for a SYSMAC BUS Interface Card CP 916 Set
249. e Explanation kj pok Displays operation mode i Puts the Unit in operation mode and displays the Li f frequency reference Ew Switches operation to the Digital Operator SEQ REF ae and LED indicators turn OFF ri Sets the frequency reference 2 times Pr i The first position flashes RESET 4 times PI Set to 010 00 Hz E nd i The set values are overwritten Returns to the frequency reference display 4 10 Trial Operation Chapter 4 Operation Using the Digital Operator e Press the Run Key The motor will start to rotate forward rotation e Press the Forward Reverse Key The motor will rotate in the reverse direction e Press the Stop Key The motor will stop The operation LED indicator will keep flashing until the motor stops e The frequency reference can be changed even during operation When this is done the frequency reference is changed as soon as the Enter Key is pressed to input the set values e f the Jog Key is pressed when the Unit is stopped it will rotate by the jog frequency default setting 6 0 Hz only while the Key is being pressed m Checking the Operating Status e After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction check that there is no vibration or abnormal sound from the motor e Check that no faults have occurred in the Inverter during operation 4 2 7 Actual Load Operation e After checking the operation with the motor
250. e Front Cover Remove the front cover to wire the terminals Remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the front cover For models of 15 kW or less both 200 V and 400 V class do not remove or mount the front cover without first removing the Digital Operator otherwise the Digital Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact m Removing the Cover Models of 15 kW or Less e Removing the Digital Operator Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the arrow 1 direction to unlock the Digital Opera tor and lift the Digital Operator in the arrow 2 direction to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the following illustration e Removing the Front Cover Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the arrow 1 directions and lift the bottom of the cover in the arrow 2 direction to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration 2 12 Installation Chapter 2 e Mounting the Front Cover Mount the front cover to the Inverter by taking in reverse order to the steps to remove the front cover after wiring the terminals Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover otherwise Digital Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut Mounting
251. e Installing a Molded case Circuit Breaker Always connect the power input terminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 and power supply via a molded case circuit breaker MCCB suitable to the Inverter e Install one wiring circuit breaker per Inverter e Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1 5 to 2 times the Inverter s rated current e For the MCCB s time characteristics be sure to consider the Inverter s overload protection one min ute at 150 of the rated output current e f the MCCB is to be used in common among multiple Inverters or other devices set up a sequence such that the power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output as shown in the following diagram Inverter Power Supply MCCB 3 phase Single phase 200 V AC 3 phase 400 V AC Fault output NC Note Use a 400 200 V transformer for a 400 V model e Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter Inverter outputs use high speed switching so high frequency leakage current is generated In general a leakage current of approximately 100 mA will occur for each Inverter when the power cable is 1 m and approximately 5 mA for each additional meter of power cable Therefore at the power supply input area use a special purpose breaker for Inverters which detects only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and excludes high fre quency leakage current e For the special purpose breaker for Inverters choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensiti
252. e open loop vector control default settings are given above 7 17 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 m Speed Control ASR C5 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 3 Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector ASR Pro Sets the proportional gain of the portional speed loop ASR P gain 1 ASR P Gain 1 ASR Inte Sets the integral time of the gral I time speed loop ASR in 1 second 1 units ASR Gain 1 ASR Pro Usually setting is not necessary portional Note Set to change the rota Gain P 2 tional speed gain For fl t trol ASR P or flux vector contro P C5 01 Gain 2 1 C5 02 ASR Inte P C gral I time fo For Vit control with PG 2 P 05 03 1 C504 zn Dame 0 C5 07 E1 04 Motor speed Hz ASR Limit Sets the upper limit for the compensation frequency for the Jm speed loop ASR to a ASR Limit percentage of the maximum frequency ASR Prima Sets the filter time constant the ry delay time from the speed loop to the time torque reference output in units of 1 second ASR Delay Note Usually setting is not nec Time essary ASR Sets the frequency for switching Switching between Proportion Gain 1 2 frequency and Integral Time 1 2 in Hz units ASR Gain Note The multi function input SW Freq ASR Gain SW takes priority ASR Inte Used to set the limit to the g
253. e parameter settings by pressing the Increment and Decre ment Keys to display the desired parameter Press the Menu Key to cancel auto tuning The operation mode display will appear m Performing Auto tuning Auto tuning will start if the Run Key is pressed when the Tuning Ready message is being displayed The motor will operate during auto tuning so be sure that it is safe for the motor to operate before press ing the Run Key The following message will be displayed when the Run Key is pressed Tune Proceeding HZ A Auto tuning takes up to 1 5 minutes The message Tune Successful will be displayed when auto tun ing is completed If auto tuning has been completed successfully press the Menu Key and proceed to the next operation If a fault occurred during auto tuning refer to 5 2 2 Auto tuning Faults for details on correcting the cause of the fault and perform auto tuning again Note To cancel auto tuning after it has been started press the Stop Key to stop the operation and then press the Menu Key to return to Drive Mode 5 2 2 Auto tuning Faults One of the fault messages in the following table will be displayed if a fault occurs during auto tuning In this case determine the cause of the fault correct it and perform auto tuning again 5 21 Basic Operation Chapter 5 The fault display can be cleared by pressing the Menu Key The motor parameters will revert to their default settings if a fault occurs Set these para
254. e parameters 5 5 3 PG Speed Control Card Settings m Available PG Speed Control Cards There are 4 types of PG Speed Control Cards but only 2 types can be used with V f control 3G3FV PPGA2 Phase A single pulse input input for open collector 3G3FV PPGD2 Phase A single pulse input line driver inputs Select the Card according to the application and install it in the Inverter as described in 2 2 6 Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards m Setting the PG Pulse Number F1 01 Set the PG pulse generator or encoder pulse number in pulses revolution Set the number of phase A or phase B pulses in one motor revolution This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vf v f with Open Loop Flux Control PG Vector Vector F1 01 PG Pulses Rev 0 to 60 000 pr 1000 Q Note Q Quick start Basic or Advanced Not applicable Setting the Number of PG Gear Teeth F1 12 and F1 13 When V f control with PG feedback is used the motor can be operated even if there are gears between the motor and PG because the responsiveness is lower than it is with vector control Set the number of teeth on the gears if there are gears between the motor and PG The motor s speed will be calculated within the Inverter using the following equation Number of pulses input from the PG x 60 9 Number of gear teeth 2 F1 13 Number
255. e parameters again Maintenance Operations Chapter 8 8 2 Troubleshooting Due to parameter setting errors faulty wiring and so on the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started up If that should occur use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures If the contents of the fault are dis played refer to 8 1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions m If Parameter Constants Cannot Be Set e The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed e Passwords do not match If the parameter A1 04 Password 1 and A1 05 Password 2 numbers are different the constants for the initialize mode cannot be changed Reset the password If you cannot remember the password display A1 05 select password by pressing the Reset Select Key and the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1 04 display Then reset the password Input the reset password in parameter A1 04 e Constant write in prohibition is input This occurs when program lockout set value 1B is set for a multi function input If the program lock out input is OFF the constants cannot be changed Turn it ON and then set the constants e The Inverter is operating drive mode There are some constants that cannot be set during operation Turn the Inverter off and then make the settings e OPEO01 through OPE11 is displayed This is a parameter setting error The set value for the parameter con
256. ection signal Term will be enabled when Resistance the motor 2 selected function is set for multi Motor 2 function output leakage If the control method for inductance motor 1 is different from that for motor 2 all oth Leak er parameters of motor Inductance 2 will be set to default settings Note 1 These voltages are for the 200 V class Double the voltage for 400 V class Inverters Note 2 The default values are restored if the control mode is changed The defaults for open loop control are shown Note 3 The default setting depends on the Inverter s capacity The default settings shown in the table are for 200 V class 0 4 to 1 5 kW Inverters Note 4 The setting range is 1096 to 20096 of the Inverter s rated output current The default settings shown in the table are for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters Note 5 The setting range is between 0 00 and 0 1 less than the motor s rated current The default settings shown in the table are for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters 7 2 5 Options Parameter Lists m PG Option Setup F1 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 8 3 Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Number of Sets the number of PG pulse PG pulses generator or encoder pulses PG Note Sets the number of pulses Pulses Rev per motor revolution 7 29 Parameter Lists C
257. ector C1 10 Aco DecUnits oort Advanced 1 1 Settings 0 01 Seconds Sets the acceleration deceleration time units to 0 01 seconds 0 1 Seconds Sets the acceleration deceleration time units to 0 1 seconds m Acceleration Deceleration Time Settings C1 01 through C1 08 Parameters C1 01 through C1 08 set the acceleration and deceleration times individually 5 11 Basic Operation Chapter 5 The acceleration time is the time required to go from 0 to 100 of the maximum frequency and the deceleration time is the time required to go from 100 to 0 of the maximum frequency Four acceleration times and four deceleration times can be set When using acceleration deceleration times 2 through 4 set Multi Accel Decel 1 or Multi Accel Decel 2 in the multi function inputs H1 01 through H1 06 Parameter Display name Setting Units Default Valid access levels number range See setting vi V f with Open Loop Flux note 1 Control Vector Vector Acceleration time 1 0 0 to 6000 0 Quick start Basic or Advanced Deceleration time 1 0 0 to 6000 0 Quick start Basic or Advanced Acceleration time 2 0 0 to 6000 0 Basic or Advanced Deceleration time 2 0 0 to 6000 0 Basic or Advanced Acceleration time 3 0 0 to 6000 0 Advanced Deceleration time 3 0 0 to 6000 0 Advanced Acceleration time 4 0 0 to 6000 0 Advanced Deceleration time 4 0 0 to 6000 0 Advanced
258. ed by section A below Section A 8 21 Maintenance Operations Chapter 8 8 3 Maintenance and Inspection m Cautions and Warnings NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING N Caution N Caution Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power supply confirming that the CHARGE indicator or status indicators is turned OFF and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover Not doing so may result in electrical shock Maintenance inspection or parts replacement must be performed by authorized personnel Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury Do not attempt to take the Unit apart or repair Doing either of these may result in electrical shock or injury Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements Careless handling may result in malfunction Do not change wiring disconnect connectors the Operator or optional items or replace fans while power is being supplied Doing so may result in injury damage to the product or malfunction e Daily Inspection Check the following items with the system in operation The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises There should be no abnormal heat generation The ambient temperature should not be too high The output current value shown on the
259. ed to enabled and disable ground fault protection so that it can be disable when required by the application 1 13 Introduction Chapter 1 Improved English Messages The English messages displayed on the Digital Operator when the language is set to English A1 00 0 have been improved 1 3 3 Software Ver V8G101113 Messages in 7 Languages Application as a global inverter is enabled by displays in Japanese English French German Italian Spanish or Portuguese Low speed Rotation Inconsistencies Greatly Reduced Improvements in the current detector for vector control and in the responsiveness of current control have greatly reduced torque ripple This greatly reduces the low speed inconsistencies for the 3G3FV Series Better Motor Speed Control Accuracy Parameter C3 06 Previously the motor speed control accuracy for vector control was greatly reduced when the limit of Inverter s voltage output was approached a voltage greater than that of the input power supply cannot be output If the new output voltage control method is used the output voltage will be controlled so that the limit will not be reached thus maintaining speed accuracy The linear characteristic of torque control has also been improved Note The current may increase by about 1096 when this function is used Be sure to select an Inverter with ample output current capacity Improved Motor Parameter Autotuning A new method has been added for autotuning
260. ee err rrr tue 7 1 7 1 Initialize Mode Parameters 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eee en nees 7 3 7 2 Program Mode Parameter List 0 0 cece eee eee 7 5 7 2 1 Application Group Doses cig ek ei ee a Rh DR RR es 7 5 7 2 2 Tuning Parameters llle certo eiad bbe dhe tena DU ME eee ee 7 13 7 2 3 Reference Parameters List 0 0 0 0 ccc cece eee enn eens 7 21 7 2 4 Motor Constant Parameter Lists 00 e eee 7 24 7 2 5 Options Parameter Lists 0 0 0 cee eee 7 29 7 2 6 Terminal Parameter Lists 0 00 rn 7 36 7 2 7 Protection Parameter Lists llle 7 44 7 2 8 Operator Parameter Lists 2 1 0 0 0 eee ee eee ee 7 51 Chapter 8 Maintenance Operations S I 8 1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions 0 0 eee e 8 2 8 I 1 Fault Detection i bee t RAR EA RR RU Ra RR ER Reg ede 8 2 8 1 2 Minor Fault Detection rererere 8 8 8 1 3 Operation Brrors 5 0 Scat So RID VUE ea RERO EE 8 12 8 2 Troubleshooting osos La be Reed e bg ep eR RR RE SERERE Rege 8 14 8 3 Maintenance and Inspection slseeeeleeee me 8 22 Chapter 9 Specifications eee 9d 9 1 Inverter Specifications wos deaf eae ies ee he EUN ER E eO NERIS UR 9 2 9 2 Option Specifications rele Ue eh Een ERR He AERE ed 9 7 Chapter 10 Appendix eee nnn nnn nn 10 1 10 1 Notes on Using the Inverter fora Motor
261. efault To make sure that the brake holds use the frequency detection function and apply the brake only when the detected frequency drops to 3 to 5 Hz or lower Also at startup use the fre quency detection function and release the brake only when the detected frequency is 3 to 5 Hz or higher e The DC braking is insufficient If the DC braking power is insufficient adjust parameter b2 02 DC injection braking current e An inappropriate brake is being used The holding brake is designed only for holding not for braking If the holding brake is used for braking the brake pad will wear out much faster than designed Use an appropriate brake for braking If the Motor Burns Out e The load is too big If the motor s load is too big and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor s rated torque the motor will burn out Also if the motor s inscription states that the motor is rated for eight hours for example the motor s rated torque and capacity may be limited to eight hours of use If that 8 hour rated torque is used for normal operation it may cause the motor to burn out Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration deceleration time Also consider increasing the motor capacity e The ambient temperature is too high The motor s rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range The motor will burn out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an
262. eference 1 d1 01 tl DJ Ri 9 Pressing Enter allows the setting to be changed The leading digit will flash Changes the setting to 30 00 Hz Writes the new setting t Returns to the frequency reference 1 display Returns to the modified constants mode display 3 30 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 3 8 Operation Mode Selection Key and Local Remote Selection Input The operation mode of the Inverter can be changed using the Operation Mode Selection Key on the Digital Operator Using this key it is possible to switch between the two operation modes shown below The same kind of switching is also possible with control circuit terminals set using the multi function input parameters 1 to 6 set value 2 local remote selection input Operation mode Description Contents Inverter operates according to control Operation will be determined by the signals from a higher level control following settings System Frequency reference selection b1 01 Run source selection b1 02 Inverter operates alone in order to check Run commands RUN STOP Key on operation directly related to the Inverter Digital Operator Frequency reference Value set with the Digital Operator Note Operates as if b1 01 and b1 02 were set to 0 Note 1 The operation mode will always be Remote Mode when power is supplied Therefore to start operation immediately after power is supplied
263. eference input common Note Variable resistors for frequency ref erences must be 2 kQ 1 4 W min Wiring Example Stop switch NOT NC ar Run command Operates when the run switch is closed Stop command Stops when the stop switch is open Forward Reverse command Multi function input Sequential input common Note Wiring methods for 3G3FV CUE CE Inverters are sometimes different Always check wiring methods in the nstallation Manual 1530 and 1520 2 22 Installation Chapter 2 2 2 A Wiring Around the Main Circuit System reliability and noise resistance are affected by the wiring method used There fore always follow the instructions given below when connecting the Inverter to periph eral devices and other parts m Wire Size and Round Solderless Terminal For the main circuit and ground always use 600 V polyvinyl chloride PVC cables If the cable is long and may cause voltage drops increase the wire size according to the cable length 2 23 Installation Chapter 2 e Wire Sizes Voltage class Terminal Terminal Wire screw thickness mm 200 V Class 3G3FV A2004 L1 L2 L8 2 1 2 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 2 to 5 5 3G3FV A2007 r N r w 1 2 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 2to5 5 3G3FV A2015 r 1 L2 L3 C 1 42 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 2 to 5 5 8 5 to 5 5 1 L2 L3 C 1 4 2 B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 8 5 to 5
264. els number setting v f VA with Open Loop Flux Control PG Vector Vector C5 06 ASR Delay Time 0 000 to 0 500 s 0 004 Not applicable Note A Advanced Parameter Display Setting range Default Valid access levels number name setting Vif Control C5 08 ASR 1 Limit 0 to 400 400 X A The setting of C5 08 does not normally need to be changed It is used to set an upper limit for the integral used in speed control Set a smaller value if rapid changes in the load can damage the load or cause the motor to become disengaged due to Inverter responsiveness If the setting is too small however it may become impossible to perform speed control 5 4 5 Adjusting Speed Control Loop ASR Gain m Gain Adjustment Procedure Use the following procedure to adjust the gain with the mechanical system and actual load connected At zero speed increase C5 01 ASR P Gain 1 until there is no vibration At zero speed decrease C5 02 ASR Time 1 until there is no vibration j Y Does vibration develop when the motor operates YES Decrease C5 01 ASR P Gain 1 at the maximum normal operating speed NO i Y Adjustment completed Increase C5 02 ASR I Time 1 When there is higher level position control ad just the position loop gain so that overshooting undershooting doesn t occur m Fine Adjustments When you want e
265. els number range setting Vit Ms sim OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector b5 07 PID Offset 100 0 Advanced to 100 0 This parameter can be changed during operation Explanation of Set Values e Parameter b5 07 adjusts the PID control offset e f both the target value and the feedback value are set to zero adjust the Inverter s output frequency to zero Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit ui pn OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector b5 08 PID Delay Time 0 00 to Advanced 10 00 This parameter can be changed during operation Explanation of Set Values e Parameter b5 08 is the low pass filter setting for PID control outputs e Parameter b5 08 is preset at the factory to the optimum value for most applications so there is normal ly no need to change the setting e f the viscous friction of the mechanical system is high or if the rigidity is low causing the mechanical system to vibrate increase the set value so that it is higher than the vibration frequency period This will decrease the responsiveness but it will prevent the vibration e Jump Frequency Function While the Inverter is in PID control a frequency band can be avoided by setting parameters d3 01 through d3 04 to the desired frequencies Use this function to prevent vibration of the mechanical sys tem Note The frequency band to be set should be as narrow as possible otherwise PID control will not
266. en added to the startup DC braking function enabling magnetic flex to be built up in the motor during DC braking m Braking Function with Stall Prevention during Deceleration Parameter L3 04 Even if regenerative energy is handled using a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit overvoltages OV can be detected during rapid deceleration A stall prevention function for deceleration has been added to the braking function regeneration processing to limit voltages when main circuit overvoltages are likely to be detected thus enabling faster braking without overvoltage detection m Inverter Overload OL2 Protection Selection for Low speed Operation Parameters L8 17 and L8 19 An Inverter overload protection operation selection has been added to protect from overcurrent dam age at low speeds This function allows the best protection to be selected according to the application 1 15 Introduction Chapter 1 m Protection Setting for Motors for Vector Control Parameter E1 02 A special protection setting has been provided for vector control motors which have high resistance to overloads even at low speeds m Bias Function for Analog Monitor Cards Parameters F4 05 and F4 06 A bias function has been added to the analog output from Analog Monitor Cards to enable adjusting the offset voltage NC Contact Emergency Stop Function for Multi function Inputs Parameters d3 01 to d3 04 An NC contact emergency stop function has been
267. epends on the E2 03 Current setting DCInj Start Freq DC Used to set the time to perform injection DC injection braking initial braking excitation for flux vector control time at at start in units of 1 second start Note Used to stop the load ro tating and restart it When DCInj the set value is 0 DC in Time jection braking at start is Start not performed DC Used to set the time to perform injection DC injection braking initial braking excitation for flux vector control time at at stop in units of 1 second stop Note Used to prevent coasting after the stop command is DOlni input When the set value Time Sto is 0 00 DC injection brak p ing at stop is not per formed Magnetic Sets the magnetic flux flux compensation value during DC compensati injection braking as a on value percentage of the no load current Field Note Used to reduce the start ing time in motors with high electrical time constants such as high capacity motors Comp sta rt 7 7 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 m Speed Search b3 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range setti Display 9 TS Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Speed Sets the speed search function search to start when the run command selection at is input start 0 Disabled Starts from the minimum output frequency 1 Enabled Speed search
268. er Display name Terminal 13 Gain Setting range 0 0 to 1 000 0 Default setting Valid access levels Vit V f with Open Loop Control Basic or Advanced Terminal 13 Bias 100 0 to 100 0 Basic or Advanced Terminal 16 Gain 0 0 to 1 000 0 Basic or Advanced Terminal 16 Bias 100 0 to 100 0 Basic or Advanced Terminal 14 Gain 0 0 to 1 000 0 Advanced Terminal 14 Bias 100 0 to 100 0 Advanced Note 1 Adjust the gain so that the maximum signal level corresponds to the maximum frequency or the motor s rated torque as follows e When the input terminal is used for frequency reference A 10 V 20 mA input indicates a frequency reference that is 100 of the max frequency When the input terminal is used for torque reference A 10 V 20 mA input indicates a torque reference that is 100 of the motor s rated torque e When the input terminal is used for torque compensation A 10 V 20 mA input indicates a torque compensation that is 100 of the motor s rated torque Note 2 Adjust the bias so that the minimum signal level corresponds to the maximum frequency or the motor s rated torque as follows When the input terminal is used for frequency reference A 0 V 4 mA input indicates a frequency reference that is 100 of the max frequency When the input terminal is used for torque reference A 0 V 4 mA input indicates a torque
269. er about 25 to be displayed or changed Basic This setting allows the commonly used parameters to be displayed or changed Advanced This setting allows all parameters to be displayed or changed Note The parameters required for basic operation can be displayed and changed in the Basic level but this section also describes parameters that can be set only in the Advanced level so set the ac cess level to Advanced Example The following example shows how to change parameter A1 01 from Quick start to Advanced Display Explanation Main Menu Displays operation mode Operation Main Menu Displays initialize mode Initialize 5 2 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Key sequence Display Explanation Select Language Puts the Unit in initialize mode English Select Language display Access Level Displays the Access Level A1 01 Quick Start Ai 012 2 Displays the parameter setting for A1 01 Quick Start 2times i 01 4 Changes the setting to Advanced Advanced Writes the new setting Entry Accepted Access Level Returns to the Access Level display Advanced Level m Setting the Control Mode A1 02 Parameter A1 02 is used to select one of the four control modes This parameter is not initialized by the initialize operation and it cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f VAwith
270. er s rated output current e When saving energy decrease the voltage but do not cause stalling e Setting the Maximum Frequency The maximum frequency can be set from 50 0 to 400 0 Hz Set this parameter in accordance with the motor s maximum rotational speed m Setting Motor Parameters The motor parameters function E2 will all be set automatically when auto tuning is performed so it normally isn t necessary to set them manually Set these parameters manually if auto tuning can t be completed properly These parameters cannot be changed during operation Set the rated current A shown on the motor s nameplate Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f vit with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector E2 01 Motor Rated FLA 0 32to6 40 A 1 90 Quick Start Basic or Advanced 6 9 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Note The setting range is 1096 to 20096 of the Inverter s rated output current The default setting de pends upon the type of Inverter The table shows the default setting for 200 V class 0 4 kW In verters Calculate the rated slip E2 02 from the value shown on the motor s nameplate with the following equa tion and set this value Rated slip rated frequency Hz rated speed r min x number of poles 120 Set the no load current E2 03 at the rated voltage and rated frequency Normally this value isn t shown on the motor s nameplate so it might be
271. erated with a commercial power supply Motor noise however becomes louder when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed 60 Hz Using the Inverter for Special Motors e Pole changing Motor The rated input current of pole changing motors differs from that of standard motors Select therefore an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used Before changing the number of poles always make sure that the motor has stopped Otherwise the overvoltage protective or overcurrent protective mechanism will be actuated resulting in an error e Submersible Motor The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors Therefore always select an Inverter by checking its rated output current When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long use a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction e Explosion proof Motor When an explosion proof motor or increased safety type motor is to be used it must be subject to an explosion proof test in conjunction with the Inverter This is also applicable when an existing explosion proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter Since the Inverter itself is however not explosion proof always install it in a safe place e Gearmotor The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer In particular continuous oper
272. erload is detected earlier than the motor overload fault OL2 set the carrier frequency to a lower value 6 62 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 400 V class 3G3FV AL E AL English model 3G3FV A CU 3G3FV A CE Inverter Japanese model EN approved model capacity Default Reduction in Reduction in Default Reduction in Reduction in setting rating at rating at setting rating at rating at 10 kHz 15 kHz 10 kHz 15 kHz 0 4t0 5 5 kW 15 0 kHz 15 0 kHz 7 5 kW 12 5 kHz 12 5 kHz 11 kW 12 5 kHz 15 0 kHz 15 18 5 kW 12 5 kHz 10 0 kHz 22 kW 10 0 kHz 8 0 kHz 30 kW 10 0 kHz 8 0 kHz 37 kW 10 0 kHz 6 0 kHz 45 kW 7 0 kHz 6 0 kHz 55 to 160kW 6 0 kHz 6 0 kHz 185 to 300 kW 2 5 kHz 6 63 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 6 5 4 Reference Parameters d m Setting the Frequency Reference Function d2 The frequency reference function sets the output frequency upper and lower limits When the frequency reference is zero and a run command is input the motor operates at the frequency reference lower limit d2 02 The motor will not operate however if the lower limit is set lower than the minimum output frequency E1 09 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V A with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Ref Upper Limit Basic or Advanced Ref Lower Limit Basic or Advanced
273. erspeed fault occurs they cannot be changed during operation Parameter F1 03 sets the stopping method that is used when an overspeed fault occurs Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f Vf with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector F103 PGOverspeedSel 0t03 1 B 7 B Note B Basic or Advanced Not applicable Settings Setting Function Ramp to Stop Deceleration stop using deceleration time 1 C1 02 Coast to Stop Free run stop Fast Stop Emergency stop using the fast stop time C1 09 Alarm Only Continue operation Display OS and continue control Parameter F1 08 sets the overspeed detection level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency Parameter F1 09 sets the length of time that the motor speed must exceed the overspeed detection level in order to generate an overspeed fault Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f Vf with Open Loop Flux Control PG Vector Vector PG Overspd Level 0 to 120 PG Overspd Time 0 0 to 2 0 Note A Advanced Not applicable e PG Speed Deviation Settings F1 04 F1 10 and F1 11 PG speed deviation refers to the difference between the actual motor speed and the reference com mand speed These parameters set the conditions for a PG speed deviation fault and the stopping method that is used when a
274. erter capacity OH Heatsink Over tmp The temperature of the Inverter s cooling fins exceeded the setting in L8 02 or 105 C e The ambient temperature is too high Install a cooling unit e There is a heat source nearby Remove the heat source e The Inverter s cooling fan has stopped Replace the cooling fan Contact your OMRON representative e High carrier frequency 400V class models Decrease the C6 01 setting RH Dyn Brk Resistor The braking resistor is overheated and the protection function set with L8 01 has operated e The deceleration time is too short and the regen erative energy from the motor is too large Lighten the load increase the deceleration time or reduce the motor speed Change to a Braking Resistor Unit RR Dyn Brk Transistr The braking transistor is not operating properly Try turning the power supply off and on Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to oc cur OL1 Motor Overloaded The motor overload protection function has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value e The load is too large The acceleration time decel eration time and cycle time are too short Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceleration and cycle times e The V f characteristics voltage is too high Check the V f characteristics e The motor s rated current setting E2 01 is incor
275. erter is stopped input the run command with the acceleration deceleration ramp hold input ON Note 2 When d4 01 is set to 0 the output frequency will be held at zero if the run command is input with the acceleration deceleration ramp hold input ON Note 3 Select and set one of the following functions for multi function input Do not set more than one of them otherwise a setting error OPE3 will result Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold Setting A UP and DOWN Commands Settings 10 and 11 e Trim Control Increase and Decrease Settings 1C and 1D e Analog Frequency Reference Sample Hold Setting 1E e OH2 Alarm Signal Setting B OFF Normal operation ON Normal operation The warning message OH2 will be displayed on the Digital Operator e With this setting a temperature sensor can be connected to the multi function input to display a warn ing message when the temperature rises too high e The message OH2 will be displayed on the Digital Operator while the multi function input is ON and the display will revert to its previous status when the input is turned OFF It isn t necessary to reset the alarm e The Inverter will continue operation without detecting a fault e Terminal 16 Enable Setting C Disables the multi function analog input terminal 16 Enables the multi function analog input terminal 16 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e With this setting the multi function input can be
276. es It will be possible to change the initialize mode parameters again when the password is written to A1 04 3 21 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif Vit Open Loop Flux Control with PG Vector Vector Enter Password 0000 to Quick start Basic or Advanced 9999 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit Vit Open Loop Flux Control with PG Vector Vector Select Password 0000 to Quick start Basic or Advanced 9999 Password Setting Example The following example shows how to set the password to 1000 Key sequence Display Explanation fon Pain PMenu d Displays operation mode Displays initialize mode Puts the Unit in initialize mode Select Language display 4 times ud Displays the Enter Password display ERU Fu pu Press and hold the Reset Key and then press the Li i Menu Key to display A1 05 Selects the parameter so that the leading 0 flashes The digit that can be changed flashes Changes the password to 1000 a Writes the new setting Returns to the Select Password display A1 05 Returns to the Enter Password display A1 04 m User Parameters Parameters A2 01 through A2 32 specify the parameters that can be displayed and changed when the access level parameter A1 01 is set to 1 Par
277. es e Press the Enter Key to set read the parameters in each mode Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 e Press the Escape Key to return to the mode display from the parameter display Al modes parameters satus MENU e Operation mode e Initialize mode e Programming mode A e Auto tuning mode see note 1 A e Modified constants mode ESC ESC ESC Power ON Monitor Frequency reference value Operator display language selection Frequency reference input method selection see note 2 Auto tuning Rated voltage setting Display parameters changed from factory settings Note 1 Auto tuning mode will be displayed only when vector control mode has been selected The factory setting is for open loop vector control Note 2 The actual display depends on the parameter access level setting A1 01 3 4 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 m Parameter Access Level The SYSDRIVE 3G3FV s has three access levels which divide the various parameters based on their usage as shown below The access level restricts which parameters can be set or displayed Quick start Allows setting reading of parameters required for test runs factory set Basic
278. et as 100 level1 V f control Inverter rated output Torq Det 1 current is set as 10096 Lvl 7 48 Parameter Lists Name Display name Torque detection time 1 Torq Det 1 Time Description Sets the torque detection time in 1 second units Setting range Default setting Control mode Chapter 7 Vif control Vif Open with loop PG vector Flux vector Torque detection selection 2 Torq Det 2 Sel Torque detection level 2 Torq Det 2 Lvl Torque detection time 2 Torq Det 2 Time Setting procedure is the same as for Torque detection selection 1 L6 01 to L6 03 The following outputs are possible Torque detection selection 1 Multi function output Torque detection selection 1 NO NC Torque detection selection 2 Multi function output Torque detection selection 2 NO NC Torque Limit L7 Name Display name Forward torque limit Torq Limit Fwd Reverse torque limit Torq Limit Rev Forward re generative torque limit Torq Lmt Fwd Rgn Reverse re generative torque limit Torq Lmt Rev Rgn Description Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque Four individual regions can be set Output torque Forward side L7 01 Reverse L7 04 Regenerative state Regenerative state L7
279. eters cannot be changed during operation Note When using the zero servo function for an extended period of time limit the load to a maximum of 50 of the Inverter s rated output current If a high holding strength is required of the zero servo 6 19 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 position lock for a long time select an Inverter with a capacity one rank higher than the capacity of the motor Factor of 4 By counting the rising and falling edges of phase A and phase B this method has four times the resolution of the PG 1 pulse i Phase B Com 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 6 3 4 Torque Control Torque Control Function Settings With flux vector control the motor s output torque can be controlled by a torque reference from an ana log input Set parameter d5 01 to 1 to select torque control This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control d5 01 Torq Control Sel_ 0or1 0 Notapplicable Advanced Settings Speed control controlled by C5 01 through C5 07 Torque control The following block diagram shows the operation of torque control Torque reference Torque reference primary delay filter 7 Internal torque reference d5 02 Torque limit Torque compensation bias L7 01 to L7 04 Speed limit
280. eters depending on the Inverter s capacity a 0 4 to 1 5 kW V f pattern a 2 2 to 45 kW V f pattern and a 55 kW V f pattern Note 3 The characteristics for these patterns are shown in the diagrams on the following pages The voltages in these graphs are for 200 V class Inverters Double the voltage for 400 V class Inverters 5 24 Basic Operation Chapter 5 V f Patterns 0 4 to 1 5 kW General purpose Characteristics Settings 0 to 3 Setting 0 Setting 1 Setting 2 50 60 Hz Setting 5 Setting E 60 180 Hz Note The voltages above are for 200 V class Inverters Double the voltages for 400 V class Inverters 5 25 Basic Operation Chapter 5 V f Patterns 2 2 to 45 kW General purpose Characteristics Settings 0 to 3 Setting 0 Setting 1 Setting 2 50 60 Hz Hz 60 72 Setting C Setting E 7 A o M 0153 Hz 60 180 Note The voltages above are for 200 V class Inverters Double the voltages for 400 V class Inverters 5 26 Basic Operation Chapter 5 V f Patterns 55 to 300 kW General purpose Characteristics Settings 0 to 3 Setting 0 Setting 1 Setting 2 12 50 60 Hz Setting 5 01325 50 Hz High speed Operation Settings C to E Setting C Setting d Setting E 124 erf NE m 0153 Hg 60 90 Hz 60 180 Note The voltages above are for 200 V class Inverters Double the voltages for
281. ettings Description The calculation of magnetic flux in open loop vector control is based on the output frequency after slip compensation The calculation of magnetic flux in open loop vector control is based on the output frequency with the V f characteristic i e the value without slip compensation Note Set the parameter to 1 if the speed of the motor is unstable in the constant output area 6 1 5 Operation for Saturated Output Voltage Previously the accuracy of motor speed for vector control was greatly reduced when the limit of the Inverter s voltage output was approached a voltage greater than that of the input power supply cannot be output Set the following parameter to control the output voltage so that the limit will not be reached thus maintaining speed accuracy Parameter Display Setting Default Valid access levels number name range setting Vit Zi um Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector C3 06 Output V Advanced limit Settings Description Disabled There is no limit of output voltage saturation Slip compensation is disabled when the output voltage saturates Enabled Output voltage saturation is suppressed to maintain speed control Note 1 Set the parameter to 1 if accuracy of speed is required within the rated rpm range This will cause an increase of approximately 10 in the output current Therefore be sure that Invert er has more than sufficient output current
282. f Fout Agree 1 Frequency reference 7 Output frequency or motor speed EARS PE Multi function output setting 13 Fref Fout Agree 2 Fref Set Agree 1 Fref Set Agree 2 L4 02 Output frequency or motor speed Fref Set je Multi function output setting 3 L4 04 Output frequency or motor speed Fref Set Agree 2 SEF Multi function output setting 14 Frequency Detection Frequency Detection 1 Frequency Detection 3 L4 02 Output frequency or motor speed L4 01 t EE 14 02 Freq Detection 1 ON OFF _ Multi function output setting 4 L4 04 Output frequency or motor speed L4 03 t Freq Detection 3 ON OFF Multi function output setting 15 Frequency Detection 2 Frequency Detection 4 L4 02 Output frequency or motor speed Freq Detection 2 OFF ON L4 04 Output frequency or motor speed mE Nor L4 03 Freq Detection 4 OFF ON Multi function output setting 5 Multi function output setting 16 6 105 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 m Fault Restart Settings L5 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector L5 01 Num of Restarts 0to 10 o Basicor Advanced Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation N C
283. f the result is negative the zero limit is imposed and there is no rotation in reverse Output Rev Enable reverse Sel If the result is negative rotation in reverse occurs in accordance with the result Note The zero limit is imposed if reverse operation is dis abled in b1 04 Feedback Selects the method used to loss detect that feedback has been detection lost during PID control selection 0 Disable feedback loss detection 1 Enable feedback loss detection Continue operation Alarm Enable feedback loss detection Stop output Protective operation Feedback Sets the detection level used loss when feedback loss detection detection has been enabled level Set as a percentage of the Fb los Det feedback value that is produced Lvl at the maximum frequency Fb los Det Sel Feedback Sets the detection time used loss when feedback loss detection detection has been enabled time Note Feedback loss is detected if the feedback value is Fb los Det below the level set in Time b5 13 for longer than the detection time set here 7 10 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 m Reference Hold b6 Name Display name Dwell frequency at start Start Dwell Ref Dwell time at start Dwell Time Start Dwell frequency at stop Dwell Ref Stop Dwell time at stop Dwell Time Stop Description Note The dwell f
284. following diagram shows the relationship between the output torque and each torque limit Output torque Forward direction Forward torque limit Regenerative torque limit Reverse Forward Regenerative torque limit Reverse torque limit Reverse direction Note 1 When the forward torque limit has been set the analog input signal acts as the limit value for torque generated in the forward direction The torque limit input is effective when torque is generated in the forward direction even if the motor is operating in reverse regenerative torque Note 2 The torque limit is 100 of the motor s rated torque when the analog input is at its maximum value 10 V or 20 mA To increase the torque limit above 10095 set the input terminal s gain above 100 For example a gain of 150 096 would result in a torque limit of 150 of the mo tor s rated torque with a 10 V or 20 mA analog input 6 1 3 Adjusting Speed Feedback With open loop vector control internal Inverter data is used to calculate the feedback value The gain of this automatic frequency regulator AFR operation can be fine tuned according to motor response Normally it isn t necessary to change the default setting Parameter number Parameter number Note 1 The default settings do not normally need to be changed Display name AFR Gain Display name AFR Time Setting range 0 00 to 10 00 Setting range 0 to 2000
285. for 91 03 is Hz 1 d1 02 Frequency The frequency reference when 0 00 OK Q Q Q Q 5 10 reference 2 the multi function input multi step speed reference 1 Preset Reference S on 2 d1 03 Frequency The frequency reference when 0 00 OK Q Q Q Q 5 10 reference 3 the multi function input multi step speed reference 2 Preset Reference S ON 3 di 04 Frequency The frequency reference when 0 00 OK Q Q Q Q 5 10 reference 4 the multi function input multi step speed reference 1 Preset m Reference ee 4 di 05 Frequency The frequency reference when 0 00 OK B B B B 5 10 reference 5 the multi function input multi step speed reference 3 Preset Reference S ON 5 d1 06 Frequency The frequency reference when 0 00 OK B B B B 5 10 reference 6 the multi function input multi step speed reference 1 Preset Reference Sts ON 6 di 07 Frequency The frequency reference when 0 00 OK B B B B 5 10 reference 7 the multi function input multi step speed reference 2 Preset 1 Reference SISON 7 d1 08 Frequency The frequency reference when 0 00 OK B B B B 5 10 reference 8 the multi function input multi step speed reference 1 Preset 1 Reference 2 3 is ON 8 d1 09 Jog The reference frequency when 6 00 OK Q Q Q Q 5 10 frequency the multi function inputs Jog reference reference
286. for Operation Chapter 3 Conditions for Monitoring The following tables show the items that can be monitored in operation mode The table s Valid access levels column indicates whether an item can be monitored in a particular access level and control mode The codes in this column have the following meanings Q These items can be monitored in all access levels Quick start Basic and Advanced B These items can be monitored in the Basic and Advanced access levels A These items can be monitored in the Advanced access level only X These items cannot be monitored in the control mode shown The output signal levels for multi function analog outputs shown in the table are for a gain of 100 0 and a bias of 0 00 Status Monitor Display Frequency Ref Function Monitors sets the frequency reference value The display units can be set with param eter 01 01 Output signal levels for multi function analog outputs 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible Valid access levels Vit Vif w PG Open Vec tor Flux Vec tor Output Freq Monitors the output frequency The display units can be set with param eter 01 01 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible Output Current Monitors the output current 10 V Rated current 0 to 10 V output Control Method Shows which control mode is set Can t be output Motor Speed Monitors the motor speed
287. function input Integral reset input b5 01 1 3 eke b5 06 Multi function input Integral hold input PID primary delay time constant Integral hold PID output characteris bs 09 UE ETEA tics selection i a OQ mO b5 01 2 4 i b5 09 1 b5 09 0 ZERO j X 1 Lyt PID offset 3 adjustment b5 07 b5 01 1 3 O PID output gain b5 10 U1 37 Derivative time D b5 01 1 2 b5 01 3 4 Reverse direction limit i PID output i reverse b5 11 10996 selection A i 100 b5 01 f anum ciue Multi function input PID control function selection PID control ON OFF Inverter output frequency 6 49 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e PID Control Settings Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector D5 01 PIDMode O0to4 0 Advanced 1 1 j This parameter cannot be changed during operation Set value Contents PID disabled PID enabled Deviation signal is put through derivative control PID enabled Feedback signal is put through derivative control PID enabled Frequency reference and PID control deviation signal are put through derivative control PID enabled Frequency reference and PID control feedback signal are put through derivative control
288. g monitor items Note 4 10 11 12 13 14 25 28 cannot be set 29 to 31 are not used When the 3G3IV PAO12 is used outputs of 10 V are pos sible In this case set H4 07 select multi func tion analog output signal level to 1 When the 3G3IV PAOO6 is used only outputs of 0 to 10 V are possible Setting range Default setting Control mode Chapter 7 Vif control Vif with PG Open loop vector Flux vector Channel 1 output monitor bias AO Ch1 Bias Sets the bias value of channel 1 on the Analog Monitor Card Set as a percentage with 10 V equivalent to 10096 Channel 2 output monitor bias Bias AO Ch2 Sets the bias value of channel 2 on the Analog Monitor Card Set as a percentage with 10 V equivalent to 10096 Channel 1 output selection D0 02 Ch1 Select Selects the function to be set for channel 1 when a Contact Output Card is used The same functions can be set as for multi function outputs H2 01 to H2 03 Channel 2 output selection D0 02 Ch2 Select Selects the function to be set for channel 1 when a Contact Output Card is used The same functions can be set as for multi function outputs H2 01 to H2 03 Digital output selection D0 08 Selection Selects the digital output method for when a Digital Output Card is used 0 8 channels individually 1 Code output binary code
289. g operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Terminal 13 Gain Basic or Advanced Terminal 13 Bias i Basic or Advanced Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Terminal 14 Gain 0 0 to Advanced 1 000 0 Terminal 14 Bias 100 0 Advanced to 100 0 5 7 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Set terminal 16 s gain and bias with H3 06 and H3 07 Both settings can be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting i Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Terminal 16 Gain Basic or Advanced Terminal 16 Bias i Basic or Advanced Gain and Bias Chart Frequency reference Gain Max frequency x it ca Bias Max frequency x 100 ov ov 4 mA 20 mA Note Use the current values shown in parentheses when current input has been selected The first order lag s digital filter can be set for all three analog inputs frequency reference voltage frequency reference current and multi function analog input with parameter H3 12 This setting is effective when there are sudden changes or noise in the analog input signal Responsiveness de creases as the setting inc
290. g the power supply off and on Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to oc cur UV3 MC Answerback A failure occurred in the inrush prevention circuit Try turning the power supply off and on Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to oc cur PF Input Pha Loss The main circuit DC voltage oscillates unusually not when regenerating This fault is detected when L8 05 is set to Enabled e A phase loss occurred in the input power supply e A momentary power interruption occurred e The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose e The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large e The voltage balance between phases is bad Reset the fault after correcting its cause e The main circuit smoothing condenser has ex ceeded its life expectancy Replace the electrolytic condenser Contact your OMRON representative Maintenance Operations Fault Display LF Output Pha Loss Meaning A phase loss occurred at the Inverter s output This fault is detected when L8 07 is set to Enabled Chapter 8 Probable causes and remedies e There is a broken wire in the output cable e There is a broken wire in the motor s winding e The output terminals are loose Reset the fault after correcting its cause e The motor being used has a capacity less than 1096 of the Inverter s maximum motor capacity Check the motor and Inv
291. gain P b5 02 0 3 RL Integral time I b5 03 Chapter 6 Derivative time D b5 05 PI control 0 35 RL PID control 0 6 RL First set the PID control parameters by this method and then make fine adjustments If the viscous friction of the mechanical system is high or if the rigidity is low these set values may not be optimum Making Manual Adjustments Use the following procedure to make adjustments while using PID control and observing the response waveform 1 Set parameter b5 01 to 1 to 4 PID control enabled 2 Increase the proportional gain P b5 02 in the non vibration range 3 Decrease the integral time b5 03 in the non vibration range 4 Decrease the derivative time b5 05 in the non vibration range e Making Fine Adjustments First set the individual PID control parameters and then make fine adjustments Reducing Overshooting If overshooting occurs shorten the derivative time D and lengthen the integral time l Before adjustment Response N After adjustment Time e Rapidly Stabilizing Control Status To rapidly stabilize the control conditions even when overshooting occurs shorten the integral time I and lengthen the derivative time D Response Before adjustment After adjustment Time 6 56 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Reducing Long cycle Vibration If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time I
292. ge and rated frequency Normally this value isn t shown on the motor s nameplate so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer Parameter Display name Setting range Units Default Valid access levels number setting vi v f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Motor Rated Slip 0 00 to 20 00 Advanced Quick Start Basic No Load Current 0 00 to 2 90 or Advanced see note 2 Note 1 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The table shows the default settings for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters Note 2 The setting range is between 0 00 and 0 1 less than the Inverter s rated current Set the number of poles E2 04 shown on the motor s nameplate Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif v f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector E204 NumberofPoles 21048 4 Qf Note Q Quick Start Basic or Advanced Not applicable Set the motor s terminal resistance between U and V V and W or W and U Usually the nameplate of the motor does not provide the motor s terminal resistance Contact the motor manufacturer for a test report on the motor s terminal resistance to set the following values e Type E insulation Motor s terminal resistance Q at 75 C x 0 92 e Type B insulation Motor s terminal resistance Q at 75 C x 0 92 6 32 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e Type
293. gh starting torque 90 Hz Voltage saturation at 60 Hz 120 Hz Voltage saturation at 60 Hz 180 Hz Voltage saturation at 60 Hz High starting Normally it isn t necessary to use these torque patterns because starting torque is ensured by automatic torque boost functions High speed These patterns are for applications that operations must rotate at frequencies greater than 60 Hz A fixed voltage is applied at frequencies greater than 60 Hz m o ooc moo ocnL O N Note 1 Select a high starting torque V f pattern only in the following cases e The wiring distance between the Inverter and motor is relatively large greater than 150 m A large torque is required at startup such as heavy axis loads e An AC or DC reactor is connected to the Inverter s input or output 5 45 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Note 2 The parameter settings for E1 04 through E1 10 will be changed automatically when one of these patterns is selected There are three possible settings for these parameters depending on the Inverter s capacity a 0 4 to 1 5 kW V f pattern a 2 2 to 45 kW V f pattern and a 55 to 300 kW V f pattern Note 3 The characteristics for these patterns are shown in the diagrams on pages 5 25 through 5 27 m Setting a User defined V f Pattern Setting F Parameters E1 04 through E1 10 can be set by the user when E1 03 has been set to F Refer to page 5 28 for details on setting thes
294. gree 2 Detection width in L4 04 Fref Set Agree 2 Detection width in L4 04 Frequency Detection 3 Output frequency lt L4 03 Frequency Detection 4 Output frequency gt L4 03 Torque Detection 1 N C Torque Detection 2 N O Torque Detection 2 N C Reverse Direction Operating in reverse direction Baseblock 2 Motor 2 Selected ON Motor 2 selected Regenerating Restart Enabled Enabled during restart by Auto Restart operation ON During restart Overload OL1 ON when 90 or more than detection level OH Prealarm ON when temperature exceeds L8 02 setting Current Torque Limit Speed Limit Zero Servo End Zero servo function completed During RUN 2 ON when outputting a frequency OFF for baseblock DC braking initial excitation or stopped operation 6 89 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e Parameter Settings The following table shows the setting information for the multi function outputs These parameters can not be changed during operation Parameter number Display name Setting range Terminal 9 Sel Default setting Valid access levels Vit V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Basic or Advanced Terminal 25 Sel Basic or Advanced Terminal 26 Sel Basic or Advanced Note 1 The following table shows the settings and page references for functions that are
295. hapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range setting Vit V f Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector F1 02 PG discon Sets the PG disconnection 0to3 1 NO X B X B 5 31 nection stopping method 5 47 stopping 0 Ramp to stop Deceleration method stop using deceleration time PGO 1 C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast stop Emergency stop using the fast stop time PG Fdbk C1 09 P Loss Sel 3 Continue operation This Setting can t be made with flux vector control F1 03 PG Sets the stopping method when 0 to3 1 NO X B X B 5 31 overspeed an overspeed OS fault occurs 5 48 stopping 0 Ramp to stop Deceleration method stop using deceleration time 1 C1 02 1 Coastto stop 2 Fast stop Emergency stop PG using the fast stop time OverSpeed C1 09 Sel 3 Continue operation This Setting can t be made with flux vector control F1 04 PG speed Sets the stopping method when 0 to 3 3 NO X B X B 5 32 deviation a speed deviation DEV fault 5 48 stopping occurs method 0 Ramp to stop Deceleration stop using deceleration time 1 C1 02 1 Coast to stop PG 2 Fast stop Emergency stop Deviation using the fast stop time Sel C1 09 3 Continue operation DEV is displayed and control continued F1 05 PG rotation 0 Phase A leads with forward 0 1 0 NO X B X B 5 30 setting command Phase B
296. hat it isn t lowered any more than necessary Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif Vif with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector L3 04 StallP Decel Sel 0t03 1 Basicor Advanced Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation Setting Function Disabled Decelerate according to the settings Main circuit over voltage may occur if the deceleration time is too short Enabled Stops deceleration if the main circuit voltage exceeds the over voltage level Decelerate again when voltage recovers Intelligent Decelerate as fast as possible judging from the main circuit voltage Ignore the deceleration time setting Enabled Stall preventive function using a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit e f the parameter is set to 1 the deceleration time will be automatically prolonged without using the braking function i e without using a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit so that the main circuit overvoltage OV will not result e Set the parameter to 0 or 3 when using the braking function i e using a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit otherwise the braking function cannot be used and the deceleration time will not be shortened If 3 is set part of deceleration time will be automatically prolonged to pre vent main circuit overvoltage OV with the braking function a Braking Resistor o
297. he rotational direction is unknown the motor will be decelerated to a stop when this minor fault occurs UV flashing DC Bus Undervolt The main circuit DC voltage is below the undervoltage detection level L2 05 200 V class Approx 190 V 400 V class Approx 380 V e A phase loss occurred with the input power supply e A momentary power interruption occurred e The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose e The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large Reset the fault after correcting its cause OV flashing Overvoltage The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level 200 V class Approx 400 V 400 V class Approx 800 V e The power supply voltage is too high Decrease the voltage so it s within specifica tions Maintenance Operations Minor fault display OH flashing Heatsink Over tmp Meaning The temperature of the Inverter s cooling fins exceeded the setting in L8 02 Chapter 8 Probable causes and remedies e The ambient temperature is too high Install a cooling unit e There is a heat source nearby Remove the heat source e The Inverter s cooling fan has stopped Replace the cooling fan Contact your OMRON representative e High carrier frequency 400V class models Decrease the C6 01 setting OH2 flashing Over Heat 2 An OH2 alarm signal Inverter overheating alarm s
298. he torque limit function is engaged the torque control has priority and motor speed control and compensation will be ignored so the acceleration deceleration times might be lengthened and motor speed might be reduced m Limiting Torque with Analog Inputs The following two analog inputs that can be used to limit torque Multi function analog input terminal 16 Frequency reference current terminal 14 Use either or both of these inputs as needed with parameters H3 05 and H3 09 These parameters can not be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Terminal 16 Sel Oto1F 1F Basic or Advanced Terminal 14 Sel 1to1iF 1F Advanced Settings The following table shows only those settings related to the torque limit function Setting Forward Torque Limit Reverse Torque Limit Regenerative Torque Limit Speed Limit Limits torque in both the forward and reverse directions Set the analog input terminal s signal level gain and bias to match the actual input signal The factory default settings for the input terminal s signal level are as follows e Terminal 16 Oto 10 V A 10 V input limits the torque to 100 of the motor s rated torque e Terminal 14 4 to 20 mA A 20 mA input limits the torque to 100 of the motor s rated torque 6 4 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 The
299. he torque reference input Either the absolute value of the torque limit input or the torque limit parameter setting L7 01 through L7 04 whichever is smaller will be used for the torque limit m Stopping Method When the run command is turned OFF during speed control the motor is decelerated to a stop When the run command is turned OFF during torque control the control mode is automatically switched to speed control and the motor is decelerated to a stop 6 3 6 Torque Limit Function With flux vector control the torque limit can be applied at an arbitrary value because the torque output by the motor is calculated internally The torque limit function is useful when the load cannot sustain a torque above a certain level or regenerative torque above a certain level The two ways to apply a torque limit are listed below The lower torque limit will be used if both of these methods are set 1 Setting a torque limit with the parameters 2 Limiting torque with the analog inputs The precision of the torque limit is 5 at all frequencies 6 28 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 m Setting a Torque Limit with Parameters Torque limits can be set separately for the 4 ways that torque can be applied forward torque reverse torque forward regenerative torque and reverse forward regenerative torque These parameters can not be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range se
300. he value of the sum of the command frequency and the slip com pensation limit does not exceed the speed capacity of the machinery Slip compensation limit E104 o3 03 E1 06 C3 03 The limit is as shown below in the constant torque and constant output areas f E1 06 E1 04 Output frequency E1 06 Maximum voltage frequency E1 04 Maximum output frequency Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit Vif with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector C3 04 SlipComeRegen 0 1 0 Advanced db This parameter cannot be changed during operation Explanation of Set Value Contents Slip compensation disabled during regeneration Slip compensation enabled during regeneration Parameter C3 04 enables or disables slip compensation during regeneration The amount of regenera tion is momentarily increased when this function is used so some control option e g control resistor Control Resistor Unit Braking Unit may be required m Setting the Torque Compensation Function C4 The torque compensation function detects increases in the motor load and increases the output torque to compensate Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit uS zm OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector C4 01 Torq Comp Gain 0 00to Multi 1 00 Advanced 2 50 ple 6 60 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 This parameter can
301. her digits will be displayed 2 times t i Moves the cursor to the third digit RESET Times BE i Sets the last digits to 08 Writes the new setting Returns to the parameter setting for A2 01 Returns to the User Parameters display 2 times Displays the Access Level display Displays the parameter setting for A1 01 2times i ne Changes the setting to User Level Writes the new setting Returns to the Access Level display Returns to the initialize mode display 3 23 Preparing for Operation Note The access level can be set to User Level after at least one parameter has been specified in A2 01 through A2 32 The User Level selection won t appear as an option for parameter A1 01 Chapter 3 unless a parameter has been specified in A2 01 through A2 32 m Initialize Mode Parameter Levels Reference MENU 3 24 Operation mode Initialize mode Program mode Select Language Access Level Control Method Initialize Parameters Enter Password User Parameters A2 01 User Parameter 1 A2 02 User Parameter 2 A2 32 User Parameter 32 These parameters can be displayed and changed only in the Advanced access level Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 3 5 Program Mode
302. hout PG Conventional Inverter control mode Used for multiple drives e V f control with PG Simple speed feedback control e The control characteristics for each mode are shown in the following table Vector control V f control Speed control range Without PG 1 100 With PG 1 1 000 Without PG 1 40 With PG 1 40 Speed control precision 0 2 0 02 2 to 3 0 03 Starting torque 150 at 1 Hz m Auto tuning Function e This function is valid with vector control 150 at 0 Hz 150 at 3 Hz e The motor parameters are set automatically just by entering the motor s rating plate value This fea ture allows flux vector control to operate accurately with virtually any normal AC induction motor regardless of the supplier Torque Control e This function is valid with flux vector control with PG e Torque is controlled by taking multi function analog input signals as torque references e Switching is possible between torque control and speed control m V f Pattern Settings e This function is valid for V f control e Select a V f pattern according to the application from among the 15 preset V f patterns 1 4 Introduction Chapter 1 e Custom V f pattern can be set m Frequency References e The following five types of frequency references can be used to control the output frequency of the Inverter e Numeric input from the Digital Operator e Voltage input within a
303. iate Time 0 0 to 10 0 Note A Advanced Not applicable 5 4 2 Setting the Zero speed Operation Parameters With flux vector control operation is possible even when the frequency reference is zero below the minimum output frequency Parameter E1 09 sets the minimum output frequency and B1 05 sets the operation method around this minimum frequency These parameters cannot be changed during op eration m Selecting the Stopping Method b1 03 Parameter b1 03 sets the stopping method used when a stop command is input Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector b1 03 Stopping Method Oto3 0 Quickstart Basic or Advanced Settings Setting Function Ramp to Stop Deceleration stop Coast to Stop Free run stop DC Injection to Stop DC braking stop This setting can t be made with flux vector control Coast w Timer Free run stop with timer This setting can t be made with flux vector control m Setting the Zero speed Operation Method b1 05 Parameter b1 05 sets the operation method used when the frequency reference is below the minimum output frequency set in E1 09 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f V with OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector b1 05 ZeroSpeedOper 0103 0 Notapplicable Advanced
304. ied on the front cover Not doing so may result in electrical shock Do not damage pull on apply stress to place heavy objects on or pinch the cables Doing so may result in electrical shock Do not touch the rotating parts of the motor under operation Doing so may result in injury Do not modify the product Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product Do not store install or operate the product in the following places Doing so may result in electrical shock fire or damage to the product e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to exposure to combustibles e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration Do not touch the Inverter radiator regenerative resistor or Servomotor while the power is being supplied or soon after the power is turned OFF Doing so may result in a skin burn due to the hot surface Do not conduct a dielectric strength test on any part of the Inverter Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the fol lowing locations Not doing
305. ight side of the of U1 constants in the table on page 3 12 of this manual The setting range is between 1 and 38 but the following num bers cannot be set 4 10 11 13 14 25 28 29 30 31 34 35 e Adjusting the Monitor Output Parameter Display name Setting i Default Valid access levels number range setting vit V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Terminal 21 Gain 0 00 to 2 50 Factor 1 Basic or Advanced Terminal 21 Bias 10 0 to 10 0 Basic or Advanced Terminal 23 Gain 0 00 to 2 50 Factor 0 Basic or Advanced Terminal 23 Bias 10 0 to 10 0 96 Basic or Advanced Note These parameters can be changed during operation e For the output gain set what multiple of 10 V will correspond to a 10096 output of the monitored item e For the output bias set the amount that the output characteristic will be shifted vertically Set this amount as a percentage with 10 V corresponding to 100 Output voltage Gain x 10 V 10V vL 9 0 100 Monitored item e Multi function Analog Output Signal Level Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector H4 07 AO Level Select 0or 0 Basic or Advanced Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation 0 to 10 V Absolute value output 0 to 10 V e This signal level setti
306. ignal was input from a multi function input e Clear the multi function input s overheating alarm input OL3 flashing Overtorque Det 1 There has been a current greater than the setting in L6 02 for longer than the setting in L6 03 Make sure that the settings in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropriate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque OL4 flashing Overtorque Det 2 There has been a current greater than the setting in L6 05 for longer than the setting in L6 06 Make sure that the current setting in L6 05 and time setting in L6 06 are appropriate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque OS flashing Over speed The speed has been greater than the setting in F1 08 for longer than the setting in F1 09 e Overshooting undershooting are occurring Adjust the gain again e The reference speed is too high Check the reference circuit and reference gain e The settings in F1 08 and F1 09 aren t appropriate Check the settings in F1 08 and F1 09 PGO flashing PG open The PG is disconnected The Inverter is outputting a frequency but PG pulses aren t being input e There is a break in the PG wiring Fix the broken disconnected wiring e The PG is wired incorrectly Fix the wiring e Power isn t being supplied to the PG Supply power to the PG properly e The torque limit is se
307. ignal is turned OFF before turning ON the power supply resetting the alarm or switching the LOCAL REMOTE selector Doing so while the RUN signal is turned ON may result in injury Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high Not doing so may result in damage to the product Provide a separate holding brake when necessary Not doing so may result in injury Do not perform a signal check during operation Doing so may result in injury or dam age to the product Do not carelessly change settings Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product Maintenance and Inspection Precautions N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING WARNING N Caution N Caution Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power supply confirming that the CHARGE indicator or status indicators is turned OFF and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover Not doing so may result in electrical shock Maintenance inspection or parts replacement must be performed by authorized personnel Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury Do not attempt to take the Unit apart or repair Doing either of these may result in electrical shock or injury Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements Careless hand
308. ing Unit 3G3IV PCDBR JB The SGSIV PCDBRLI B is used in combination with a Braking Resistor Unit to shorten the motor s decel eration time It is not serviceable at 200 V class 5 kW or 400 V class 15 KW or less e Standard Models Inverter Braking Unit Voltage class Max applicable motor Model Number used capacity kW 200 V class 3G3IV PCDBR2015B 3G3IV PCDBR2015B 3G3IV PCDBR2022B 3G3IV PCDBR2022B 3G3IV PCDBR2015B 3G3IV PCDBR2015B 3G3IV PCDBR2022B 3G3IV PCDBR2022B 3G3IV PCDBR2022B 400 V class 3G3IV PCDBR4030B 3G3IV PCDBR4030B 3G3IV PCDBR4030B 3G3IV PCDBR4045B 3G3IV PCDBR4045B 3G3IV PCDBR4030B 3G3IV PCDBR4045B 3G3IV PCDBR4030B 3G3IV PCDBR4045B 3G3IV PCDBR4045B 3G3IV PCDBR4045B 3G3IV PCDBR4045B oci Bic im jm j co mlm pms N 9 13 Specifications Chapter 9 e Braking Unit Dimensions mm Top Mounting direction 100 min 66 5 100 min Three lead in wire holes 22 dia rubber bushing e Braking Resistor Unit Yaskawa Electric 3G3IV PLKEB The 3G3IV PLKEBL shortens deceleration time by consuming the motor s regenerative energy by means of a resistor Usage rate 1096 ED AMAA SERRA RA Note The usage rate 10 ED means that 10 of the operating
309. ing for A1 02 Changes the setting to Flux Vector Writes the new setting t i R Returns to the Control Method display Initializing the Parameters Use parameter A1 03 to initialize the parameters This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif Open Loop Control Vector Init Parameters Quick start Basic or Advanced Initialize Parameters Settings Setting Function Returns to the Initialize display without initializing any parameters Initializes the parameters to the user settings This function initializes the parameters to values that have been recorded as user settings To record the user settings change the parameters to the desired values and then set parameter 02 03 User Defaults to 1 The 1110 function is disabled when parameter 02 03 is 0 2 wire sequential initialization Initializes the parameters to the factory settings 3 wire sequential initialization e Example of Wiring for 2 wire Sequential Operation Forward rotation Stop Reverse rotation Stop Sequential input common 3 20 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 e Example of Wiring for 3 wire Sequential Operation Stop switch Run switch C Run command Operates when the run switch is closed Stop command Stops when the stop switch is open Forward Reverse rotati
310. ing input simultaneously from both the voltage terminal 13 and the current terminal 14 the final reference value will be the sum of the two references that are input e To switch the frequency reference input between the voltage terminal 13 and the current terminal 14 set a value of 1F in any one of the multi function inputs H1 01 through H1 06 The voltage terminal 13 will be used when this multi function input is OFF and the current terminal 14 will be used when this multi function input is ON e The following diagram shows the location of jumper J1 on a 200 V Class 0 4 kW Unit Jumper wire ra Control circuit terminals A EN B A oo Ls elus e ler feel ende Li Le leo ems p ecc HARGE CHARGE o 9 o m Frequency Reference Terminal 16 Voltage Input H3 04 and H3 05 This function is useful when switching between two analog inputs When using this multi function input terminal 16 as the frequency reference terminal first set the multi function analog input s function to Auxiliary Reference by setting parameter H3 05 to 0 Neither H3 04 nor H3 05 can be changed dur ing operation X 5 6 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector H3 05 Terminal 16 Sel Oto1F 1F Basic or Advance
311. ing set be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1 4 to 20 mA input H3 08 only Note 1 Set the proper signal level for the torque compensation bias that you want to input Note 2 The direction of the torque compensation bias is determined by the sign polarity of the signal that is input It is not determined by the direction of the run command forward reverse Voltage or current Forward torque compensation generally counter clockwise axis side Voltage Reverse torque compensation generally clockwise axis side Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction only forward torque compen sation can be input when the 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal level has been selected If you want to input reverse torque compensation be sure to select the 0 to 10 V signal level 6 25 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Note 3 When supplying a voltage input to the frequency reference current input terminal 14 be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1 on the control board If the jumper wire isn t disconnected the input resistor will be destroyed Refer to page 6 22 for a diagram of the control board e Adjusting the Gain Bias of the Analog Inputs e Adjust the gain and bias for the frequency reference voltage frequency reference current and mul ti function analog inputs according to the input specifications for each input The following parameters can be changed during operation Parameter numb
312. ipheral device design information and peripheral device selection information Chapter 3 Preparing for Operation Describes nomenclature Digital Operator procedures such as key operations for operating and monitoring Inverters and mode contents and configuration Chapter 4 Trial Operation Describes the method for controlling operation through a Digital Operator to perform trial operation of the system Chapter 5 Basic Operation Describes basic Inverter control functions for users not familiar with Inverters The functions that must be understood to drive a motor with an Inverter are described Each of the four control modes of the 3G3FV series Inverters is described in order alone with the settings required for all modes and individual modes Refer to the information for all control modes and then to items required for the control mode you will be using Chapter 6 Advanced Operation Describes all of the functions provided by the Inverter These functions will enable more advanced applications and includes functions that will improve motor control through the Inverter such as responsiveness torque characteristics increasing speed accuracy PID control torque limits torque controls overtorque detection protective functions and other functions Each of the four control modes of the 3G3FV series Inverters is described in order alone with the characteristics of each mode and fountains common to all modes Refer to the information for a
313. is started from the maximum Spd Srch at frequency In a control Start mode with PG the motor starts at the frequency of motor rotation when the run command is input Speed Sets the speed search search operation current as a operation percentage of the Inverter rated current current Note Not usually necessary to Spd Srch set When restarting is not Current possible with the set val ue reduce the value Speed Sets the output frequency search de deceleration time during speed celeration search in 1 second units time Note Set the time for decelera Spd Srch tion from the maximum Dec Time frequency to 0 Hz Note When the control mode is changed the Inverter reverts to default settings The open loop vector control default settings are given above Timer Function b4 Para Name Description Setting Default Chan Control mode Page meter range settin es No Display 9 3 dung Vif Vif Open Flux name opera control with loop vector tion PG vector Timer Sets the timer function output function ON delay time dead band for ON delay the timer function input in time 1 second units Note Enabled when the timer Delay ON function is set for multi Timer function inputs and out puts Timer Sets the timer function output function OFF delay time dead band for OFF delay the timer function input in time 1 second units Note Enabled when the timer De
314. it optional 3 phase 200 VAC r See note 1 s See note 2 Note The DC reactor is built in Note 1 For 200 V class 30 to 75 kW B2300 to B2750 E and 400 V class 55 to 300 kW B4550 to B430K input the control circuit power supply from r s For others create the control power supply internally from the main circuit DC power supply Note 2 The r L1 R and s L2 S terminals are short circuited for shipping 2 19 Installation Chapter 2 e 3G3FV B2750 E eu Su O 9 Tan Braking Unit optional Braking Resistor Unit optional 3 phase 200 VAC 400 VAC r See note 1 s See note 2 Note The DC reactor is built in Note 1 For 200 V class 30 to 75 kW B2300 to B2750 E and 400 V class 55 to 300 kW B4550 E to B430K E input the control circuit power supply from r s For others create the control pow er supply internally from the main circuit DC power supply Note 2 The r L1 R and s L2 S terminals are short circuited for shipping e 3G3FV B4550 to B416K E vy eA Braking Resistor Unit optional Note The DC reactor is built in Note 1 For 200 V class 30 to 75 kW B2300 to B2750 E and 400 V class 55 to 300 kW B4550 E to B430K E input the control circuit power supply from r s For others create the control pow er supply internally from the main circuit DC power supply Note 2 The r L1 R and s s400 L2 S terminals are short circu
315. ited for shipping 2 20 Installation Chapter 2 e 3G3FV B418K E to B430K E 3 phase 200 VAC 400 VAC Note Models of 185 to 300 kW can not use the DC reactor Note 1 For 200 V class 30 to 75 kW B2300 to B2750 E and 400 V class 55 to 300 kW B4550 E to B430K E input the control circuit power supply from r s For others create the control pow er supply internally from the main circuit DC power supply Note 2 The r L1 R and s s400 L2 S terminals are short circuited for shipping 2 21 Installation Chapter 2 m Control Circuit Terminal Connections All Models Forward stop L UN Fault output NO Reverse stop 5 6 Fault output NC Multi function contact input ti O O Multi function contact input 2 O O Multi function contact input 3 O O Multi function contact input 4 O OG Multi function contact input 5 O O Multi function contact input amp O O Sequence input common Fault output common Multi function contact output Multi function contact output common Multi function output 1 Multi function output 2 Frequency reference power supply 15 V Multi function output Frequency reference power supply 15 V common Frequency reference input voltage Multi function analog output 1 Frequency reference input current V Voltmeter Multi function analog output 2 TO Voltmeter Multi function analog output common Multi function analog input Frequency r
316. itor Card DO 02 Setup DO 08 Setup Not Used Do not change these settings PO 36F Setup Parameter settings for a Pulse Monitor Card SI F G Setup Parameter settings for a SYSMAC BUS Interface Card CP 916 Setup Parameter settings for a CompoBus D Communications Card Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Function Comments Control mode V f Open loop Flux w PG Vector Vector Terminal Digital Inputs Function selection for multi function inputs Digital Outputs Function selection for multi function outputs Analog Inputs Adjustment function selection for external analog inputs Analog Outputs Adjustment function selection for multi function analog outputs Serial Com Setup Not Used Do not change this setting Protection Motor Overload Sets electrical thermal functions that protect the motor PwrLoss Ridethru Selects the power loss processing method Stall Prevention Accel Decel stall prevention settings and selection Ref Detection Frequency detection settings and selection Fault Restart Fault restart function settings Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 by current Torque Limit Torque limit function settings Hdwe Protection Hardware overheating and phase loss protection settings Operator Monitor Select Selects the Operator s display and setting methods Key Selections Operator s key function selection and other parameters
317. l Detection method Operation selection Normally open or normally closed Always or During operation only Decelerate to stop Coast to stop Emergency stop or Continue operation Detection method Input level Operation selection N O N C Always During operation Decelerate to stop Fault Coast to stop Fault Emergency stop Fault Continue operation Alarm Note 1 For the input level select whether you want a fault to be detected when the input signal is ON normally open input or OFF normally closed input Note 2 For the detection method select whether you want faults to be detected any time that the In verter is on or only during operation Note 3 For the operation selection select the processing method that you want to be performed when a fault has been detected Decelerate to stop A fault is output and the output stopped in the selected deceleration time Coast to stop A fault is output and the Inverter output is cut off Emergency stop A fault is output and the output stopped in the fast stop time C1 09 Continue operation An alarm is output and operation continues When an alarm is going to be output externally be sure to set one of the multi function outputs H2 to alarm Minor Fault setting 10 e An external fault setting cannot be set in more than one multi function input 6 85 Advanced Operation Cha
318. l operate during auto tuning so be sure that it is safe for the motor to operate before press ing the Run Key The following message will be displayed when the Run Key is pressed Tune Proceeding HZ A Auto tuning takes up to 1 5 minutes The message Tune Successful will be displayed when auto tun ing is completed If auto tuning has been completed successfully press the Menu Key and proceed to the next operation Note To cancel auto tuning after it has been started press the Stop Key to stop the operation and then press the Menu Key to return to Drive Mode m Auto tuning Faults One of the fault messages in the following table will be displayed if a fault occurs during auto tuning In this case determine the cause of the fault correct it and perform auto tuning again The fault display can be cleared by pressing the Menu Key The motor parameters will revert to their default settings if a fault occurs Set these parameters again when auto tuning Fault display Probable cause and remedy Data Invalid There was a fault in the data set during auto tuning Motor setting data fault e There was a fault in the relationship between the rated frequency rated speed and number of poles Change the settings to conform to the following formula Rated speed 120 x Motor frequency Number of poles ALARM Over Load The effective load factor exceeded 2096 during auto tuning Excessive load during auto tuning e A load is connected to
319. lay OFF function is set for multi Timer function inputs and out puts 7 8 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 m PID Control b5 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range setting Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector b5 01 PID control 0 Disabled 0 to 4 0 NO A A A A 6 50 selection 1 Enabled Deviation is D controlled 2 Enabled Feedback value is D controlled 3 Enabled Frequency reference PID control PID Mode deviation is D controlled 4 Enabled Frequency reference PID control feedback value is D controlled b5 02 Proportiona Sets P control proportional gain 0 00 to 1 00 OK A A A A 6 51 gain P as a percentage 25 00 Note P control is not performed PID Gain when the setting is 0 00 b5 03 Integral Sets l control integral time in 0 0 to 1 0 OK A A A A 6 51 time I 1 second units 360 0 Note l control is not performed PID Time when the setting is 0 0 b5 04 Integral Sets the I control limit as a 0 0 to 100 0 OK A A A A 6 51 limit I percentage of the maximum 100 0 PID I Limit frequency b5 05 Differential Sets D control differential time 0 00 to 0 00 OK A A A A 6 51 time D in 1 second units 10 00 Note D control is not performed PID D Time when the setting is 0 00 b5 06 PID limit Sets the limi
320. led Speed search is performed from maximum output frequency and motor is started In control modes with PG i e V f with PG and flux vector motor starts from the motor speed Set 1 to use the speed search function To use speed search freely in control modes without PG i e V f control and open loop vector control set the multi function contact input selection H1 01 to H1 06 to 61 or 62 external search command Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif VA with Open Loop Flux Control PG Vector Vector Spd Srch Current 0 to 200 Ad Advanced vanced Spd Srch Dec 0 1 to Ad Advanced Time 10 0 vanced PwrL Baseblock t 0 0 to Basic or Advanced 0 5 These parameters cannot be changed during operation Note The factory set default varies depending on the Inverter capacity The values shown in the table are for 200 V class 0 4 kW e For the speed search operating current 63 02 set the operating current for the speed search If re starting is not possible with the set value then lower the set value Set the speed search operating current as a percentage of the Inverter s rated output current with the Inverter s rated output current taken as 100 e For the speed search deceleration time b3 03 set the output frequency deceleration time for while the speed search is being performed e When the speed search and DC injection b
321. level for 0 1 0 NO B B B B 6 96 output multi function outputs 1 and 2 signal level terminals 21 23 selection 0 Oto 10 V output 1 Oto 10 V output AO Level Note The optional Analog Mon Select itor Card may also be used with this setting 7 42 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 m Serial Communications Setup H5 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 3 Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Slave Sets the Slave address for Address RS 422 485 communications Serial 00 Communications function Comm Adr disabled Baud rate Selects the baud rate for selection RS 422 485 communications 0 1 200 bps 1 2 400 bps Serial Baud 2 4 800 bbs Rate 3 9 600 bps 4 19 200 bps Parity Selects the parity check selection function for RS 422 485 communications Serial Com 0 No parity Sel 1 Odd parity 2 Even parity Operation Selects the method of operation for commu for when it is detected that the nication communications time has timeover elapsed in RS 422 485 communications 0 Deceleration stop Serial Fault C1 02 Fault Sel 1 Free run stop Fault 2 Fast stop C1 09 Fault 3 Continue Alarm Commu Enables or disables the nications communications timeover timeover function in RS 422 485 detection communications selection 0 Disable Serial Fit 1 Enable Dtct
322. levels number range setting Vif V f with Open Loop Control C3 06 Output V limit 0 1 O Not applicable Settings Description Disabled There is no limit of output voltage saturation Slip compensation is disabled when the output voltage saturates Enabled Output voltage saturation is suppressed to keep the speed constantly Note 1 Set the parameter to 1 if the accuracy of speed is required within the rated rpm range This will cause an increase of approximately 1096 in the output current Therefore be sure that the Inverter has more and sufficient output current Note 2 If the Inverter s input voltage is extremely lower than the rated motor voltage the accuracy of the speed of the motor may not be maintained even with the output voltage suppressed 6 34 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 6 3 9 Selecting Auto tuning Carrier Frequency The auto tuning carrier frequency is by default set to a value higher than that used for conventional models to improve the accuracy of auto tuning The default setting does not normally need to be changed Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f Vif with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector C8 30 Camierinte 0102 2 Not applicable Settings Setting Description The auto tuning carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz The auto tuning carrier frequency is set according to the set value i
323. lid access levels number range setting V f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Display Units Oor1 0 Notapplcable B Note B Basic or Advanced Display Unit Settings Units Hz Units r min 6 31 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Note 1 The setting units for parameters E1 04 E1 06 and E1 09 can be changed Note 2 This function is specific to flux vector control m Setting Motor Parameters The motor parameters function E2 will all be set automatically when auto tuning is performed so it normally isn t necessary to set them manually Set these parameters manually if auto tuning can t be completed properly These parameters cannot be changed during operation Set the rated current A shown on the motor s nameplate Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vf vit with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector E2 01 Motor Rated FLA 0 32to6 40 A 1 90 Quick Start Basic or Advanced Note The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter s rated output current The default setting de pends upon the type of Inverter The table shows the default setting for 200 V class 0 4 kW In verters Calculate the rated slip E2 02 from the value shown on the motor s nameplate with the following equa tion and set this value Rated slip rated frequency Hz rated speed r min x number of poles 120 Set the no load current E2 03 at the rated volta
324. ling may result in malfunction Do not change wiring disconnect connectors the Operator or optional items or replace fans while power is being supplied Doing so may result in injury damage to the product or malfunction Warning Labels Warning labels are pasted on the product as shown in the following illustration Be sure to follow the instructions given there m Warning Labels SYSDRIVE 3C3FV INVERTER 200V CLASS 3PH OFF WARNING Contents of Warning fe BR WARNING UP RBOSTHPSVET HAT BROOM Ud RR BHAR tA C TOERE TEZ pio d5tni4td MEPRUS PEMA DUA REJN ERRETES TER CEE ToT SU May cause injury of electric shock Please follow the instructions in the manual before installation or operation Disconnect all power before opening front cover of unit Wait 1 minute until DC Bus capacitors discharge Use proper grounding techniques Checking Before Unpacking Checking the Product On delivery always check that the delivered product is the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter that you ordered Should you find any problems with the product immediately contact your nearest local sales representative e Checking the Nameplate Inverter model OMRON INVERTER 3G3FV A2001 INPUT AC3PH 200 230V 50 60Hz 1 1A OUTPUT AC3PH 0 230V 0 400Hz 0 8A 0 3kVA LOT NO MASS 0 6kg SER NO PRG FILE NO E179149 INSTALLATIO
325. ll control modes and then to items required for the control mode you will be using Chapter 7 List of Parameters Lists basic information on Inverter parameters as a reference for users already familiar with Inverter operation Parameters are listed in order with the page numbers of further information for easy reference Chapter 8 Maintenance Operations Provides maintenance inspection fault analysis and troubleshooting information required to deal with problems that may occur during operation Chapter 9 Specifications Provides Inverter specifications as well as the specifications and dimensions of peripheral devices Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIAB
326. ls number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control No Load Current 1 20 see Advanced note 3 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V A with Open Loop Flux Control PG Vector Vector Number of Poles Not ap Ad Not applica Ad plicable vanced ble vanced Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit VAwith Open Loop Flux Control PG Vector Vector Term Resistance 0 000 to 9 842 Advanced 65 000 see note 3 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Leak Inductance 18 2 see Not applicable Advanced note 3 The above parameters are used to set the V f characteristics and constants of the second motor Set them like the parameters E2 01 through E2 06 and E1 04 through E1 10 Note 1 If the first motor and second motor are different to each other in maximum frequency setting the higher set value of them will be the set range of the frequency reference Note 2 The upper limit values and default settings are for 200 V class Inverter models Double the values for 400 V class Inverters Note 3 The default settings vary with the Inverter s capacity or a change in the control mode The values for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters are shown Note 4 The setting range is between 10
327. lution to 1 16 384 3G3IV PAI14B Allows 10 to 10 VDC frequency reference inputs with a resolution of 1 8 192 sign Forward and reverse rotation is selected with the polarity of the input voltage Digital Reference Card 3G3IV PDI08 Used to set frequency references in 2 digit BCD or 8 bit binary 3G3FV PDI16H2 Used to set frequency references with 16 or 12 bits switchable A parameter setting can be used to select BCD or binary data The card incorporates a 24 VDC battery 8 mA max Analog Monitor Card 3GSIV PAO08 3G3IV PAO12 Makes it possible to use the analog output of the terminals as control signals The card which has two point 0 to 10 V analog output is used to monitor the output frequency output current output voltage reference or DC voltage of the 3G3FV The 3G3IV PAO08 has an output resolution of 1 256 output voltage of 0 to 10 V and the 3G3IV PAO12 has an output resolution of 1 2 048 output voltage of 0 to 10 V Pulse Monitor Card 3G3IV PPO36F Used to output pulse train signals according to the output frequency of the 3G3FV The pulse train signals can be input to another device such as a frequency meter or counter PG Speed Control Card 3G3FV PPGA2 Used for V f control using the PG at a maximum response frequency of 30 kHz for phase A single pulse input for open collector output Pulse monitor output is incorporated 3G3FV PPGB2 Used for vector co
328. ly setting is not nec delay time essary Adjust when slip com pensation responsiveness is low or speed is not sta bilized Slip Comp When responsiveness is Time low decrease the set val ue When speed is not stabi lized increase the set val ue Slip com Sets the slip compensation limit pensation as a percentage of motor rated limit slip Slip Comp Limit Slip com 0 Disabled pensation 1 Enabled during re Note When the slip compensa generation tion during regeneration function has been acti vated as regeneration ca pacity increases momen Slip Comp tarily it may be necessary Regen to use a braking option braking resistor Braking Resistor Unit or Braking Unit Flux Cal Used to set the flux calculation culation method Normally this setting is Method not required 0 Fluxis calculated based on the output frequency after frequencies using slip compensation etc Flux is calculated based on the output frequency before Flux Select correcting frequencies using slip compensation etc Note Set to 1 when motor rotation becomes unsta ble due to interference using slip compensation 7 15 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range setting Vit Vit Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Selects out Selects the output voltage limit put voltage
329. m Cautions and Warnings NWARNING NWARNING N Caution N Caution N Caution 2 8 Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety A holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety Not doing so may result in injury Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of operation and power interruption Not doing so may result in injury Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clear ances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices Not doing so may result in fire or malfunction Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product Doing so may result in fire or malfunction Do not apply any strong impact Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction Installation Chapter 2 m Direction and Dimensions e Install the Inverter on a vertical surface so that the characters on the nameplate are oriented upward e When installing the Inverter always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dis sipation from the Inverter 7 W 30 mm min 120 mm min Ww Ww Ww 120 mm min 2 m Installation Site e Install the Inverter under the following conditions NEMA1 Type Ambient temperature for operation 10 to 40 C Humidity 9096 RH or less no condensation Open Chassis Type Ambient temperature for operation 10 to 45 C Humidity
330. me Applicable Inverters Previous setting range New setting range Motor leakage inductance All Inverters 096 to 3096 096 to 4096 Motor 2 leakage inductance All Inverters 096 to 3096 096 to 4096 Minimum baseblock time All Inverters 0 0 to 5 0s 0 1 to 5 0s 1 16 Inverter overheat detection pre alarm level All Inverters 50 to 110 C 50 to 130 C Introduction Chapter 1 e New Parameter Default Setting Parameter Parameter name Applicable Previous setting New setting number Inverters range range L2 04 Voltage restart time Inverters of 0 6s 1 0s 55 kW or larger 1 3 4 Software Ver VSG101114 m PG Speed Deviation Detection Function Upgrade F1 04 This function has been changed so that the conditions can be selected for speed deviation DEV detec tion Either of the following two conditions can be selected by means of an F1 04 parameter setting Detect only when the frequency reference matches the output frequency within the range set in L4 02 Detect only when the frequency reference matches the PG feedback speed within the range set in L4 02 1 17 Chapter 2 Installation 2 1 Mounting 2 2 Wiring Installation Chapter 2 2 1 Mounting 2 1 1 Dimensions m 3G3FV A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 3G3FV A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4037 e External Dimensions e Mounting Dimensions Two 5 5 dia Four M5 RSS P
331. ment Stop output after detection Fault Detect overtorque at any time Stop output after detection Fault e When overtorque detection is enabled be sure to set the overtorque detection level L6 02 or L6 05 and the overtorque detection time L6 02 or L6 05 An overtorque condition is detected when the cur rent exceeds the overtorque detection level for longer than the overtorque detection time e The overtorque detection level settings depend on the control mode Open loop or flux vector control Set as a percentage of the motor s rated torque Normal V f or V f with PG control Set as a percentage of the Inverter s rated output current e Any of the following functions can be set in a multi function output H2 01 H2 02 or H2 03 to indicate the fact that an overtorque condition has been detected Setting B Overtorque detection 1 N O Setting 17 Overtorque detection 1 N C Setting 18 Overtorque detection 2 N O Setting 19 Overtorque detection 2 N C 6 107 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Overtorque Detection Timing Chart Motor current Output torque See note See note L6 02 or L6 05 L6 03 L6 03 Overtorque Detection 1 N O or Overtorque Detection 2 N O Note The overtorque detection is cleared when the current drops about 5 of the Inverter s rated cur rent or the motor s rated torque m Hardware Protection Settings L8 Parameter Display name
332. meters again when auto tuning Fault display Probable cause and remedy Data Invalid Motor setting data fault There was a fault in the data set during auto tuning e There was a fault in the relationship between the rated frequency rated speed and number of poles Change the settings to conform to the following formula Rated speed 120 x Motor frequency Number of poles ALARM Over Load Excessive load during auto tuning The effective load factor exceeded 2096 during auto tuning e A load is connected to the motor axis Remove the load e There was a setting fault during auto tuning Check the rated current setting Change if necessary e There is a motor bearing problem Turn the Inverter off and rotate the motor by hand Replace the motor if it doesn t turn smoothly Motor speed Motor speed fault The torque reference value exceeded 100 during auto tuning e There is a broken disconnected motor power wire Check and replace wiring components if necessary e A load is connected to the motor axis Remove the load Accelerate Motor acceleration fault The motor doesn t accelerate within the prescribed time e The torque limit function is operating Initialize the torque limit parameters L7 01 to L7 04 e he acceleration time is too short Increase acceleration time 1 C1 01 e A load is connected to the motor axis Remove the load Rated Slip Rated slip
333. mit Regenerative Torque Limit Torque reference The input limits torque in both the forward and reverse directions during speed control Speed Limit Limits torque in both the forward and reverse directions Set the analog input terminal s signal level gain and bias to match the actual input signal The factory default settings for the input terminal s signal level are as follows e Terminal 16 Oto 10 V A 10 V input limits the torque to 100 of the motor s rated torque e Terminal 14 4 to 20 mA A 20 mA input limits the torque to 100 of the motor s rated torque The following diagram shows the relationship between the output torque and each torque limit Output torque Forward direction Forward torque limit Regenerative torque limit Reverse gt Forward Regenerative torque limit Reverse torque limit Reverse direction Note 1 When the forward torque limit has been set the analog input signal acts as the limit value for torque generated in the forward direction The torque limit input is effective when torque is generated in the forward direction even if the motor is operating in reverse regenerative torque Note 2 The torque limit is 100 of the motor s rated torque when the analog input is at its maximum value 10 V or 20 mA To increase the torque limit above 10095 set the input terminal s gain above 10096 For example a gain of 150 096 would result in a torque limit of 15
334. mmunications error occurred in the CompoBus D Communications Card e Communications cable was broken short cir cuited or wired incorrectly Check wiring of communications cables and correct the fault e Hardware on the Master end is faulty Check the Master and take necessary mea sures e Data was damaged due to noise Change to special communications cables or shielded cables and ground the shields on the Master end or power supply end Separate communications cables from other lines and install a noise filter on the power sup ply e The Optional Card was damaged If wiring is correct and if the problem persists replace the Optional Card 8 11 Maintenance Operations Chapter 8 8 1 3 Operation Errors After the parameters have been set an operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two parameter settings It won t be possible to start the Inverter until the parameters have been set correctly The minor fault output and fault contact output will not operate either When an operation error has occurred refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the errors Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings Display Meaning Incorrect settings OPEO01 Incorrect Inverter e The Inverter capacity setting doesn t match the Unit Contact kVA Selection capacity setting your OMRON representative OPE02 Parame
335. monitor display should not be higher than normal The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally e Periodic Inspection Check the following items during periodic maintenance Before beginning inspection be sure to turn off the power supply Confirm that the LED indicators on the front panel have all turned OFF and then wait until at least one minute or at least three minutes for 30 kW or more has elapsed before beginning the inspection Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off Doing so can result in electric shock Terminal screws should not be loose e There should be no conductive dust or oil mist on the terminal block or inside the Inverter The Inverter s mounting screws should not be loose 8 22 Maintenance Operations Chapter 8 No dirt or dust should be accumulating on the heating fan unit No dust should be accumulating on the vents There should be no abnormalities in the outward appearance The control panel cooling fan should be operating normally Check to be sure that there are no unusual noises or vibration and that the accumulated operating time has not exceeded the specifi cations e Periodic Maintenance of Parts The Inverter is configured of many parts and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use of the Inverter s functions Among the electronic components there are some that require maintenance depending on thei
336. motor operates in the forward direction Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V f with Open Loop Control F105 PG Rotation Sel Oort 0 B JB Note B Basic or Advanced Not applicable PG Rotation Settings Phase A leads with forward command Phase B leads with reverse command Phase B leads with forward command Phase A leads with reverse command Inverter Motor PG encoder Forward rotation in a typical motor The motor output axis rotates in the counter clockwise direction with a forward inverter command Pulse output Setting 0 PhaseA M LS LS L Phase A leading in a typical PG PhaeB T LN LJ 1 Phase A leads when the input axis rotates clockwise sah PhseA 1 L ase d L L l Phase B L 1 PhaseB J LJ LI L m Setting the PG Pulse Output Monitor Division Ratio F1 06 This parameter is effective only when a 3G3FV PPB2 is used it sets the division ratio used when the pulse monitor output is connected to a pulse input device This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif w zn Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector F1 06 PG Output Ratio 001 to 032 101 to 132 Note B Basic or Advanced Not applicable The first digit in the setting 0 or 1 is n and the second two digits 01 to 32 are m The division ratio is c
337. n Chapter 6 e When the power is turned on the frequency reference will appear in the Unit s data display if the de fault settings are being used Any one of the four values monitored at startup frequency reference output frequency output current or the value set in parameter 01 01 can be selected to appear when the power is turned on The value that appears automatically at startup is determined by parameter 01 02 Power On Monitor Setting Function Frequency reference The frequency reference is displayed at start up Output Frequency The output frequency is displayed at start up Output Current The output current is displayed at start up User Monitor The value set in parameter 01 01 is displayed at start up m Key Function Settings Other Settings 02 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Local Remote Key 0 1 1 Basicor Advanced e This parameter enables or disables the LOCAL REMOTE Key the Operation Mode Selector Key on the Digital Operator it cannot be changed during operation Disabled Enabled Pressing the LOCAL REMOTE Key switches control of operation between the Operator and the sources specified in parameters b1 01 and b1 02 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control 02 02 OperStopKey 0 1
338. n analog output m Seven language Digital Operator from Software Ver VSG101113 e Application as a global inverter is enabled by displays in Japanese English French German Italian Spanish or Portuguese e The Digital Operator area utilizes a 16 character x 2 line liquid crystal display Parameter setting items and monitor display can be easily read in any of seven languages to operate the Inverter in a conversa tional style m Harmonic Countermeasures 0 4 to 160 kW Models e DC reactors optional can be connected to 0 4 to 15 kW models e Models of 18 5 to 160 kW have a built in DC reactor m Parameter Hierarchy and Three Types of Access Levels e The 3G3FV has a number of parameters for carrying out the various functions These parameters are classified into hierarchical levels to make them easier to use The levels are as follows from top to bottom Mode Group Function Parameter Level name Contents Classified according to operation Operation mode For operating the Inverter All kinds of monitoring are possible Initialize mode For selecting the language displayed at the Digital Operator setting access levels and initializing Program mode For setting parameters for operation Auto tuning mode For automatic calculation or setting motor parameters Only under the vector control mode Modified constants mode For setting or referencing parameters changes after shipping Group Classified by
339. n parameter C6 01 The auto tuning carrier frequency is set to 5 kHz Note The default setting does not normally need to be changed Adjust the parameter with the parame ter C6 01 set to 0 or 1 if auto tuning cannot be executed 6 35 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 6 A V f Control With PG Feedback This section summarizes the functions that can be used with V f control with PG feed back and provides detailed explanations of the functions that are specific to V f control with PG feedback 6 4 1 Summary of V f Control With PG Feedback Functions An OK in the control mode column indicates that the parameter can be changed in that control mode The functions specific to V f control with PG feedback are marked with a x and described in more detail later in this section Application Function Sequence Settings such as the reference input method Control mode Vif Open loop w PG Vector DC Braking DC braking function settings Speed Search Speed search function settings Delay Timers Timer function settings PID Control PID control settings Reference Hold Accel deceleration time dwell function settings Droop Control Not used Can t be set Energy Saving Multi function input Sets energy saving control by energy saving reference Zero Servo Not used Can t be set Tuning Accel Decel Acceleration deceleration time
340. nal 6 External fault Input terminal 8 e An external fault was input from a multi function in put Reset external fault inputs to the multi function inputs Remove the cause of the external fault CALL SI F G ComCall 8 10 SYSMAC BUS CALL error Only 00 was received since communications were established Only 00 was transmitted since communications were established and the host was ready Note The Inverter waits for the host to be ready Clear this standby state by sending data Correct the program so that data other than 00 is sent first after communications are estab lished Maintenance Operations Minor fault display E 15 SI F G Com Err Meaning SYSMAC BUS communications error An error occurred in the SYSMAC BUS communications line disrupting communications Chapter 8 Probable causes and remedies e The communications line was broken short cir cuited or wired in reverse Check the communications line and correct the trouble e Hardware on the Master end is faulty Check the Master and take necessary mea sures e Communications data was damaged due to noise Use twisted pair cables for communications lines and ground all the shields on the Master end e The Optional Card was damaged If wiring is correct and if the problem persists replace the Optional Card BUS Option Com Err CompoBus D communications error Co
341. nctions are funda mentally different e f a load is connected when auto tuning is performed not only will incorrect motor parameters be re corded but the motor may operate erratically resulting in dangerous conditions such as loads falling from vertical axis motors Never perform auto tuning with a load connected to the motor Required Parameter Settings Enter auto tuning mode and make the following parameter settings Rated Voltage Set the rated voltage VAC shown on the motor s nameplate Rated Current Set the rated current A shown on the motor s nameplate Rated Frequency Set the rated frequency Hz shown on the motor s nameplate Rated Speed Set the rated speed r min shown on the motor s nameplate Number of poles Set the number of poles Motor Selection Select motor 1 For two motor switching control select motor 1 or motor 2 PG Pulses Rev Set the number of A phase or B phase pulses per revolution The following message will appear when the parameters have been set Tuning Ready Press RUN key At this point it is still possible to change the parameter settings by pressing the Increment and Decre ment Keys to display the desired parameter 5 36 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Press the Menu Key to cancel auto tuning The operation mode display will appear m Performing Auto tuning Auto tuning will start if the Run Key is pressed when the Tuning Ready message is being displayed The motor wil
342. nctions for Multi function Inputs 1 to 6 H1 01 to H1 06 The following functions were added to the multi function inputs e Sample hold function for the analog frequency reference setting 1E e PID control integral reset setting 30 m Constant Output Area Settings for Flux Vector Control E1 11 to E1 13 Settings were added to enable controlling V f characteristics to compensate voltage increases caused by motor impedance when special motors such as constant power output motors and machine tool shaft motors are used in the constant output area m Vector Control Adjustment Settings C3 05 C5 08 C8 09 C8 30 Adjustment functions were added for vector control 1 12 Introduction Chapter 1 1 3 2 Software Ver VSG101043 CompoBus D Communications Improved The following functions were added for DeviceNet communications using a CompoBus D Communica tions Card e Network Reference Network Control Support CompoBus D Communications Remote I O A function was added to switch between inputting the Inverter frequency reference and a run command using CompoBus D communications from remote I O The Network Reference Bit can be turned ON and OFF to switch between the method set for the frequency reference selection b1 01 and a fre quency reference from communications In the same way the Network Control Bit can be turned ON and OFF to switch between the method set for the run source selection b1 02 and a run command from comm
343. nd Rated Current Setting E1 02 and E2 01 Set the type of motor being used with the motor selection parameter E1 02 This setting is a reference for the protection functions This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control Et 02 Motor Selection Dto2 O Quickstart Basic or Advanced E1 02 Settings Setting Function Standard fan cooled motor general purpose motor Standard blower cooled motor inverter exclusive motor Special motor special vector control motor Set parameter E2 01 to rated current A shown on the motor s nameplate This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit Vif with Open Loop Control E2 01 Motor Rated FLA 10 to 20096 Note 2 Quick start Basic or Advanced Note 1 The setting range is 10 to 20096 of the Inverter s rated output current Note 2 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter 5 44 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Set parameter E2 04 to the number of poles shown on the motor s nameplate This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting y Zi with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector E2 04 Number of Poles 2 to 48 2 Quick start
344. necessary to contact the motor manufacturer Parameter Display name Setting range Units Default Valid access levels number setting v f V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Motor Rated Slip 0 00 to 20 00 Advanced Quick Start Basic No Load Current 0 00 to 2 90 or Advanced see note 2 Note 1 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The table shows the default settings for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters Note 2 The setting range is between 0 00 and 0 1 less than the Inverter s rated current Set the motor s terminal resistance between U and V V and W or W and U Usually the nameplate of the motor does not provide the motor s terminal resistance Contact the motor manufacturer for a test report on the motor s terminal resistance to set the following values e Type E insulation Motor s terminal resistance Q at 75 C x 0 92 e Type B insulation Motor s terminal resistance Q at 75 C x 0 92 e Type F insulation Motor s terminal resistance Q at 115 C x 0 87 Parameter Displayname Setting range Default Valid access levels number ia seal d setting v f v f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector E2 05 TermResistance 0 000 to 65 000 O 9 842 Advanced Note The default setting deon upon the type of Inverter The table shows the default settings for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters Set the voltage drop caused by the
345. ng applies to analog outputs 1 and 2 terminals 21 and 23 e When the 0 to 10 V signal level is used to output speed values frequency reference output frequen Cy or motor speed positive voltage indicates Inverter output in the forward direction and negative voltage indicates Inverter output in the reverse direction Assuming a bias setting of 0 0 6 96 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e There are some monitor items that are limited to the 0 to 10 V signal range even when the 0 to 10 V signal level has been selected Refer to the table of status monitor items in page 3 12 for details 6 5 8 Protective Functions L Motor Protection Settings L1 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control L1 01 MOL Fault Select Oor1 1 Basicor Advanced Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation Disabled Enabled e This setting enables or disables the motor overload protection function e The rated current setting E2 01 is used as a basis for overload detection e Disable the motor protection function setting 0 when two or more motors are connected to a single Inverter Use another method to provide overload protection separately to each motor such as con necting a thermal relay to the power line of each motor e The motor protection function may not protect a motor when the power supply is turned on and off frequently
346. not be changed during operation Note 2 The default setting depends on the Inverter s capacity The default setting shown in the table is for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter e This setting is valid only when parameter L2 01 is set to 1 6 98 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e Set the power loss ridethrough time in seconds Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit Vif with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector L2 03 PwrL Baseblock t 0 1 to 5 0 Basic or Advanced Note 1 This parameter cannot be changed during operation Note 2 The default setting varies with the Inverter s capacity The setting for 200 V class 0 4 kW In verters is shown e This setting is used with the speed search and DC braking functions e Set the time required for the leakage voltage to dissipate Increase the setting if an overcurrent OC occurs when the speed search or DC braking function starts e This setting is valid for soeed searches performed after a momentary power loss and regular speed searches Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation e Set the time allowed for the normal voltage to be restored after completion of the speed search e For a 200 V class Inverter this is the time in seconds for voltage to be restored from 0 VAC to 200 VAC Fo
347. nput H1 01 through H1 06 Inputting the energy saving command while there is a light load causes the Inverter s output voltage to be reduced and saves energy Turn OFF the energy saving command when a normal load is added Parameter b8 01 determines the Inverter s output voltage when the energy saving command is input Set this value as a percentage of the V f pattern s voltage Parameter L2 04 the voltage recovery time determines the rate at which the output voltage is changed when the energy saving command is turned ON or OFF Parameter b8 02 determines the lower limit frequency for the energy saving function The energy sav ing command is enabled only when the frequency reference is above this lower limit and the motor speed is within the speed agree range 6 37 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Parameters b8 01 and b8 02 cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control Energy Save Gain 0 to 100 80 Advanced Not applicable Energy Save Freq 0 0 to 400 0 a 0 0 Timing Chart Run command OFF ON Energy saving command OFF ON OE NET Frequency reference b8 02 Output frequency Output voltage VH s L2 04 E1 03 to E1 10 setting x Energy Save Gain B8 01 6 4 3 Hunting prevention Function The hunting prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load
348. nputting the energy saving command while there is a light load causes the Inverter s output voltage to be reduced and saves energy Turn OFF the energy saving command when a normal load is added Parameter b8 01 determines the Inverter s output voltage when the energy saving command is input Set this value as a percentage of the V f pattern s voltage Parameter L2 04 the voltage recovery time determines the rate at which the output voltage is changed when the energy saving command is turned ON or OFF Parameter b8 02 determines the lower limit frequency for the energy saving function The energy sav ing command is enabled only when the frequency reference is above this lower limit and the motor speed is within the speed agree range Parameters b8 01 and b8 02 cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default number range setting Vit Control Advanced Valid access levels V f with Open Loop Flux Vector Vector Not applicable Energy Save Gain 0 to 100 80 Energy Save Freq 0 0 to 400 0 a 0 0 6 13 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Timing Chart OFF ON Run command Energy saving command OFF ON Rene ee Frequency reference b8 02 Output frequency Output voltage Jo L2 04 E1 03 to E1 10 setting x Energy Save Gain B8 01 6 2 3 Hunting prevention Function The hunting prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light loa
349. ns Fault Display SC Short Circuit Meaning The Inverter output or load was short circuited Chapter 8 Probable causes and remedies e A short circuit or ground fault occurred at the In verter output A short or ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage worn insulation or a damaged cable Reset the fault after correcting its cause OV Overvoltage The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level 200 V class Approx 400 V 400 V class Approx 800 V e The deceleration time is too short and the regen erative energy from the motor is too large Increase the deceleration time or connect a braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit e A surge is generated when the phase advancer condenser switches Add an AC reactor to the power supply input e The power supply voltage is too high Decrease the voltage so it s within specifica tions UV1 DC Bus Undervolt The main circuit DC voltage is below the undervoltage detection level L2 05 200 V class Approx 190 V 400 V class Approx 380 V e A phase loss occurred with the input power supply e A momentary power interruption occurred e The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose e The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large Reset the fault after correcting its cause UV2 CTL PS Undervolt The control power supply voltage dropped Try turnin
350. nt to input Note 2 The direction of the torque that is output is determined by the sign polarity of the signal that was input It is not determined by the direction of the run command forward reverse Voltage or current Forward torque reference generally counter clockwise axis side Voltage Reverse torque reference generally clockwise axis side Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction only forward torque refer ences can be input when the 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal level has been selected If you want to input reverse torque references be sure to select the 0 to 10 V signal level Note 3 When supplying a voltage input to the frequency reference current input terminal 14 be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1 on the control board If the jumper wire isn t disconnected the input resistor will be destroyed 6 21 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 200 V Class 0 4 kW Inverter Example Jumper wire 4 Control circuit terminals i 2 W T3 Main circuit SERERE ee e s2 n ie de rs Resistor E um ERE crane o 9 Speed Limit Function Settings e This setting selects the speed limit function used when torque control is performed With torque control the motor sometimes rotates at high speed with no load or a light load The speed limit function keeps the motor spee
351. ntrol Vector Vector L3 01 StallP Accel Sel Oto2 1 X Basicor Advanced Note 1 This parameter cannot be changed during operation Note 2 N A Not applicable Setting Function Disabled Accelerate according to the settings Stalls may occur with large loads Enabled Stop acceleration if L3 02 setting is exceeded Accelerate again when current recovers Intelligent Adjust acceleration so that the L3 02 isn t exceeded by much Ignore the acceleration time setting e When setting 1 enabled is selected acceleration is stopped if the motor current exceeds the accel eration stall prevention level Acceleration is started again when the current falls below this level e When setting 2 intelligent is selected acceleration is performed using the the acceleration stall pre vention level as a basis In this case the acceleration time is ignored Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number CE setting Vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Note 1 This parameter cannot be changed during operation Note 2 N A Not applicable e This setting is valid when L3 01 is set to 1 or 2 e There is normally no need to change this setting e Decrease this setting when the motor s capacity is small compared to the Inverter s capacity or stalling occurs when the motor is operated with the default setting The standard target setting is 2 to 3 times the motor s rated current Set this current
352. ntrol using the PG at a maximum response frequency of 30 kHz for phase A phase B inputs for open collector output Pulse monitor output is incorporated 3G3FV PPGD2 Used for V f control using the PG at a maximum response frequency of 300 kHz for phase A single pulse input and RS 422 line driver input Pulse monitor output is incorporated 3G3FV PPGX2 Used for vector control using the PG at a maximum response frequency of 300 kHz for phase A phase B phase Z pulse inputs and RS 422 line driver input Pulse monitor output is incorporated Wired SYSMAC BUS Interface Card 3GSIV PSIG Used to operate via Wired SYSMAC BUS Interface Card communications CompoBus D DeviceNet Communications Card 3G3FV PDRT1 SIN Used to operate via DeviceNet communications Note 1 Use the Digital Reference Card when setting frequencies digitally from a PC s Output Unit or thumbwheel switches Note 2 Use the PG Speed Control Card for speed control with the Pulse Generator PG Recommended Options AC Reactor 3G3IV PUZBAB Descriptions Used if the harmonic currents of the 3G3FV must be suppressed or the capacity of the power supply connected to the 3G3FV is much larger than the capacity of the 3G3FV The AC Reactor improves the power factor of the 3G3FV Input Noise Filter 3G3EV PLNFD 3G3IV PFN Used to eliminate noise coming into the inverter from the power supply
353. nverters A general purpose noise filter will be less effective and may not reduce noise e Calculating the Inverter Input Power Supply Capacity The following formula can generally be used to calculate the input power supply capacity for the Inverter Always select an Inverter with more than sufficient capacity Input power supply capacity kVA Motor output KW Motor efficiency x Inverter efficiency x Inverter input power factor Normal motor efficiency 0 8 Normal inverter efficiency 0 9 Inverter input power factor 0 65 to 0 9 Note The Inverter s input power factor will vary with the impedance of the power supply facilities Use 0 9 when using an AC reactor and 0 65 when not using an AC reactor For the input current divide the input power supply capacity by the input voltage Assuming the Invert er s resistance to overloads to be 150 the calculated value can be multiplied by 1 5 Example for 3 phase 200 V 1 5 x input power supply capacity 4 3 x 200 V Example for single phase 200 V 1 5 x input power supply capacity 200 V m Wiring on the Output Side of Main Circuit e Connecting the Terminal Block to the Load Connect output terminals T1 U T2 V and T3 W to motor lead wires T1 U T2 V and T3 W respectively Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward command Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward com mand 2 30
354. ny form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Never theless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for dam ages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication General Precautions Observe the following precautions when using the SYSDRIVE Inverters and peripheral devices This manual may include illustrations of the product with protective covers removed in order to describe the components of the product in detail Make sure that these protective covers are on the product before use Consult your OMRON representative when using the product after a long period of storage NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution Do not touch the inside of the Inverter Doing so may result in electrical shock Operation maintenance or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the power supply confirming that the CHARGE indicator or status indicators are OFF and after waiting for the time specif
355. o imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establi
356. o set the parameter User numbers that can be set read Parameter Maximum 32 Note It is most effective to set the user setting parame ter to 1 in access level pd A1 01 If set in the Pro Bon 1 to gram mode only parame ters set in access levels A2 01 to A2 32 may be set read 7 A Parameter Lists Chapter 7 7 2 Program Mode Parameter List 7 2 1 Application Group b Operation Sequence Selection b1 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range setting Display Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector b1 01 Frequency Used to set the input method for 0 to 4 1 NO Q Q Q Q 5 4 Reference the reference frequency 5 8 Selection 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminals analog inputs 2 Not used Do not set this Reference value Source 3 Optional Card 4 Not used Do not set this value b1 02 Run Source Used to set the source of the 0 to 4 1 NO Q Q Q Q 5 10 Selection run command 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminals sequence inputs 2 Notused Do not set this Run Source value 3 Optional Card 4 Not used Do not set this value b1 03 Stopping Used to set the stopping 0103 0 NO Q Q Q Q 5 13 Method method used when a stop Selection command is input 0 Ramp to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 DC braking stop Stops faster than coast to stop without regene
357. o the Digital Operator The cable length can be either 1 or 3 meters e Standard Models 3G3FV PCN125 3G3FV PCN325 Cable length Cable length 1 meter 3 meters e DC Reactor Yaskawa Electric 3G3HV PUZDABLJAL MH This DC Reactor is used for controlling harmonic current generated by the Inverter It is more effective than an AC reactor and can be used in conjunction It is intended for use with Inverters of 15 kW or less It is built into Inverters of 18 5 kW and over e Standard Models Inverter DC Reactor Voltage class Maximum applicable motor capacity kW 0 4 0 75 5 4A8MH 3G3IV PUZDAB 1 5 to 3 7 18A3MH 5 5 7 5 36A1MH 11 15 72A0 5MH Rated voltage V 800 VDC Rated current A Inductance mH Loss W 9 18 0 4 0 75 3 2A28MH 1 5 2 2 5 7A11MH 3 7 12A6 3MH 5 5 7 5 23A3 6MH 11 15 33A1 9MH 800 VDC Specifications Chapter 9 e External Dimensions mm Figure 1 Figure 2 2 screw d2 D2 max on E wi Lo 2 mounting hole W h nn Screw d1 ANS ES 4 mounting hole cp mcr pee Le AS BL L Wt j i Screw d1 WwW 3G3HV Figure Dimensions mm PUZDAB D
358. oFF 0 Basic or Advanced e Do not change this parameter setting it is used by the manufacturer to identify the Inverter model e The setting range and default setting depend on the Inverter capacity The settings shown in the table are for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number ee d setting Vif V f with OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector o205 OpeaorMOPR 01 Jo Advanced O O O e This parameter determines whether it is necessary to press the Enter Key when changing the frequen cy reference with the Digital Operator s frequency reference monitor it cannot be changed during op eration e When 02 05 is set to 1 Enter Key input not required the frequency reference changes simulta neously with the Digital Operator s value Enter Key input required Enter Key input not required Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control 9206 Oper Detection Oori 0 Advanced e This parameter specifies whether to stop operation when the Digital Operator is disconnected it can not be changed during operation Disable Operator detection Continue operation when the Digital Operator is disconnected Enable Operator detection Detect an OPR fault when the Digital Operator is disconnected stop the Inverter output and operate the fault contact Parameter Display
359. of PG pulses F1 01 Number of gear teeth 1 F1 12 Motor speed r min Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f Vf with Open Loop Flux Control PG Vector Vector PG Gear Teeth1 0 to 1 000 PG Gear Teeth2 0 to 1 000 5 46 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Note 1 A Advanced Not applicable Note 2 These parameters cannot be changed during operation Note 3 A gear ratio of 1 F1 12 F1 13 1 will be used if either of these parameters is set to 0 m Selecting Integral Operation During Acceleration Deceleration F1 07 When V f control with PG feedback is used integral control during acceleration and deceleration can be enabled or disabled with F1 07 This parameter cannot be changed during operation Set F1 07 to 1 integral control enabled if you want to keep the motor speed as close to the frequency reference as possible during acceleration and deceleration Set F1 07 to 0 integral control disabled if you want to prevent the occurrence overshooting undershooting Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Ft 097 PGRampPMSe oort Jo fe TB fm Note A Basic or Advanced Not applicable Disabled The integral function isn t used while accelerating or decelerating it is used at constant speeds Enabled The in
360. oft start The display shows the frequency without the correction from compensation functions such as slip compensation 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible ASR Input Monitors the input to the speed control loop The max frequency corresponds to 10095 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible ASR Output Monitors the output from the speed con trol loop The motor s rated current corre sponds to 100 10 V Rated current 0 to 10 V possible Speed Deviation Monitors the speed deviation within the speed control loop The max frequency corresponds to 100 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible PID Feedback Monitors the feedback value when PID control is used The input for the max frequency corresponds to 100 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible 3 13 Preparing for Operation Display DI 16 Reference Function Monitors the reference value from a 3GSFV PDI6H2 Digital Command Card The value will be displayed in binary or BCD depending on parameter F3 01 Output signal levels for multi function analog outputs Can t be output Chapter 3 Valid access levels Vit V f Open Flux w PG Vec Vec tor tor Voltage Ref Vq Monitors the Inverter s internal voltage reference value for the motor s secon dary current control 10 V 200 400 VAC 0 to 10 V possible Voltage Ref Vd
361. ol Vector Vector m mm qe p poo ee Selection Explanation of Settings Setting Description Note F indicates the output frequency Hz For example if 0 1F is set when the output frequency is 60 Hz there will be an output of 60 pulses per minute Duty 50 6 73 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 m Setting a Wired SYSMAC BUS Interface Card F8 When using a 3G3IV PSIG Wired SYSMAC BUS Interface Card set the following parameter in order to specify the operation of the Inverter for communications failures Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V f with Open Loop Control F8 01 Ef5DetSel 0103 tf BasicorAdvaned Set the parameter according to the application Setting Description Inverter s status Fault output Deceleration 2 Decelerates to a stop with C1 02 set Coast to a stop Emergency stop time Decelerates to a stop according to the C1 09 setting Continuous operation See note Note If the parameter is set to 3 the Inverter will operate without references from the host controller Take necessary measures such as emergency stop measures to ensure safety m Setting a CompoBus D Communications Card F9 When using a 3G3FV PDRT1 SIN CompoBus D Communications Card make the communications settings with the following parameters e Setting Communications External Fault Input Se
362. ommand is cleared the voltage will be restored in the voltage recovery time set in L2 04 Run Stop command OFF ON Baseblock command Input Cleared Frequency reference 3 The retained output frequency i is output in a step pattern Output frequency Coasting e Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold Setting A OFF Normal operation or restart acceleration deceleration ON Pause acceleration deceleration and maintain the present frequency e With this setting the multi function input pauses acceleration or deceleration and maintains holds the output frequency e Acceleration deceleration is restarted when the acceleration deceleration ramp hold input is turned OFF e The motor will be stopped if a stop command is input while the acceleration deceleration ramp hold input is ON 6 79 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e When parameter d4 01 the frequency reference hold function selector is set to 1 the held frequency will be stored in memory This stored frequency will be retained even after a power interruption and the motor will be restarted at this frequency when a run command is input again Run Stop command OFF ON OFF ON Acceleration deceleration OFF oN OFF ON ramp hold E Frequency reference Output frequency Hold Hold Note 1 When d4 01 is set to 1 the held output frequency will be retained To operate at this frequency even after the Inv
363. on analog item to be output U1 00 from output 1 terminal 21 selection Note Settings 4 10 11 12 13 terminal 21 14 25 28 34 and 35 Terminal 21 cannot be set and 29 to Sel 31 are not used H4 02 Gain Sets the multi function analog 0 00 to 1 00 OK B B B B 6 96 terminal 21 output 1 voltage level gain 2 50 Sets whether the monitor item Terminal 21 output will be output in multiples Gain of 10 V H4 03 Bias Sets the multi function analog 10 0 0 0 OK B B B B 6 96 terminal 21 output 1 voltage level bias to Sets output characteristic 10 0 Terminal 21 up down parallel movement as Bias a percentage of 10 V H4 04 Multi func Sets the number of the monitor 1to38 3 NO B B B B 6 95 tion analog item to be output U1 00 from output 2 terminal 23 selection Note Settings 4 10 11 12 13 terminal 23 14 25 28 34 and 35 Terminal 23 cannot be set and 29 to Sel 31 are not used H4 05 Gain Sets the multi function analog 0 00 to 0 50 OK B B B B 6 96 terminal 23 output 2 voltage level gain 2 50 Sets whether the monitor item Terminal 23 output will be output in multiples Gain of 10 V H4 06 Bias Sets the multi function analog 10 0 0 0 OK B B B B 6 96 terminal 23 output 2 voltage level bias to Sets output characteristic 10 0 Terminal 23 up down parallel movement as Bias a percentage of 10 V H4 07 Analog Sets the signal output
364. on command Multi function input 3 Q Sequential input common Note 1 The default settings of the multi function inputs are different from the default settings of the 2 wire sequence Note 2 When setting a 3 wire sequence the operation can be started and stopped with an automati cally resetting pushbutton switch Initialization Example The following example shows how to initialize parameters with the 2 wire sequence factory settings Key sequence Display Explanation E cb Displays operation mode Displays initialize mode Puts the Unit in initialize mode Select Language display Displays the Initialize display tl DI 5 Displays the parameter setting for A1 03 Changes the setting to 2 wire Initialization Writes the new setting i i R Returns to the Initialize display m Write protect Passwords Use parameters A1 04 and A1 05 to write protect the initialize mode parameters Parameters A1 01 through A1 03 and A2 01 through A2 32 can be displayed but not changed if the contents of A1 04 and A1 05 don t match These parameters cannot be changed during operation To write protect the initialize mode parameters set the password in A1 05 after inputting the desired values in A1 01 through A1 03 and A2 01 through A2 32 Parameter A1 05 can be displayed by dis playing A1 04 and pressing the Menu Key while pressing the Reset Key A1 05 can t be displayed with the usual key sequenc
365. onnection or short circuiting when the feedback voltage drops suddenly Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector b5 12 FblosDetSel 0t02 0 Advanced 1 1 1 j 6 53 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Explanation of Settings Set value Contents Feedback loss detection disabled Feedback loss detection enabled The Inverter will continue operating with a warning output turned ON Feedback loss detection enabled The Inverter s protective function shuts off the output e Set this parameter to disable or enable the feedback loss detection function and to specify the opera tion of the Inverter after the loss of the feedback signal is detected e Feedback loss will be detected if the Inverter receives feedback values lower than the feedback loss detection level set with b5 13 for the time set with b5 14 e The loss of the feedback can be checked with the following output If 1 warning is set Multi function contact output or multi function 1 2 output will turn ON as an alarm setting 10 If 2 protective function is set The fault contact output will turn ON Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Bb loss Det Lvl 0 to 100 Advanced Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number
366. onnection terminal 3 4 3 See note 1 See note 1 Cooling fan power me supply input terminal See notes 2 3 See notes 2 3 Ground the terminal at a resistance of less than 10 Q Note 1 Don t connect a DC power supply Otherwise equipment trouble may occur Note 2 These are the cooling fan power supply and control circuit power supply input terminals Note 3 When 200 V is used input 200 to 230 VAC from r s200 When 400 V is used input 380 to 460 VAC from r s400 m Control Circuit Terminals for All 3G3FV Models Function Signal level Forward Stop Forward at ON Stops at OFF Photocoupler Reverse Stop Reverse at ON Stops at OFF 24 VDC 8 mA Multi function contact input 1 Set by parameter H1 01 external fault a Multi function contact input 2 Set by parameter H1 02 fault reset Multi function contact input 3 Set by parameter H1 03 multi step refer ence 1 Multi function contact input 4 Set by parameter H1 04 multi step refer ence 2 Multi function contact input 5 Set by parameter H1 05 jog frequency ref erence Multi function contact input 6 Set by parameter H1 06 external base block N O Sequence input common Common for 1 to 8 2 16 Installation Frequency reference power supply 15 VDC Function 15 VDC power supply for frequency refer ence Chapter 2 Signal level 15 VDC 10 20 mA m
367. ontrol Step Response This section explains how to adjust PID control parameters while observing the step response of the control object 1 Measuring the Step Response Waveform Use the following procedure to measure the step response waveform a b Connect a load under the same conditions as for normal operation Set parameter b5 01 to 0 PID control disabled C d Set the Inverter s acceleration time as low as possible and input the step frequency reference x Measure the response waveform of the feedback i e the detection value Note Conduct the measurement so as to know the timing with the step input 2 Calculating the PID Parameters Draw a tangential line at the steepest point of the gradient of the step response waveform mea sured in procedure 1 Measuring R Measure the inclination of the tangential line with the target value as 1 Measuring L Measure the time unit seconds until the tangential line from the beginning of the step input joins the time axis Measuring T Measure the time unit seconds from the point where the tangential line joins the time axis to the point where it meets the target value Response Target value Time buc o m 6 55 Advanced Operation Calculating the PID Parameters The PID parameters can be calculated from the R L and T values measured above as shown in the following table P control Proportional
368. oop Flux Control Vector Vector L5 02 RestatSe Oori 0 BasicorAdvanced Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation Do not output fault restart The fault contact does not operate Output fault restart The fault contact operates Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Overtorque Detection Settings L6 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f Vf with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Torq Det 1 Sel 0to4 Basic or Advanced Torq Det 1 Lvl 0 to 300 Basic or Advanced Torq Det 1 Time 0 0 to 10 0 Basic or Advanced Torq Det 2 Sel 0 to 4 Advanced Torq Det 2 Lvl 0 to 300 Advanced Torq Det 2 Time 0 0 to 10 0 Advanced Note These parameters cannot be changed during operation e The overtorque detection function detects an excessive mechanical load from an increase in the out put current or output torque e The settings in the torque detection selection parameters L6 01 and L6 04 determine whether over torque conditions will be detected and what kind of processing will be performed if a overtorque condi tion is detected L6 01 L6 04 Settings Setting Function No overtorque detection Detect only during speed agreement Continue operation even after detection Minor fault Detect overtorque at any time Continue operation even after detection Minor fault Detect only during speed agree
369. oop vector PG vector Speed Sets the gain and time constant feedback of the internal speed feedback detection detection control circuit control Normally it is not necessary to AFR gain set these parameters Adjust in the following circumstances e Hunting occurs Increase C8 09 If that does Speed not correct the problem feedback reduce C8 08 detection Poor responsiveness control Reduce C8 09 as long as AFR time hunting does not occur constant Increase the gain in C8 08 as long as hunting does not AFR Time occur Note Unit for C8 09 ms Carrier Sets the carrier frequency Frequency during Auto tuning Normally it Selection is not necessary to set this During parameter Adjust if auto tuning Auto tuning is not functioning 0 Sets the carrier frequency to 2 kHz Carrier in 1 Sets the carrier frequency tune to the value in C6 01 2 Sets the carrier frequency to 5 kHz AFR Gain 7 20 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 7 2 3 Reference Parameters List m Preset Reference d1 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range setting Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector di 01 Frequency Sets the frequency reference in 0 to 6 00 OK Q Q Q Q 5 10 reference 1 the units used in 01 03 max Preset frequency reference display set fre units The default setting unit quency Reference
370. operly Disconnect the Digital Operator and then con nect it again e The Inverter CPU s peripheral element is faulty Replace the Inverter CPFO1 COM ERR OP amp INV After communications were established there was a transmission error with the Digital Operator for more than 2 seconds e The Digital Operator isn t connected properly Disconnect the Digital Operator and then con nect it again e The Inverter CPU s peripheral element is faulty Replace the Inverter CPF02 BB Circuit Err Baseblock circuit error Try turning the power supply off and on again e The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPF03 EEPROM Error EEPROM error Try turning the power supply off and on again e The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPF04 Internal A D Err CPU internal A D converter error Try turning the power supply off and on again e The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPF05 External A D Err CPU external A D converter error Try turning the power supply off and on again e The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter Maintenance Operations Fault Display CPF06 Option Error Meaning Optional Card connection error Chapter 8 Probable causes and remedies e The Optional Card isn t connected properly Turn off the power and insert the Card again e The Inverte
371. or Slave Select Master for the first Braking Unit only select Slave for all other Braking Units i e from the second Unit onwards Thermal Thermal Thermal relay trip relay trip relay trip contact contact contact Braking Braking Braking Resistor Resistor Resistor i i Unit Inverter Thermal Thermal Thermal relay trip relay trip relay trip contact contact contact 2 38 Installation Chapter 2 e Power Supply Sequence su 200 V class Three phase 200 to 230 VAC 50 60 Hz 400 V class Three phase 380 to 460 VAC 50 60 Hz Inverter Note Use a transformer with 200 and 400 V outputs for the power supply of the 400 V Inverter 2 2 5 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals A control signal line must be 50 m maximum and separated from power lines The fre quency reference must be input to the Inverter through twisted pair wires m Wire Size and Round Solderless Terminals Use thick wires to prevent voltage drops if the wires are long e Wires for All Inverter Models Terminal Terminal Wire thickness mm Type screw 1 to 11 13 to 33 Stranded wire 0 5 to 1 25 Shielded twisted pair wire Single wire 0 5 to 1 25 Shielded polyethylene covered vinyl 12 G 0 5 to 2 sheath cable e Round Solderless Terminals for Ground Terminal Wire thickness Terminal Screw torque screw N e m 1 25 to 3 5 1 25 to 3 5 1 25 to 3 5 2 to 3 5
372. or V f With PG Feedback Mode Only Terminal Contents Power supply for pulse generator Specifications 12 VDC 5 200 mA max 0 VDC GND for power supply 12 V open collector switching terminal Terminal for switching between12 V voltage input and open collector input For open collector input short across 3 and 4 Pulse input terminal H 4 to 12 V L 1 V max Maximum response frequency 30 kHz Pulse input common Pulse motor output terminal 12 VDC 10 20 mA max Pulse monitor output common Terminal Shielded wire connection terminal Contents Power supply for pulse generator Specifications 12 VDC 45 200 mA max 0 VDC GND for power supply A phase pulse input terminal H 8 to 12 V L 1 V max Maximum response frequency 30 kHz Pulse input common B phase pulse input terminal H 8 to 12 V L 1 V max Maximum response frequency 30 kHz Pulse input common A phase monitor output terminal Open collector output 24 VDC 30 mA max A phase monitor output common B phase monitor output terminal Open collector output 24 VDC 30 mA max B phase monitor output common Terminal Shielded wire connection terminal Contents Power supply for pulse generator Specifications 12 VDC 45 200 mA max see note 0 VDC GND for power supply 5 VDC 5
373. or accel decel times Motor Slip Comp Slip compensation function settings Torque Comp Torque compensation function settings ASR Tuning Not used Can t be set Carrier Freq Carrier frequency settings Hunting Prev Hunting prevention function settings Factory Tuning Not used Can t be set Reference Preset Reference Frequency reference settings when using Operator Reference Limits Frequency upper and lower limit settings Jump Frequencies Prohibited frequency settings Sequence Up Down Accel Decel stop hold frequency setting Torque Control Not used Can t be set V f Pattern Motor Setup Motor parameters Motor parameters set manually Control Method 2 Control mode settings for second motor V f Pattern 2 Motor Setup 2 Parameter settings for second motor Options 6 12 PG Option Setup Not used Can t be set Al 14 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Command Card DI 08 16 Setup Parameter settings for a Digital Command Card AO 08 12 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Monitor Card DO 02 Setup DO 08 Setup Not Used Do not change these settings PO 36F Setup Parameter settings for a Pulse Monitor Card SI F G Setup Parameter settings for a SYSMAC BUS Interface Card CP 916 Setup Parameter settings for a CompoBus D Communications
374. osed Terminals 19 to 20 Open Contact output SPDT 30 VDC 1A max 250 VAC 1A max Output Multi function analog output 1 Set by parameter H4 01 Output frequen cy 0 to 10 V 100 frequency 0 to 10 VDC 45 0 to Multi function analog output 2 Set by parameter H4 01 Output current 5 V Inverter rated current 10 VDC 5 2 mA max Multi function analog output common Common for analog output Note The settings shown in parentheses in the Function column for multi function inputs 1 to 6 multi function contact outputs and multi function outputs 1 and 2 indicate default settings 2 17 Installation Chapter 2 2 2 3 Standard Connection Diagram m Main Circuit Terminal Connections e 3G3FV A2004 to A2075 A4004 to A4150 DC reactor optional S Braking Resistor Unit optional 3 phase 200 VAC 400 VAC Note Be sure to remove the short bar before connecting a DC reactor e 3G3FV A2110 to A2150 DC reactor optional 5 3 phase VAC 200 VAC Note Be sure to remove the short bar before connecting a DC reactor 2 18 Installation Chapter 2 e 3G3FV B2185 to B2220 B4185 to B4450 O O Braking Resistor Unit optional a Braking Unit optional T1 U T2 V 3 phase 200 VAC 400 VAC Note The DC reactor is built in e 3G3FV B2300 to B2550 OG Braking Resistor Unit optional O O Braking Un
375. otor special vector control motor m Precautions Before Auto tuning Caution Do not connect a load to the motor when performing auto tuning Doing so may re sult in personal injury or equipment damage 5 20 Basic Operation Chapter 5 e The Inverter s auto tuning function automatically determines the motor parameters while a servo sys tem s auto tuning function determines the size of a load so these auto tuning functions are funda mentally different e f a load is connected when auto tuning is performed not only will incorrect motor parameters be re corded but the motor may operate erratically resulting in dangerous conditions such as loads falling from vertical axis motors Never perform auto tuning with a load connected to the motor m Required Parameter Settings Enter auto tuning mode and make the following parameter settings Rated Voltage Set the rated voltage VAC shown on the motor s nameplate Rated Current Set the rated current A shown on the motor s nameplate Rated Frequency Set the rated frequency Hz shown on the motor s nameplate Rated Speed Set the rated speed r min shown on the motor s nameplate Number of poles Set the number of poles Motor Selection Select motor 1 For two motor switching control select motor 1 or motor 2 The following message will appear when the parameters have been set Tuning Ready Press RUN key At this point it is still possible to change th
376. otor parameters are set automatically Key sequence Display Explanation Displays program mode Displays auto tuning mode Displays the rated voltage see note Displays the rated current see note Displays the rated frequency see note Displays the rated speed see note Displays the number of poles see note Displays the motor selection Selections other than 1 can t be made Displays a confirmation prompt for the start of the auto tuning function The lower line will flash Starts the auto tuning function The upper line will flash Indicates the completion of auto tuning Returns to the operation mode display Note When the values displayed and the motor parameters differ set each value separately The set ting method is as follows An operation example for changing the motor parameters current to 1 60 A Displays the rated current When changing the set values press the Enter Key and the digit to change will flash Press the Reset Digit Selection Key three times to make the digit for changes flash Press the Decrement Key and set to 001 60 A Press the Enter Key to overwrite the set values Entry Accepted will be displayed for approximately 0 5 seconds Returns to the rated current display e When auto tuning has been executed correctly the parameters E1 01 to E2 08
377. output frequency is greater than the minimum output frequency E1 09 With flux vector control the output frequency is greater than the excitation level b2 01 The output frequency is less than the minimum output frequency E1 09 With flux vector control the output frequency is less than the excitation level b2 01 Output frequency Minimum output frequency E1 09 Excitation level 02 01 when flux vector control is being used s Excitation output OFF ON e Overload OL1 Setting 1F The motor protection function s electronic thermal value is less than 90 of the detection level The motor protection function s electronic thermal value is greater than 90 of the detection level e This output function is valid when the motor overload protection function is enabled L1 01 1 e This output can be used to warn of overheating before the protection function itself operates e OH Prealarm Setting 20 The cooling fin temperature is less than the OH Pre Alarm Level set in L8 02 The cooling fin temperature exceeds the OH Pre Alarm Level set in L8 02 e This output function indicates that the temperature of the cooling fins reaches the temperature set in L8 02 the Inverter overheating alarm detection level 6 91 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e Zero servo End Setting 33 The zero servo command isn t being input or zero servo position control hasn t been completed The position h
378. page 5 2 Applied Operation Operation which uses PID control or other functions Refer to page 6 1 For operation within standard parameters select Basic Operation To use the various applied functions such as direct current control braking speed search timer S curve acceleration deceleration slip correction torque compensation drip control position lock and torque control select Applied Operation in combination with Basic Operation Trial Operation Chapter 4 4 2 Operation Example 4 2 1 Power Connection Checkpoints before Connecting the Power Supply e Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage 200 V class 3 phase 200 to 230 VDC 50 60 Hz 400 V class 3 phase 380 to 460 VDC 50 60 Hz e Make sure that the Motor output terminal T1 T2 T3 and the Motor are connected correctly e Ensure that the control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly Set all control circuit terminals to OFF e When using a PG Speed Control Card ensure that it is wired correctly e Set the motor to no load status not connected to the mechanical system Connecting the Power Supply e Having conducted the above checks connect the power supply 4 2 2 Checking the Display Status e f the display at the time the power is connected is normal it will read as follows Normal The frequency reference monitor is displayed in the data display section e When an fault has occurred the
379. parameter setting range Default setting The default setting value each control mode has its own default setting There fore the default setting changes when the control mode is changed Changes during operation Indicates whether or not the parameter can be changed while in the In verter is in operation OK Changes possible during operation NO Changes not possible during operation Control mode Indicates which control modes and which access levels can be set and refer enced Q Items which can be set and referenced on all access levels QUICK START BASIC and ADVANCED B Items which can be set and referenced in BASIC and ADVANCED A Items which can be set and referenced in ADVANCED only X Items which cannot be set or referenced in that control mode Page Reference page for more detailed information on the parameter 7 2 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 7 1 Initialize Mode Parameters Name Description Setting Default Control mode e tti Display ET FM Vit vit Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Display Used to select the language Language displayed on the Digital Operator English Japanese German French Select ltalian Language Spanish Portuguese Note This parameter is not ini tialized by the initialize operation Used to set the parameter access level set read 0 Monitoring only Displays only Operation mode and Initialize mode Used to
380. peed PG feedback Coast Stop Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the motor speed PG feedback Fast Stop C1 09 Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the motor speed PG feedback Continue Alarm Only Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the motor speed PG feedback Note 1 In order to detect faulty contacts and so on inserted at the Inverter output side select detec tion when the frequency reference matches the output frequency Note 2 The detection conditions vary as shown below depending on the software version In Ver VSG101114 and later versions both functions are provided 5 32 Basic Operation Chapter 5 VSG101043 and earlier software Set values 0 to 3 VSG101113 software Set values 4 to 7 Parameter F1 10 sets the PG speed deviation detection level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency Parameter F1 11 sets the length of time that the difference between the motor speed and reference speed must exceed the PG speed deviation detection level in order to generate a PG speed deviation fault DEV Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f VA with Open Loop Flux Control PG Vector Vector PG Deviate Level 0 to 50 PG Dev
381. peed r min x number of poles 120 Set the no load current E2 03 at the rated voltage and rated frequency Normally this value isn t shown on the motor s nameplate so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer Parameter Display name Setting range Units Default Valid access levels number setting vt v f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Motor Rated Slip 0 00 to 20 00 Advanced Quick Start Basic No Load Current 0 00 to 2 90 or Advanced see note 2 Note 1 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The table shows the default settings for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters Note 2 The setting range is between 0 00 and 0 1 less than the Inverter s rated current Note 3 These settings are used as reference values for the motor slip compensation function Set the motor s terminal resistance phase to phase in parameter E2 05 Normally this value isn t shown on the motor s nameplate so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer Parameter Display name Setting range Default Valid access levels number setting wt v f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector E2 05 Term Resistance 0 000 to 65 000 O 9 842 Note 1 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The table shows the default settings for 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters Note 2 This setting is used as a reference value for the torque compensation func
382. pensation gain in increments of 0 1 If the speed is lower than the target value increase the slip compensation gain If the speed is higher than the target value decrease the slip compensation gain Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit ve wih Open Loop Control ill el 8 il c al 10000 note This parameter cannot be changed during operation Note When the control mode is switched the values change as follows V f control 2 000 open loop vector 200 6 59 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Adjust the slip compensation primary delay time if the motor slip compensation responsiveness is low or if the speeds are unstable This does not normally need to be set If responsiveness is low lower the set value If speeds are unstable raise the set value Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V f with Open Loop Control C3 03 SlipComelimit 0t0250 200 Adv Advanced This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter C3 03 sets the slip compensation limit as a percentage of motor rated slip E2 02 with the motor rated slip taken as 100 If the speed is lower than the target value and does not change even when the slip compensation gain is adjusted it is possible that the slip compensation limit has been reached Raise the limit and then check again Make sure however that t
383. perature control by fan speed m Zero servo Control e This function is valid with vector control with PG e Even at a motor speed of zero 0 Hz a torque of 150 of the motor s rated torque can be generated and the average servomotor holding power stopping power can be obtained m Speed Control By Feedback e This function is valid with PG e An optional PG Speed Control Card be used to enable feedback control for speeds thereby improving speed control accuracy 1 5 Introduction Chapter 1 Dwell Function e By holding the output frequency for a constant time during acceleration and deceleration acceleration and deceleration can be performed without stepping out even when driving a motor with a large start up load Low Noise 0 4 to 160 kW Models e The output transistor of the Inverter is an IGBT insulated gate bipolar transistor Using a sine wave PWM method with a high frequency carrier the motor does not generate metallic noise Monitor Function e The following items can be monitored with the Digital Operator Frequency reference output frequency output current motor speed output voltage reference main circuit DC voltage output power torque reference status of input terminals status of output terminals operating status total operating time software number speed deviation value PID feed back value fault status fault history etc e All types of data can be monitored even with multi functio
384. ply only after mounting the front cover terminal covers bottom cover Operator and optional items Not doing so may result in electrical shock Do not remove the front cover terminal covers bottom cover Operator or optional items while the power is being supplied Not doing so may result in electrical shock or damage to the product Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands Doing so may result in electrical shock Do not touch the inside of the Inverter Doing so may result in electrical shock Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm Doing so may result in injury Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power interruption to avoid an unexpected restart if operation is set to be continued in the processing selection function after momentary power interruption is reset Doing so may result in injury Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator is valid only when function settings are performed Not doing so may result in injury Be sure confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before turning ON the power supply resetting the alarm or switching the LOCAL REMOTE selector Doing so while the RUN signal is turned ON may result in injury Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be easily changed f
385. prove speed accuracy when operating with a load It is mainly effective with V f control without PG Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit y 1r Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector C3 01 Slip Come Gain 0 0 to Multi 1 0 See Basic or Basic or Advanced 2 5 ple note Adv This parameter can be changed during operation Note When the control mode is switched the factory default setting changes as follows V f control 0 0 V f with PG 1 0 open loop vector 0 flux vector 1 0 When 1 0 is set this function compensates for the rated slip that has been set by the rated torque output With flux vector control this becomes the gain to compensate for slip caused by motor temperature variation Refer to page 6 34 Motor Slip Compensation Gain Adjustment Procedure 1 Correctly set the motor rated slip parameter E2 02 and the motor no load current parameter E2 03 The motor rated slip can be calculated by means of the following equation using the num bers that are shown on the motor s nameplate Motor rated slip Motor rated frequency Hz rated speed r min x motor No of poles 120 With vector control the motor rated slip is automatically set by auto tuning 2 Set the slip compensation gain parameter C3 01 to 1 0 If it is set to 0 0 slip compensation will be disabled 3 Operate with a load measure the speed and adjust the slip com
386. pter 5 5 3 V f Control With V f control the user must set the Inverter s input voltage motor selection rated current and V f pattern 5 3 1 Setting the Motor Parameters a Inverter Input Voltage Setting E1 01 Set the Inverter s input voltage E1 01 to match the power supply voltage it cannot be changed during operation This setting is used as the reference value for functions such as the protection functions Parameter Display Setting Default Valid access levels number name range setting v f Mm m OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector E1 01 Input Voltage 155 to 255 VAC 200 Quick start Es or Advanced 310 to 510 400 Note The voltage settings shown in parentheses are the values for the 400 V class Motor Selection and Rated Current Setting E1 02 and E2 01 Set the type of motor being used with the motor selection parameter E1 02 This setting is a reference for the protection functions This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control Et 02 Motor Selection Dto2 O Quickstart Basic or Advanced E1 02 Settings Setting Function Standard fan cooled motor general purpose motor Standard blower cooled motor inverter exclusive motor Special motor special vector control motor Set parameter E2 01 to rated current A shown on
387. pter 6 e Unlike other parameter settings the external fault settings have an input procedure as shown in the following diagrams 1 When setting an external fault function press the Enter Key when External Fault is displayed to bring up the Input Level display External Fault Input level Ly Y Detection method ry Y Operation Selection 2 Press the Increment Key to switch displays as follows Detection Method Operation Selection Input Method 3 Press the Enter Key at the desired parameter to select that parameter At this point the Increment and Decrement Keys can be pressed to scroll through the available settings for the selected param eter Press the Enter Key to select the displayed parameter setting Press the Escape Key to cancel the operation without changing the parameter setting MORE EPUM p Pe Input level N O Contact Set parameter N C Contact Detection method Always a ee Set parameter Operation selection a Ramp to Stop zz Tosa to Stop xz Emaon Stop a Continue operation ESC i i 6 86 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e DC Injection Activate Setting 60 Normal operation Applies DC braking if the Inverter is
388. ptions Braking Unit 3GS3IV PCDBR Allows frequency reference settings and ON OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a remote location 50 m max Frequency counter specifications 60 120 Hz 90 180Hz Descriptions Used in combination with a Braking Resistor Unit for reducing motor s deceleration time Not necessary for 200V class models of 7 5 kW max or 400V class models of 15 kW max Braking Resistor Unit 3G3IV PLKEB Consumes the regenerative energy of the motor and reduces the deceleration time of the motor Braking Resistor 3G3IV PERF 150WJL 101 Used for 200 V class of 3 7 kW max and 400 V class of 2 2 kW max Consumes the regenerative energy of the motor and reduces the deceleration time of the motor DC Reactor 3G3HV PUZDAB Suppresses the harmonic currents of the 3G3FV and improves the power factor of the 3G3FV Models of 18 5 kW or more have a built in DC Reactor Digital Operator Connection Cable 9 8 3G3FV PCN125 1 m 3G3FV PCN325 3 m A dedicated cable for the 3G3FV Series Used to connect the 3G3FV and Digital Operator when they are separated Specifications m Optional Cards Analog Reference Card 3GSIV PAI14U Chapter 9 Descriptions The 3G3FV incorporates analog input terminals for frequency references with a resolution of 1 2 048 This card increases the reso
389. pulse generator s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise Note 3 The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 50 meters m Wiring PG Speed Control Card Terminal Blocks Use no more than 30 meters of wiring for PG encoder signal lines and no more than 50 meters for 3G3FV PPGD2 and 3G3FV PPGX2 and keep them separate from power lines Use shielded twisted pair wire for pulse input and pulse output monitor wire and connect the shield to the shielded wire con nection terminal e Wires for All Inverter Models Terminal Terminal Wire thickness mm screw Pulse generator power supply Stranded wire 0 5 to 1 25 Shielded twisted pair wire Single wire 0 5 to 1 25 Shielded polyethylene cov ered vinyl sheath cable Pulse input terminal Pulse monitor output terminal Shielded wire connection 0 5 to 2 terminal 2 46 Installation Chapter 2 e Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals The use of solderless terminals for the control circuit terminals is recommended because solderless terminals are easy to connect securely UE d1 dia Wire thickness Manufacturer A1 0 5 8WH Phoenix Contact A1 0 75 8GY 8mm A1 1 8RD A1 1 5 8BK l4mm A d2 dia Note Do not solder wires with the control circuit terminals if wires are used instead of solderless termi nals Wi
390. put power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence R L1 S L2 and T L3 e Installing an AC Reactor If the Inverter is connected to a large capacity power transformer 660 kW or more or the phase advance capacitor is switched an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit causing the converter unit to break down To prevent this install an optional AC reactor on the input side of the Inverter This also improves the power factor on the power supply side e Installing a Surge Absorber Always use a surge absorber or diode for the inductive loads near the Inverter These inductive loads include magnetic contactors electromagnetic relays solenoid valves solenoid and magnetic brakes 2 29 Installation Chapter 2 e Installing a Noise Filter on the Power Supply Side The Inverter s outputs utilize high speed switching so noise may be transmitted from the Inverter to the power line and adversely affect other devices in the vicinity It is recommended that a Noise Filter be installed at the Power Supply to minimize this noise transmission Conversely noise can also be re duced from the power line to the Inverter Wiring Example 1 Input Noise Filters Simple Input Noise Filter 3G3EV PLNFD Input Noise Filter 3G3IV PFN EMC conforming Input Noise Filter 3G3FV PFS supply MCCB 3G3FV SYSMAC or CXXXI other control device Note Use a noise filter designed for I
391. que control change Torque ref Sets the torque reference delay erence time in ms units delay time Note This function can be used to adjust the noise of the torque control signal or the responsiveness with the host controller When vibration occurs during torque control increase the set value Torq Con trol Sel Torq Ref Filter 7 23 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range setting Display Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Speed limit Sets the speed limit command selection method for the torque control mode 1 The analog input limit from an analog frequency Speed Limit reference terminal Sel terminals 13 and 14 Limited to d5 04 parameter setting values Speed limit Sets the speed limit during torque control as a percentage of the maximum frequency Note This function is enabled when d5 03 is set to 2 Directions are as follows operation command direction operation command opposite direction Speed Lmt Value Speed limit Sets the speed limit bias as a bias percentage of the maximum frequency Note Bias is given to the speci fied speed limit It can be used to adjust the margin for the speed limit Speed Lmt Bias Speed Sets the delay time from torque con inputting the multi function input trol switch speed torque con
392. que Control Switching Function 0 0 0 0 ee eee eee 6 27 6 3 6 Torque Limit Function 0 0 cee eee eens 6 28 6 3 7 Setting Adjusting Motor Parameters 0 0 cee eee eee 6 31 6 3 8 Operation for Saturated Output Voltage 0 ee eee 6 34 6 3 9 Selecting Auto tuning Carrier Frequency 0 0 0 cee eee eee 6 35 V f Control With PG Feedback creion ceantar teren pea cee eens 6 36 6 4 1 Summary of V f Control With PG Feedback Functions 6 36 6 4 2 Energy saving Control Function 6 37 6 4 3 Hunting prevention Function 00 eee ee eee 6 38 Table of Contents 6 4 4 Setting Motor Parameters 0 0 0 eee I 6 39 6 5 Common Functions seco o p uia aeo ba pa ote ad OR eed de 6 40 6 5 1 Summary of Common Control Functions 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee ee 6 40 6 5 2 Application Parameters b 0 eee cee eh 6 41 6 5 3 Tuning Parameters C 23 63 eta nbs enES DIEI EE SIUS BONG ES HEUS 6 58 6 5 4 Reference Parameters d 0 ccc eect e ene ees 6 64 6 5 5 Motor Parameters E i ie eee C ater orem Ks Rial ce CRT 6 66 6 5 6 Option Parameters B oc XE ERR UEM S ERES Ob Re 6 70 6 5 7 External Terminal Functions H 20 0 0 ccc eee eens 6 76 6 5 8 Protective Functions Toes ccd eC E Coe tre Coe E ce epit 6 97 6 5 9 Operator Parameters 0 1 0 cee cette eens 6 110 Chapter 7 Parameter Lists 2 ciel e
393. quency setting resisto Power supply indicator Run indicator Error indicator Main auxiliary frequency reference switch Error limit Forward stop reverse switch Case e Standard Models 3G3IV PJVOP961 DCF 6A 3 V 1 mA 75 Hz 3G3IV PJVOP962 DCF 6A 3 V 1 mA 150 Hz 3G3IV PJVOP963 DCF 6A 3 V 1 mA 220 Hz 9 11 Specifications Chapter 9 e External Dimensions mm mounting NI space Front panel Panel J mounting hole Four 7 dia case ting hol wo Lt 100 mounting hole 122 max f Two 23 dia Two 4 dia rubber bushing mounting tap Weight 1 8 kg Panel 3G3IV PJVOP95 Analog Operator Compact Plastic Type The 3G3IV PJVOP95 Analog Operator is a control panel that allows frequency and run stop operation by ana log references from a distance 50 m Frequency scale 60 120 Hz 90 180 Hz Frequency setting resistor Frequency meter Main auxiliary frequency reference switch Frequency meter calibration resistor Forward stop reverse switch Power supply indicator Error limit Run indicator Error indicator e Standard Models 0 Medl Frequency meter specifications 3G3IV PJVOP951 TRM 45 3 V 1 mA 60 120 Hz 3GS3IV PJVOP952 TRM 45 3 V 1 mA 90 180 Hz e External Dimensions mm Weight 0 8 kg 9 12 Specifications Chapter 9 m Dedicated Options e Brak
394. r usage conditions In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time it is necessary to perform period inspections and replace parts according to their service life Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter s installation environment and usage conditions The Inverter s maintenance periods are noted below Keep them as reference Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Electrolytic capacitor 5 years Fuses 10 years The usage conditions are as follows Ambient temperature 40 C Load factor 80 Operating time 8 hours per day Installation According to instructions in manual If the maintenance period is extended it is recommended that the ambient temperature be lowered and that the power on time be reduced as much as possible Note For details regarding maintenance consult your OMRON sales representative 8 23 Lil ul hil Chapter 9 Specifications 9 1 Inverter Specifications 9 2 Option Specifications Specifications Chapter 9 9 1 Inverter Specifications General Specifications for 200 V Inverters Model number A2004 3G3FV Max applica 0 4 ble motor ca pacity kW Output characteristics Rated output 1 2 2 3 3 0 4 2 6 7 9 5 13 19 capacity Rated output 3 2 6 0 8 0 11 17 5 25 33 49 current A Max output 3 phase 200 to 230 VAC Corresponds to input voltage volt
395. r Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit used As a result the possible set time will be shorter than that possible with the parameter set to 0 and the deceleration time will be shortened as well Set the parameter to 0 howev er if it is desired to decelerate the motor in the set deceleration time 6 101 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e When this parameter is set to 3 in contrast to a setting of 0 the deceleration time is automatically prolonged with main axis overvoltage OV easily detected Therefore the actual deceleration time becomes longer than the deceleration time that has been set This can be adjusted however by set ting a shorter deceleration time than for the 0 setting so that the actual deceleration time will also be shorter Note The parameter cannot be set to 3 in flux vector control Deceleration Stall Prevention Example L3 04 z 1 The deceleration time is controlled to prevent overvoltage a Output frequency Time Deceleration time set value Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector L3 05 StallP Run Sel 0t02 1 Basicor Advanced Not applicable Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation Setting Function Disabled Run according to the settings Stalls may occur with large loads Enabled deceleration time 1 Use deceleration time in C1 02 for s
396. r a 400 V class Inverter this is the time in seconds for voltage to be restored from 0 VAC to 400 VAC e This setting is valid for speed searches after a momentary power loss regular speed searches the voltage changes with energy saving control and the voltage changes with baseblock clearing Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif K m Open Loop Control L2 05 PUV Det Level 150 to 210 190 380 Advanced 800 to 420 Note 1 This parameter cannot be changed during operation Note 2 The values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters e Normally it isn t necessary to change this setting e Use this parameter when you want to add an AC reactor and lower the main circuit under voltage detection level Be sure to set a main circuit DC voltage value V that will detect a main circuit under voltage m Stall Prevention Function Settings L3 A stall occurs if the rotor cannot keep up with the rotating magnetic field on the motor stator side when a large load is applied to the motor or a sudden acceleration decelera tion is performed In the 3G3FV stall prevention functions can be set independently for accelerating run ning and decelerating Some functions are restricted depending on the control mode 6 99 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f V f with Open Loop Flux Co
397. r hunting occur Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit v f with OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector Droop gain 0 0 to 100 0 Not applicable Advanced Droop delay 0 03 to 2 00 time Note These parameters can be changed during operation soror Droop amount Slip equivalent Torque 400965 ecco tte EEUU ten prse 0 Speed Reference speed 6 3 3 Zero servo Function Position lock The zero servo function is enabled when one of the multi function inputs H1 01 through H1 06 is set to 72 Zero Servo Command If the zero servo command is ON when the frequency speed reference 6 18 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 falls below the excitation level b2 01 a position control loop is formed and the motor is stopped The motor will not rotate even if there is an offset in the analog reference input Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f V f with OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector Zero Servo Gain 0to 100 Not applicable Advanced Zero Servo Count 0 to Pulses 16383 Zero servo command Excitation level b2 01 Frequency speed reference 2 22 2222 errr hor Ne P RE E Excitation level b2 01 Motor speed ooo Zero Servo End signal Completely stopped by zero servo function e Assign the zero servo comman
398. r machinery or the lifting lowering load for machinery such as cranes e Friction loads Set the friction load in both C4 03 and C4 04 e Lifting lowering load Set the electrically driven winding load only When the lifting machinery is equipped with a coun terweight a shock may be generated if there is a regenerative load so do not use this function e t is only possible to set the electrically driven compensation in both forward and reverse The regen erative setting cannot be made e The starting torque compensation is not applied when switching between forward and reverse or after a speed search e The starting torque compensation is usually not applied when using a second motor 6 7 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e When a shock is generated at startup increase the setting for the starting torque compensation time constant C4 05 Use either the DC injection braking at startup b2 03 or the DC braking reference multi function input set value 60 to raise the motor s magnetic flux in advance before startup The magnetic flux from the DC injection braking at startup b2 03 can also be brought up quickly Refer to Setting DC Injection Braking b2 on page 6 42 for details 6 1 7 Selecting Auto tuning Carrier Frequency The auto tuning carrier frequency is by default set to a value higher than that used for conventional models to improve the accuracy of auto tuning The default setting does not normally need to be
399. r numbers from H7 to q7 Page 5 28 Added information on flux vector control Page 5 32 Changed information on PG speed devi ation settings Page 5 38 Changed speed loop diagram Page 5 48 Changed information on PG speed devi ation settings Changed speed loop diagram Page 6 9 Added information on flux vector control Page 6 19 Changed diagram Changed servo lock to zero servo Page 6 44 Added information on speed search func tion Page 6 49 Changed diagram Page 6 87 Added information on external search Page 6 101 Added information on stall prevention function settings Page 7 20 Added note to table Page 7 25 Added note to table Page 7 33 Changed information in table Page 7 37 Changed information in table Page 7 43 Changed information in serial commu nications setup table Page 7 44 Changed information in table Page 8 18 Added and changed information on Input Noise Filters May 2006 Page ii General precautionary notes added to the first page Page v Information on general precautions notation added Page xv Information on liability and warranty added
400. r or Optional Card is faulty Replace the faulty component CPF20 Option A D Error Optional Card A D converter error e The Optional Card isn t connected properly Turn off the power and insert the Card again e The Optional Card s A D converter is faulty Replace the Optional Card CPF21 Option CPU down Optional Communications Card diagnosis error CPF22 Option Type Err Optional Communications card Type error CPF23 Option DPRAM Err Optional Communications Card mutual diagnosis error 8 1 2 Minor Fault Detection e The Optional Communications Card isn t con nected properly Turn off the power and insert the Card again e The Optional Communications Card is faulty Replace the Optional Communications Card Minor faults are a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output and are automatically returned to their original status once the cause of the minor fault has been removed The Digital Operator display flashes and the minor fault is out put from the multi function outputs H2 01 to H2 03 Take appropriate measures according to the table below m Minor Fault Displays and Processing Minor fault display EF flashing External Fault Meaning Both the forward and reverse commands have been ON for more than 0 5 s Probable causes and remedies Check the sequence of the forward and reverse commands Since t
401. raking are set set the minimum baseblock time L2 03 For the minimum baseblock time set the time to wait for the motor s residual voltage to dissipate If an overcurrent is detected when starting a speed search or DC injection braking raise the set value to prevent a fault from occurring Speed Search Timing Chart Run command OFF ON Deceleration time set for b3 03 NN RI EX je Maximum frequency Frequency reference that is set Output frequency Minimum baseblock time L2 03 Output current 6 45 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 m Setting the Timer Function b4 The timer function is enabled when the timer function input set value 18 and the timer function output set value 12 are set for the multi function input and multi function output respectively These inputs and outputs serve as general purpose l O Chattering of sensors switches and so on can be pre vented by setting a delay time Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Delay ON Timer Advanced Delay OFF Timer Advanced These parameters cannot be changed during operation e When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set for b4 01 timer function ON delay time the timer function output turns ON e When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set for b4 02 timer func
402. ral I Limit integral of the speed loop ASR Normally this setting is not required Note Set to a small value to ASR Limit prevent any radical load change Set to 100 of the maximum output fre quency Note When the control mode is changed the Inverter reverts to default settings The open loop vector control default settings are given above 7 18 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Carrier Frequency C6 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 3 Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector C6 01 Carrier Sets the carrier frequency 2 0 to 15 0 NO B B B B 6 62 frequency upper limit and lower limit in 15 0 see upper limit KHz units See note 2 see note 1 eam The carrier frequency note 1 ETE M proportional gain is set as req vax follows C6 02 Carrier Note In vector control mode 0 4 to 15 0 NO A A X X 6 62 frequency the upper limit of the car 15 0 see lower limit rier frequency is fixed at see note 1 Carrier C6 01 note Freq Min Carrier frequency C6 03 Carrier C6 O1f 0to99 0 NO A A X X 6 62 frequency Son proportional Output frequency x C6 03 gain i xK Carrier 0 E1 04 Freq Gain Max frequency Output frequency Note 1 The setting range and the default of the Inverter will differ depending on its capacity and con trol
403. range 0 to 99 digits Overflow display Flashes Zero suppress function Yes External control Process value hold by short circuiting the rear terminals Enclosure rating conforming to Front panel IP51 see note IEC standards Case IP20 Terminals IP00 Memory protection Non volatile memory no backup battery required Note IP51 ensured when the optional K32 L49SC Water resistive Soft Front Cover is used and IP50 when it is not 9 10 Specifications Chapter 9 e Wiring Example Circuit breaker Inverter s R _6oo R internal U HOLD E ache S 605 S circuitry V m s ower sul p ppy AA gt W E a O P SYSDRIVE Analog output 1 5 0 to 10 VDC 3 O Analog T monitor 3 mS 9 DE gt GND Y E K3TJ d e External Dimensions 98 Panel Cutouts Recommended I 92 8 gt 45 55 75 min 120 min LED Display Character Size 48 43 H I1 rom 14 2 mm 96 66 LI PT eu F Weight 200 g g 7 8 mm e Analog Operators 3G3IV PJVOP96 Analog Operator Standard Steel plate Type The 3G3IV PUVOP96L Analog Operator is a control panel that allows frequency and run stop operation by ana log references from a distance 50 m Frequency scale 75 Hz 150 Hz 220 Hz Frequency meter calibration resisto Frequency meter Fre
404. rated voltage that is at least 20 V below the Inverter s input power supply voltage 40 V below for a 400 V class Inverter and use a special vector control motor is possible or set an output voltage restriction in parameter C3 06 see 6 1 5 Operation for Output Voltage Saturation for details If an output voltage restriction is set in C3 06 the Invert er s output current will be reduced by about 10 so be sure to use an Inverter with suffi cient capacity 5 2 1 Auto tuning Procedure a Inverter Input Voltage Setting E1 01 Set the Inverter s input voltage E1 01 to match the power supply voltage it cannot be changed during operation This setting is used as the reference value for functions such as the protection functions Parameter Display Setting Default Valid access levels number name range setting Vif vm n Open Loop Control E1 01 Input Voltage 155 to 255 VAC 200 Quick start Essi or Advanced 310 to 510 400 Note The voltage settings shown in parentheses are the values for the 400 V class m Motor Selection E1 02 Set the motor selection E1 02 to the type of motor to be used This setting is used as a basis for motor protection Parameter Display Setting Default Valid access levels number name range setting Vif ME im Open Loop Flux Pono Vector Vector ertum tion e Setting Setting Function Standard fan cooled motor general purpose motor Standard blower motor inverter exclusive motor Special m
405. ration Deceleration C1 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 3 Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector C1 01 Accelera Sets the acceleration time to 0 0 to 10 0 OK Q Q Q Q 5 12 tion time 1 accelerate from 0 to the 6000 0 5 18 maximum frequency in See Accelera tion Time 1 1 second units note C1 02 Decelera Sets the deceleration time to OK Q Q Q Q 5 12 tion time 1 decelerate from the maximum 5 18 Decaiera e a to 0 in 1 second tion Time 1 C1 03 Accelera The acceleration time when the OK B B B B 5 12 tion time 2 multi function input 5 18 PUE EE A oat time 1 is set tion Time 2 C1 04 Decelera The deceleration time when the OK B B B B 5 12 tion time 2 multi function input 5 18 Decelsra ae time 1 is set tion Time 2 j C1 05 Accelera The acceleration time when the NO A A A A 5 12 tion time 3 multi function input 5 18 Accel ra ION ee time 2 is set tion Time 3 C1 06 Decelera The deceleration time when the NO A A A A 5 12 tion time 3 multi function input 5 18 Decelera AUN REP CORR time 2 is set tion Time 3 C1 07 Accelera The acceleration time when the NO A A A A 5 12 tion time 4 multi function input 5 18 multi accel decel time 1 and Accelera multi accel decel time 2 are tion Time 4 set to ON C1 08 Decelera
406. ration deceleration time gain for 1 to 10 V is 10 V input voltage V x 1096 e Stall Prevention Level Setting 8 10V 0 10 V e Output Frequency Lower Limit Setting 9 Jump Frequency Setting A 0098 mn 10V 0 10 V 6 94 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e Torque Reference Setting 13 Torque Compensation Bias Setting 14 10095 an 10V 0 10 V RCM 100 e Forward Torque Limit Setting 10 Reverse Torque Limit Setting 11 Regenerative Torque Limit Setting 12 E uoc NE 10 V 0 10 V e Forward Reverse Torque Speed Limit Setting 15 100 paren ety 0 OV 100 ae m Multi function Analog Output Settings H4 e Function Selection Parameters Parameter number Display name Setting range Terminal 21 Sel Default setting Valid access levels V f with Open Loop Vector Vif Control Basic or Advanced Flux Vector Terminal 23 Sel Basic or Advanced Note These parameters cannot be changed during operation 6 95 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e The multi function outputs can be set to monitor any of the U1 Inverter status items by setting the last two digits of the parameter number U1 J Refer to page 3 12 for a table listing all of these U1 settings e The Inverter s status monitor item U1 can be output as multi function analog output Set the parame ters H4 01 and H4 03 AO Ch1 Select and AO Ch2 Select to the r
407. rative operation Varia 3 Coastto stop with timer Run commands are ignored during deceleration Note Only settings 0 and 1 can be used with flux vector control b1 04 Disabling 0 Reverse enabled 0 1 0 NO B B B B 5 13 Reverse 1 Reverse disabled Operation Reverse Oper 7 5 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range setting Vit V f Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Operation Used to set the method of Selection operation when the frequency for reference input is less than the Minimum minimum frequency E1 09 Frequency 0 Run at frequency reference E1 09 or E1 09 not effective less 1 STOP Frequencies below E1 09 in the coast to stop state Run at min frequency E1 09 Run at zero speed Frequencies below E1 09 are zero Note This function is only avail able in with flux vector control Setting Used to set the responsiveness Control In of the control inputs put Re forward reverse and sponsive multi function inputs ness 0 Two scans every 2 ms Use when connecting transistor outputs Cntl Input Two scans every 5 ms Use Scans when connecting contact outputs or switches Zero Speed Oper Operation Used to set the Operation mode Selection by switching to the Remote After mode using the Local Remote Switching Key to Remote 0 Run
408. reases The filter time constant cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f vm nn Open Loop Control 2 00 5 1 3 Frequency Reference Settings from Digital Operator m Selecting the Frequency Reference Source b1 01 Parameter b1 01 is used to select the reference source it cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector b1 01 Reference Source 0to 4 1 Quicksstart Basic or Advanced 5 8 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Reference Source Settings Setting Reference source Operator Digital Operator Terminals Control circuit terminals analog inputs Serial Com Not used Do not set Option PCB Optional Card CompoBus D Communications Card SYSMAC BUS I F Card Analog Command Card or Digital Command Card EWS Not used Do not set Note 1 The frequency reference is input from the Digital Operator so set b1 01 to O Note 2 The source specified for the frequence reference is used as one of the frequency references in multistage control If the frequence reference source is set to the Digital Operator the fre quence reference for d1 01 will be used and analog frequency reference voltage current input from the control terminal will be ignored The frequency for d1 01 will also
409. reference is set for parameter H3 09 multi function analog input terminal 14 a frequency corresponding to the terminal 14 input input voltage current is added to the frequency reference Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable e The motor does not rotate according to reference Torque control mode is selected When parameter d5 01 torque control selection is set to 1 torque control speed control cannot be executed Speed limits can be set To switch torque control and speed control set parameter d5 01 to 0 speed control and set one of the parameters from H1 01 through H1 06 multi function inputs to 71 speed torque control change If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision The slip compensation limit has been reached With the slip compensation function compensation cannot be carried out beyond the slip compensation limit set in parameter C3 03 Check to be sure that the set value is suitable If There is Low Speed Precision at High speed Rotation in Open loop Control Mode The motor s rated voltage is high The Inverter s maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage For example if 200 VAC is input then the maximum output voltage will be 200 VAC If asa result of vector control the output voltage reference value exceeds the Inverter output voltage maxi mum value the speed precision will decrease Either use a motor with a low rated voltage i e a
410. reference that is 100 of the motor s rated torque 6 26 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e When the input terminal is used for torque compensation A 0 V 4 mA input indicates a torque compensation that is 100 of the motor s rated torque Reference value Gain Max frequency x 100 Gain Ratedtorque x 00 Bias Max frequency x 100 Bias Ratedtorque x 100 Input voltage Input current OV 10V 4 mA 20 mA Note Use the current values shown in parentheses when current input has been selected 6 3 5 Speed Torque Control Switching Function It is possible to switch between speed control and torque control when one of the multi function inputs H1 01 through H1 06 is set to 71 Speed Torque Control Change Speed control is performed when the input is OFF and torque control is performed when the input is ON Torque Control Function Settings Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit v f with OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector d5 01 Torq Control Sel Oor 0 Notapplicable Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation Settings Speed control controlled by C5 01 through C5 07 Torque control Note Set parameter d5 01 to 0 speed control when using the speed torque control switching function m Setting the Speed Torque Control Switching Timer This setting specifies the delay 0 to 1 000 ms between a change in the multi func
411. removed operation resumes at the held frequency reference when the run command is restored For information regarding the accel decel stop HOLD command and the UP and DOWN commands refer to 6 5 7 External Terminal Function H 6 65 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 m Trim Control Level d4 02 This function sets the motor operated trim control level as a percentage of maximum output frequency in units of 1 When trim control increase and decrease are selected as multi function contact input functions setting H1 1C and 1D respectively the trim control level is added to or subtracted from the analog frequency reference when each respective contact closes Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit V A with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector d4 02 Trim Control Lvl_ 0 to 100 This parameter cannot be changed during operation If the minus speed command is ON and the result of the subtraction is beyond zero the output frequen cy will become zero For information regarding the plus and minus speed commands refer to the explanations of the multi function inputs H1 in 6 5 7 External Terminal Function H 6 5 5 Motor Parameters E m Intermediate Output Frequency 2 and Intermediate Output Frequency Voltage 2 For vector control of a special motor such as a constant power output motor or machine tool shaft mo tor the motor may not f
412. rence between the actual motor speed and the reference com mand speed These parameters set the conditions for a PG speed deviation fault and the stopping method that is used when a PG speed deviation fault occurs they cannot be changed during operation Parameter F1 04 sets the conditions for detecting a PG speed deviation fault and the stopping method to be used when a fault is detected Display name Setting range Parameter number Default Valid access levels setting Vit Control Flux Vector V f with Open Loop Vector F104 PGDeviaionSel 0107 8 BB Note B Settings Setting Basic or Advanced Not applicable Stopping method Ramp to Stop C1 02 Fault Function Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the output frequency Coast to Stop Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the output frequency Fast Stop C1 09 Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the output frequency Continue Alarm Only Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the output frequency Ramp to Stop C1 02 Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching within the L4 02 detection range the motor s
413. requency This parameter can be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f Vif with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector d1 09 Jog Reference 6 00 Hz Quick start Basic or Advanced Note 1 When performing the Jog operation from an external terminal set the multi function inputs H1 01 through H1 06 to Jog Frequency Reference Forward Jog or Reverse Jog as required Note 2 The multi function input setting is unnecessary when performing the Jog operation from the Operator 5 1 4 Run Source and Responsiveness Settings m Selecting the Run Source b1 02 Parameter b1 02 is used to select the source of the run command it cannot be changed during opera tion When a control circuit terminal external terminal is set the Unit operates with 2 wire forward stop and reverse stop control When the Unit has been initialized for a 3 wire control or a multi function input is set to 0 3 wire control the Unit operates with 3 wire run stop and forward reverse control Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector bi 02 Run Source _ 0to4 f Quickstart Basic or Advanced 5 10 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Run Source Settings Setting Run source Operator Digital Operator Terminals Control circuit terminals external terminals
414. res may not contact well with the control circuit terminals or the wires may be discon nected from the control circuit terminals due to vibration if the wires are soldered e Round Solderless Terminal Sizes and Screw Torque Wire thickness mm2 Terminal screw Screw torque N m 1 25 to 3 5 1 25 to 3 5 1 25 to 3 5 2 to 3 5 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals e Wiring Method 1 Loosen the terminal screws with a thin slotted screwdriver 2 Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block 3 Tighten the terminal screws firmly Note 1 Always separate the control signal line from the main circuit cables and other power cables Note 2 Do not solder the wires to the control circuit terminals The wires may not contact well with the control circuit terminals if the wires are soldered Note 3 The end of each wire connected to the control circuit terminals must be stripped for approxi mately 7 mm Note 4 Use a shielded wire for the ground terminal 2 47 Installation Chapter 2 Note 5 Insulate the shield with tape so that the shield will not touch any signal line or device Thin slotted screwdriver Blade of screwdriver Control circuit terminal block Strip the end for 7 mm if no solderless terminal is used ER 3 5 mm max Blade thickness 0 6 mm max Note 6 Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0 5 to 0 6 N m The terminal block may be dam aged if the tightening
415. rmine the direction in which the speed is limited as shown in the following table Sign of d5 04 Run command Speed limit direction Forward rotation Speed is limited in the forward direction Reverse rotation Speed is limited in the reverse direction Forward rotation Speed is limited in the reverse direction Reverse rotation Speed is limited in the forward direction The speed limit value is zero for rotation opposite to the speed limit direction For example when a positive value is set in d5 04 and the forward rotation command is ON the effective range of the torque control is from zero to the speed limit value in the forward direction when parameter d5 05 the speed limit bias is set to O 6 23 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e Speed Limit Bias Setting Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control d5 05 Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation e Set the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum frequency The max frequency is 100 The speed limit bias can be used to add margins to the speed limit When the speed limit bias is used it is possible to set the same speed limit value in both the for ward and reverse directions For example the following settings establish speed limits of 50 of the maximum frequency in both the forward and reverse directions Speed limit setting Zero with d5 04 a
416. ro speed level 1 Reverse 1 Reset input ON 1 F ref F out agree 1 Inverter ready 1 Minor fault detected 1 Major fault detected Can t be output Elapsed Time Monitors the Inverter s elapsed operating time The initial value and running power on time selection can be set with parameters 02 07 and 02 08 Can t be output FLASH ID Manufacturer s ID number Can t be output Term 13 Level Terminal 13 input voltage level Monitors the input voltage of the frequen cy reference voltage An input of 10 V corresponds to 100 10 V 10095 10 V 0 to 10 V possible Term 14 Level Terminal 14 input current level Monitors the input current of the frequen cy reference current An input of 20 mA corresponds to 100 10 V 100 20 mA 0 to 10 V output Term 16 Level Terminal 16 input voltage level Monitors the input voltage of the multi function analog input An input of 10 V corresponds to 10096 10 V 10095 10 V 0 to 10 V possible Mot SEC Current Monitors the calculated value of the mo tor s secondary current Iq The motor s rated current corresponds to 100 10 V Rated current 0 to 10 V output Mot EXC Current Monitors the calculated value of the mo tor s excitation current Id The motor s rated current corresponds to 100 10 V Rated current 0 to 10 V output SFS Output Monitors the output frequency after a s
417. rocedure used to change for the rated volt age when changing this setting Displays the motor selection Selection of motor 1 parameter or motor 2 parameter Displays a confirmation prompt for the start of the auto tuning function The lower line will flash Starts the auto tuning function The upper line will flash Indicates the completion of auto tuning m x z Returns to the operation mode display E m z c 3 29 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 3 7 Modified Constants Mode The modified constants mode is used to display or change parameters that have been changed from their factory preset values When any parameters have been changed in program mode b1 01 through 02 08 pressing the Enter Key in modified constants mode will cause these parameters to be displayed The initialize mode parameters won t be displayed Modified Constants Mode Operations e n the following example parameters C1 01 acceleration time 1 and d1 01 preset reference 1 have been changed from their factory settings e The settings for these two parameters are displayed and the setting for d1 01 is changed from 60 00 Hz to 30 00 Hz Key sequence Display Explanation Ed Pb Displays operation mode asd Displays modified constants mode Displays acceleration time 1 C1 01 Displays frequency r
418. rol Temperature control Temperature information is returned as feedback to Thermocouple control temperature by turning a fan Thermistor e PID Control Operations In order to distinguish the separate PID control operations i e proportional integral and derivative the following diagram shows the changes in the control input i e the output frequency when the devi ation between the target value and the feedback is held constant Time Control input PID control control D control P control Time e P Control A control input proportional to the deviation is output The deviation cannot be zeroed by P control alone e Control A control input which is an integral of the deviation is output This is effective for matching the feedback to the target value Sudden changes however cannot be followed e D Control A control input which is an integral of the deviation is output Quick response to sudden changes is possible e PID Control Optimum control is achieved by combining the best features of P and D control e Types of PID Control Two types of PID control are possible with the 3G3FV measured value derivative PID control and basic PID control The type that is normally used is measured value derivative PID control 6 47 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Measured value Derivative PID Control With measured value derivative PID control the feedback value is differentiated for PI
419. rol P I or D that is set to zero 0 0 0 00 will not operate Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit um OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector b5 04 PID I Limit 0 0 to 100 0 Advanced 100 0 This parameter can be changed during operation Explanation of Set Values e This parameter prevents the calculated value of the integral control in the PID control from exceeding the fixed amount e Parameter b5 04 is preset at the factory to the optimum value for most applications so there is normal ly no need to change the setting e Reduce the set value if there is a risk of load damage or of the motor going out of step by the Inverter s response when the load suddenly changes If the set value is reduced too much the target value and the feedback value will not match e Set this parameter as a percentage of the maximum frequency with the maximum frequency taken as 100 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number Smee setting Vit EA mh Open Loop Control m Mee X 100 0 This parameter can be changed during operation Explanation of Set Values e Parameter b5 06 prevents the frequency reference after PID control from exceeding the fixed amount e Set this parameter as a percentage of the maximum frequency with the maximum frequency taken as 100 6 51 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access lev
420. rom low to high Not doing so may result in damage to the product Provide a separate holding brake when necessary Not doing so may result in injury Do not perform a signal check during operation Doing so may result in injury or dam age to the product Do not carelessly change settings Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product Trial Operation Chapter 4 4 1 Procedure 1 Installation and Mounting Install the Inverter according to the installation conditions Refer to page 2 2 Ensure that the instal lation conditions are met 2 Wiring and Connection Connect to the power supply and peripheral devices Refer to page 2 11 Select peripheral devices which meet the specifications and wire correctly 3 Power Connection Carrying out the following pre connection checks before turning on the power supply Always ensure that a power supply of the correct voltage is used and that the power input terminal L1 L2 L3 is wired correctly 200 V class 3 phase 200 to 230 VDC 50 60 Hz 400 V class 3 phase 380 to 460 VDC 50 60 Hz Make sure that the Motor output terminal T1 T2 T3 and the Motor are connected correctly Ensure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly Make sure that all control terminals are turned OFF e When using a PG Speed Control Card ensure that it is wired correctly e Set the motor to no load status not connected to the mechanical system
421. s number range setting vit V A with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector AO Ch1 Select Basic or Advanced AO Ch1 Gain i Basic or Advanced AO Ch2 Select Basic or Advanced AO Ch2 Gain i Basic or Advanced AO Ch1 Bias i Basic or Advanced AO Ch2 Bias Basic or Advanced Set parameters F4 01 and F4 03 AO Ch1 Select and AO Ch2 Select to the right side of the of U1 parameters in the table on page 3 12 of this manual The setting range is between 1 and 38 but the following numbers cannot be set 4 10 11 13 14 25 28 29 30 31 34 35 Set the parameters F4 05 and F4 06 AO Ch1 Bias and AO Ch2 Bias to a bias that moves the output characteristics up and down in parallel in 1 increments based on 10 V as 100 When the 3G3IV PAO12 is used outputs of 0 to 10 V are possible For that set parameter H4 07 mul ti function analog output signal level selection to 1 0 to 10 V outputs There are some monitor items however that can only use outputs of 0 to 10 V even if parameter H4 07 is set to 1 When the 3G3IV PAO08 is used only outputs of 0 to 10 V are possible regardless of the parameter H4 07 setting m Setting a Pulse Monitor Card F7 When using a 3G3IV PPOS6F Pulse Monitor Card set the number of output pulses with parameter F7 01 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number ud MM o i setting Vit vi Anh Open Loop Flux cont
422. s shown in the following diagrams e Set L8 01 to 0 i e no overheating protection of the braking resistor and L3 04 to 0 i e no decel erating stall prevention or 2 i e braking with stall prevention before using the Inverter with the Braking Resistor Unit connected Note 1 Set L8 01 to 1 before operating the Inverter with the braking resistor without thermal relay trip contacts Note 2 The Braking Resistor Unit cannot be used and the deceleration time cannot be shortened by the Inverter if L3 04 is set to 1 i e decelerating stall prevention e To prevent the Unit from overheating make a power supply sequence as shown below or connect the thermal relay trip output of the Unit to the external fault input terminal of the Inverter to interrupt the running of the Inverter e 200 V Class with 0 4 to 7 5 kW Output and 400 V Class with 0 4 to 15 kW Output Braking Resistor Unit B1 P Q C Inverter i B2 B O Q Thermal relay trip contact 2 37 Installation Chapter 2 e 200 V Class with 11 kW or more Output and 400 V Class with 18 5 or more Output Braking Resistor Unit Braking Unit Thermal relay trip contact Thermal relay trip contact e Connecting Braking Units in Parallel When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel use the wiring and connectors shown in the following diagram There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master
423. s the speed limit d5 03 2 d5 04 0 e Speed limit bias setting 50 d5 05 50 When a forward speed limit and a speed limit bias have been set the speed range of the torque control is from the speed limit bias setting to the speed limit setting speed limit bias setting In effect the speed limit range is extended by the speed limit bias in both the forward and reverse directions Output torque 4 Forward direction d5 05 d5 05 When the speed exceeds the reverse speed limit the torque is increased in the forward direction Torque reference value Motor speed Reverse Forward rotation j rotation When the speed exceeds the forward speed limit the torque is increased in the reverse direction Effective range of z torque control n Limit opposite d Reverse to speed limit direction setting A Speed limit setting Torque Reference Adjustment e Primary Delay Time Constant for Torque Reference Filter e The time constant of the primary filter in the torque reference section can be adjusted 6 24 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e This parameter is used to eliminate noise in the torque reference signal and adjust the responsiveness to the host controller This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control d5 02 Torq Ref Filter 0to 1000 ms
424. s used without discon necting the jumper wire 3 Set the time constant with the following parameter when adding a primary delay filter to an analog input Analog input filter time constant H3 12 This filter time constant applies to all three of the analog inputs 4 The frequency bias setting setting 2 is different from the frequency bias 2 setting setting D in the operation of the Inverter if the calculation results in a negative value The frequency bias will be limited to 0 and frequency bias 2 will rotate the motor in the reverse direction 5 The frequency bias and frequency bias 2 cannot be set together for two analog inputs A set ting error OPEO7 will result if an attempt is made to set them e Analog Input Characteristics with Gain 100 0 and Bias 0 0 e Auxiliary Frequency Reference Setting 0 Frequency Bias Setting 2 Frequency Bias 2 Setting D PID Feedback Setting B Frequency Reference H3 09 Setting 1F 10099 77777777 Xena 100 6 93 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e Frequency Gain Setting 1 Output Voltage Bias Setting 4 DC Braking Current Setting 6 Overtorque Detection Level Setting 7 100 ccce 10V 0 10 V Note 1 If 1 is set the final gain will be equal to the result of multiplication by the set value of H3 02 Note 2 The setting 7 is only valid for overtorque detection 1 e Acceleration Deceleration Time Gain Setting 5 Note The accele
425. set value it means that integral operation is strong The vibration will be reduced as the integral time I is lengthened Response Before adjustment After adjustment Time Reducing Short cycle Vibration If the vibration cycle is short and vibration occurs with a cycle approximately the same as the derivative time D set value it means that the derivative operation is strong The vibration will be reduced as the derivative time D is shortened If vibration cannot be reduced even by setting the derivative time D to 0 00 no derivative control then either lower the proportional gain P or raise the PID s primary delay time constant Response Before adjustment N After adjustment Time m Setting the Reference Hold Function b6 The reference hold or dwell function is used to temporarily hold the output frequency when starting or stopping a motor with a heavy load This helps to prevent stalling Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control Dwell Ref Start Advanced Dwell Advanced Time Start Dwell Ref Stop Advanced Dwell Time Advanced Stop These parameters cannot be changed during operation 6 57 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 The relation between these parameters is shown in the following diagram Output frequency b6 01 b6 02 6 04 Time 6 5 3 Tuning
426. setting Vit V f with Open Loop Control Torq Ref Lmt Sel Not applicable Basic or Ad vanced Explanation of Settings Description The communications torque reference torque limit reference is disabled The communications torque reference torque limit reference is enabled Note Set the parameter to 1 because the CompoBus D Communications Card does not support torque references or torque limit references e Selection of Operation for Communications Failures Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit VA with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector F9 06 BUSFautSel 0103 t jBasiorAdvaned Set the parameter according to the application Setting Description Inverter s status Fault output Deceleration 2 Decelerates to a stop with C1 02 set Coast to a stop Emergency stop time Decelerates to a stop according to the C1 09 setting Continuous operation See note Note If the parameter is set to 3 the Inverter will operates without references from the host controller Take necessary measures such as emergency stop measures to ensure safety 6 75 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 6 5 7 External Terminal Functions H m Multi function Input Settings H1 Setting Function 3 Wire Control with a forward reverse rotation input Control mode V f Open loop Flux w PG Vector Vector
427. sh key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions How to Change the Digital Operator Display from Japanese to English If the Digital Operator displays messages in Japanese change to the English mode using the following steps This manual provides descriptions for the English mode Power ON Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction eee l 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 Functlofis 521 1eJ2 ebI Sie ebPUhebs Nak ees AOL TE Ae BR SS GI ROL Saale e
428. sible with an external braking resistor Voltage frequen cy characteris tics Select vector control one from 15 types of fixed V f patterns or set a user V f pattern Protective Functions Model number 3G3FV A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4037 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 B4185 B4220 B4300 B4370 B4450 B4550 B4750 B411K B416K B418K B422K B430K E E E E E E Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal Instantaneous overcurrent protection Stops at approx 20096 of rated output current Overload protection Stops in one minute at approx 150 of rated output current Overvoltage protection Stops when main circuit DC voltage is approx 820 V Undervoltage protection Stops when main circuit DC voltage is approx 380 V Momentary pow er interruption compensation selection Stops for 15 ms or more By selecting the momentary power interruption mode operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s Cooling fin over heating Protection by thermistor Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits Charge indicator internal LED Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx 50 V or more 9 5 Specifications Chapter 9 Environment Model number 3G3FV A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4037 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 B4185 B4220 B4300 B4370 B4450 B4550 B4750
429. single phase motors Single phase motors are either capacitor start motors or split phase start motors The method for de termining rotation direction at startup is different If a capacitor start motor is used the capacitor may be damaged by a sudden electric discharge caused by Inverter output If a split phase start motor is used the starting coil may burn because the centrifugal switch does not operate m Ground Wiring e Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Q and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 O e Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or power tools e Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and mini mize the length of the ground wire Leakage current flows through the Inverter Therefore if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unsta ble e When using more than one Inverter be careful not to loop the ground wire 2 33 Installation Chapter 2 Countermeasures against Harmonics With the continuing development of electronics the generation of harmonics from industrial machines has been causing problems recently Refer to the following for the definition of harmonics i e harmonic currents with voltages and countermeasures against the generation
430. ssary measures for safety e Option Inverter Selection Setting 2 OFF The Inverter s frequency reference is enabled ON The Optional Card s frequency reference is enabled e With this setting the multi function input enables the frequency reference input from the Inverter itself or the one from Optional Card e The frequency reference input can be switched only when the Inverter is stopped e Be sure that b1 01 the frequency reference source selector has been set to 0 Operator or 1 exter nal terminal Only the frequency reference from the Optional Card will be enabled if b1 01 is set to 3 Option PCB 6 78 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e Setting 2 can t be selected if the 3G3IV PAI14B is being used and parameter F2 01 Al 14 Input Selec tor is set to O e External Baseblock N O Setting 8 OFF Normal operation ON Baseblock e External Baseblock N C Setting 9 OFF Baseblock ON Normal operation e With either of these settings the multi function input controls baseblock operation e Baseblock is an interruption of the Inverter output The motor coasts while the baseblock command is being input e The output frequency is retained internally so the speed search will start from the same frequency and the motor will be started up when the baseblock command is cleared To cancel the retained frequen cy turn OFF the run command once Then the retained frequency will be set to 0 e After a baseblock c
431. stant is wrong Refer to 8 1 3 Operation Errors and correct the setting e CPFOO or CPF01 is displayed This is a Digital Operator transmission fault The connection between the Digital Operator and the In verter may be faulty Remove the Digital Operator and then re install it If the Motor Does Not Operate e The motor does not operate when the Run Key on the Digital Operator is pressed e The operation method setting is wrong If parameter b1 02 run source is set to 1 control circuit terminal the motor will not operate when the Run Key is pressed Either press the Local Remote Key to switch to Digital Operator operation or set parameter b1 02 to 0 Digital Operator The Local Remote Key is enabled set value 1 or disabled set value 2 by means of parame ter 02 01 It is enabled when the drive mode is entered 8 14 Maintenance Operations Chapter 8 e The Inverter is not in operation mode If the Inverter is not in drive mode it will remain in ready status and will not start Press the Menu Key to display the operation mode and enter the drive mode by pressing the Enter Key e The frequency reference is too low If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1 09 minimum output frequency the Inverter will not operate Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency e There is a multi function analog input setting error If multi function analog inputs H3 05 and H3 0
432. start 5 5 2 V f Pattern Selection E1 03 Set the V f pattern with parameter E1 03 This parameter cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif m m OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector E1 03 V f Selection Oto F Quick start Esc Not applicable or Advanced The V f pattern settings can be divided into two categories the 15 preset patterns settings O through E and custom user set patterns setting F The factory default setting for E1 03 is F user defined V f pattern but the contents of this setting are actually the same as setting 1 m Selecting a Preset V f Pattern Settings 0 through E Refer to the following table when selecting one of the 15 preset patterns Characteristics Applications Setting Specifications General purpose These patterns are for general purpose 50 Hz applications 60 Hz Use these patterns when there is a roughly proportional relationship between the rotational speed and load such as in straight line conveyors Variable torque Use these patterns when there is a quadratic or cubic relationship between the rotational speed and load such as in fans or pumps 60 Hz Voltage saturation at 50 Hz 72 Hz Voltage saturation at 60 Hz 50 Hz cubic 50 Hz quadratic 60 Hz cubic 60 Hz quadratic 50 Hz low starting torque 50 Hz high starting torque 60 Hz low starting torque 60 Hz hi
433. t StallP De possible time Set cel Sel deceleration time is disregarded 3 Enabled Stall prevention using a braking resistance device or Braking Resistor Unit Note When a braking option braking resistance de vice Braking Resistor Unit or Braking Unit is used always set to 0 or 3 7 46 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range setting Display Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Stall pre Disabled Runs as set With vention dur a large load the motor may ing run stall Enabled Deceleration time 1 the deceleration time for the stall prevention function StallP Run is C1 02 were Sel Enabled Deceleration time 2 the deceleration time for the stall prevention function is C1 04 Stall pre Effective when L3 04 is 1 or 2 vention lev Set as a percentage of the el during Inverter rated output current run Note Usually setting is not nec essary StallP Run The default setting re Level duces the set values when the motor stalls Note When the control mode is changed the Inverter returns to default settings The open loop vector control default settings are given above m Reference Detection L4 Name Description Setting Default Control mode F range settin Display 9 3 Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector
434. t 80 of speed lost before the frequency reference was lost Ref Loss Note Frequency reference is Sel lost Frequency reference dropped over 90 in 400 ms m Fault Restart L5 Name Description Setting Default Control mode tti Display TERIS ERES Vit vit Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Number of Sets the number of auto restart auto restart attempts Automatically restarts attempts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run frequency Num of Restarts Auto restart Sets whether a fault contact operation output is activated during fault selection restart 0 Not output Fault contact is not activated Restart Sel 4 Output Fault contact is activated Torque Detection L6 Name Description Setting Default Control mode e tti Display LATOS SRM Vit vit Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Torque Overtorque detection detection disabled selection 1 Detection during speed agree only Operation continues after detection Minor fault Detection during run Operation continues after detection Minor fault Torq Det 1 Detection during speed Sel agree only Inverter output is shut off after detection Fault Detection during run Inverter output is shut off after detection Fault Torque Vector control Motor rated detection torque is s
435. t after PID control 0 0 to 100 0 OK A A A A 6 51 RE as a percentage of the 100 0 PID Limit maximum frequency b5 07 PID offset Sets the offset after PID control 100 0 0 0 OK A A A A 6 52 adjustment as a percentage of the to PID Offset Maximum frequency 100 0 b5 08 PID primary Sets the time constant for low 0 00 to 0 00 OK A A A A 6 52 delay time pass filter for PID control 10 00 constant outputs in 1 second units PID Delay Note Not usually necessary to Time set b5 09 PID output Selects whether the PID output 0 1 0 NO A A A A 6 52 characteris is reflected in positive or tics selec negative characteristics tion 0 Positive characteristics Increased output frequency Oo increases feedback value Pee i 1 Negative characteristics EVO Increased output frequency decreases feedback value b5 10 PID output Sets the multiplier for the final 0 0 to 1 0 NO A A A A 6 53 gain calculation result of PID control 25 0 PID control value Note Normally it is not neces sary to change the factory EM settings Adjust the level of PID influence when us ing Frequency reference PID control 7 9 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range setting Display Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector PID output Selects operation when the final reverse calculation result of PID control selection is a negative value 0 Disable reverse I
436. t the following three parameters to specify the detection method of communications external fault input Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V A with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector F9 01 EFO Selection 0 1 0 Basicor Advanced Explanation of Settings Description Normally open contact A communications external fault is input with the bit turns ON Normally close contact A communications external fault is input with the bit turns OFF Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector F9 02 EFO Detection 0 1 0 Basic or Advanced Explanation of Settings Description Always detects communications external faults Detects communications external faults during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default V f V f with Open Loop Flux number range setting Control PG Vector Vector F9 03 EFO Fault Action 0to3 1 Basic or Advanced 6 74 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Explanation of Settings Setting Description Inverter s status Fault output Deceleration 2 Decelerates to a stop with C1 02 set Coast to a stop Emergency stop time Decelerates to a stop according to the C1 09 setting Continuous operation See note Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range
437. t the following values Motor core saturation coefficient 1 Core saturation coefficient when magnetic flux is 50 Motor core saturation coefficient 2 Core saturation coefficient when magnetic flux is 75 Normally these values aren t shown on the motor s nameplate so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting v f V A with Open Loop Control Saturation Comp 1 0 0 to 0 50 Not applicable Advanced Saturation Comp 2 0 00 to 0 75 Note It is possible to operate the motor with the default settings but motor efficiency may decrease Parameter E2 09 is used to compensate for torque lost mechanically in the motor Normally it isn t nec essary to change this setting but it can be adjusted when there is a large torque loss to the motor s bearings or to a fan or pump connected to the motor This parameter cannot be changed during opera tion Set the mechanical loss as a percentage of the motor s rated output power W Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit v f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector E2 09 Mechanical Loss 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 Not applicable 6 33 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 m Setting the Slip Compensation Gain With flux vector control parameter C3 01 sets the motor s temperature compensation gain Adjust this setting when a torque
438. t to 0 through CompoBus D communications Applies only to flux vector con trol Set F9 05 to 0 torque limit disabled Maintenance Operations Minor fault display DEV flashing Speed Deviation Meaning The speed deviation has been greater than the setting in F1 10 for longer than the setting in F1 11 Chapter 8 Probable causes and remedies e The load is too large Lighten the load e The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short Lengthen the acceleration time and decelera tion time e The load is locked Check the mechanical system e The settings in F1 10 and F1 11 aren t appropriate Check the settings in F1 10 and F1 11 e The torque limit is set to 0 through CompoBus D communications Applies only to flux vector con trol Set F9 05 to 0 torque limit disabled EFO Opt External Fit External fault Communications option e An external fault was input from an Optional Com munications Card Reset the external fault from the Optional Com munications Card Remove the cause of the external fault input EF3 flashing External Fault 3 External fault Input terminal 3 EF4 flashing External fault Input terminal 4 EF5 flashing EF6 flashing EF7 flashing External fault Input terminal 5 External fault Input terminal 7 EF8 flashing External fault Input termi
439. t voltage V Mid Output NEA ee Frequency 1 05 Voltage B E1 12 E1 13 Mid voltage B FA Et 1 FMAX E1 06 E1 04 Base Frequency Hz Voltage Note Set as follows E1 06 E1 11 E1 O4 Base Note This parameter becomes voltage disabled if E1 11 and E1 12 are set to 0 Note 1 These are values for a 200 V class Inverter Double these values for a 400 V class Inverter Note 2 When the control mode is changed the Inverter reverts to default settings The open loop vector control default settings are given above Motor Setup E2 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 g Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Motor rated Sets the motor rated current in current 1 A units Note These set values will be come the reference val ues for motor protection torque limits and torque control These values will auto matically be set if they were set during auto tun ing Motor rated Sets the motor rated slip in Hz slip units Note These set values will be come the reference val Motor ues for slip compensation Rated Slip These values will be auto matically set if auto tuning is started Motor Rated FLA Motor Sets the motor no load current no load in 1 A units current Note These values will be auto No Load matically set if auto tuning Current is started
440. tall prevention function Enabled deceleration time 2 Use deceleration time in C1 04 for stall prevention function e When setting 1 or 2 enabled is selected deceleration is started if the run stall prevention level s cur rent continues for more than 100 ms The motor is accelerated back to the reference frequency again when the current falls below this level Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector L3 06 StallP Run Level 30 to 200 Basic or Advanced Not applicable Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation e This setting is valid when L3 05 is set to 1 or 2 e Normally it isn t necessary to change this setting e Decrease this setting when the motor s capacity is small compared to the Inverter s capacity or stalling occurs when the motor is operated with the default setting The standard target setting is 2 to 3 times the motor s rated current Set this current value as a percentage of the Inverter s rated current i e 10096 corresponds to the Inverter s rated current 6 102 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Run Stall Prevention Example L3 05 1 or 2 Output current L3 06 Run stall prevention level Time Output frequency The output frequency is controlled to prevent stalling Time m Frequency Detection Settings L4 Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid a
441. target value to either a multi function analog input or the frequency reference current Setting Feedback Values for PID Control The following guidelines can be used to select feedback values for PID Control 0g Gm Multi function analog input Set B for the function selection of multi function analog input terminal Terminal 16 16 H3 05 to select the PID feedback value Frequency reference current Set B for the function selection of frequency reference current Terminal 14 terminal 14 H3 09 to select the PID feedback value Note 1 Use the gain and bias settings for the analog inputs to adjust the feedback value 6 50 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Note 2 PID control feedback cannot be set for more than one analog input Note 3 Use different settings for the PID target value and the PID feedback value Adjust the responsiveness of the PID control by means of the proportional gain P integral time I and derivative time D Parameter Display name Setting i Default Valid access levels number range setting vit Vif with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector PID Gain i i Advanced PID I Time i Advanced PID D Time f Advanced These parameters can be changed during operation Explanation of Set Values e Optimize the responsiveness by adjusting it while operating an actual load mechanical system Re fer to Adjusting PID Control on page 6 55 e Any cont
442. te with the frequency reference and run command specified in b1 01 the frequency reference source selector and b1 02 the run command source selector ON Operate with the frequency reference and run command set at the Digital Operator e With this setting the multi function input selects the input method for the frequency reference and run command e The input method can be switched only when the Inverter is stopped e The Digital Operators LOCAL REMOTE Key is disabled when this function has been set in a multi function input Note 1 There is no difference between two modes if the parameters b1 01 and b1 02 are both set to 0 Note 2 The above values are set through the Digital Operator and the frequencies are stored in fre quency references 1 through 8 d1 01 through d1 08 or the inching frequency reference d1 09 in remote or local mode Note 3 Multi function inputs 1 through 6 are enabled in remote or local mode The stop command is however disabled in local mode only if the 3 wire sequential set value is 0 Note 4 If the run command is input when switching the Inverter to remote mode from local mode the run input will be ignored to ensure safety Turn the run command OFF once Then turn the run command ON again in remote mode If the parameter b1 07 LOC REM RUN Sel is set to 1 the run command will not be ignored In this case the Inverter may operate immediately when switched to remote mode from local mode Take nece
443. tegral function is used at all times m Setting and Adjusting the Fault Detection Functions e PG Disconnection Stopping Method F1 02 This parameter sets the stopping method that is used when the signal from the PG is lost Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector FL02 PGFdbklossSe 003 i X B B Note B Basic or Advanced Not applicable Settings Setting Function Ramp to Stop Deceleration stop using deceleration time 1 C1 02 Coast to Stop Free run stop Fast Stop Emergency stop using the fast stop time C1 09 Alarm Only Continue operation Display PGO and continue operation with V f control e PG Disconnection Detection Time F1 14 A PG disconnection will be detected if a disconnection status lasts for the following time or longer 5 47 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Note The motor speed will not be controlled while the PG is disconnected Set this time as short as possible in any application where safety cannot be ensured Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vit V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector e Overspeed Settings F1 03 F1 08 and F1 09 Overspeed refers to an excessive motor speed These parameters set the conditions for an overspeed fault and the stopping method that is used when an ov
444. ter setting e The parameter setting is outside of the valid setting range Limit range error OPE03 Multi function input e One of the following errors has been made in the multi function Terminal selection error input H1 01 to H1 06 settings e The same setting has been selected for two or more multi function inputs e An UP or DOWN command was selected independently They must be used together e More than two out of the following four items are set UP DOWN commands Hold Accel Decel Speed Speed commands and Sample Hold for analog frequency refer ence e Speed Search 1 61 and Speed Search 2 62 were selected at the same time e External Baseblock N O 8 and External Baseblock N C 9 were selected at the same time e The UP DOWN commands 10 and 11 were selected while PID control b5 01 was enabled e The Terminal 13 14 Switch 1F was selected but the terminal 14 function selector H3 09 wasn t set to frequency reference 1F e The Speed and Speed commands are not set at the same time e The NO and NC contacts of an emergency stop input are set at the same time OPE05 Optional Card The Optional Card was selected as the frequency reference Sequence Select selection error source by setting b1 01 to 3 but an Optional Card isn t con nected OPE06 Control mode e V f control with PG feedback was selected by setting A1 02 to 1 PG Opt Missing selection error but a PG Speed Control Card isn t
445. the Digital Operator e Hook the Digital Operator on clicks A of the front cover in the arrow 1 direction as shown in the follow ing illustration e Press the Digital Operator in the arrow 2 direction until it snaps shut with clicks B Clicks A Clicks B Note Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those mentioned above otherwise the Inverter may malfunction due to imperfect con tact or break m Removing the Front Cover of Inverters with 18 5 kW Output or More e The front cover can be removed without removing the Digital Operator from the Inverter provided that the Inverter model is one with an output of 18 5 kW or more e Loosen the four screws of the front cover and move the front cover slightly upwards to remove the front cover 2 13 Installation Chapter 2 2 2 2 Terminals Terminal Block Configuration 200 V Class with 0 4 kW Output Control PPBEBIEEISERIE Lslslelolel lela Power input Braking Resistor Motor BUSES EVE o C9 5 2 14 Installation Chapter 2 m Main Circuit Terminals e 200 V Class Model 3G3FV A2004 to A2075 A2110 to A2150 B2185 to B2220 B2300 to B2750 E Maximum 0 4 to 7 5 kW 11 to 15 kW 18 5 to 22 kW 30 to 75 kW applied motor capacity Power supply input terminals 3 phase 200 to 230 VAC 50 60 Hz
446. the motor axis Remove the load e There was a setting fault during auto tuning Check the rated current setting Change if necessary e The PG pulse number setting is incorrect Check the setting and change if necessary e There is a motor bearing problem Turn the Inverter off and rotate the motor by hand Replace the motor if it doesn t turn smoothly Motor speed The torque reference value exceeded 100 during auto tuning Motor speed fault e There is a broken disconnected motor power wire Check and replace wiring components if necessary e The PG pulse number setting is incorrect Check the setting and change if necessary e The acceleration time is too short Increase acceleration time 1 C1 01 e A load is connected to the motor axis Remove the load 5 37 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Fault display Probable cause and remedy Accelerate Motor acceleration fault The motor doesn t accelerate within the prescribed time e The torque limit function is operating gt Initialize the torque limit parameters H7 01 to H7 04 e he acceleration time is too short Increase acceleration time 1 C1 01 e A load is connected to the motor axis Remove the load Rated Slip Rated slip fault The rated slip setting can t be tuned within the prescribed time e A load is connected to the motor axis Remove the load Saturation 1 Core saturation coefficient
447. time in one cycle can be used for braking deceleration 9 14 Specifications Chapter 9 e Standard Models Inverter Approx Minimum Voltage Maximum Resistor Number of Units braking connection class applicable motor specifications See note torque resistance capacity kW For one Unit Used Connectible 70 W 200 Q 70 W 200 Q 260 W 100 Q 260 W 70 Q 390 W 40 Q 520 W 30 Q 780 W 20 Q 2400 W 13 6 Q 3000 W 10 O 4800 W 8 Q 4800 W 6 8 Q 3000 W 10 O 3000 W 10 Q 4800 W 6 8 Q 4800 W 6 8 Q 4800 W 6 8 Q 70 W 750 Q 70 W 750 Q 260 W 400 Q 260 W 250 Q 390 W 150 Q 520 W 100 Q 780 W 75 Q 1040 W 50 Q 1560 W 40 Q 4800 W 32 Q 4800 W 27 2 Q 6000 W 20 O 9600 W 16 Q 9600 W 13 6 Q 6000 W 20 O 9600 W 13 6 Q 6000 W 20 O 9600 W 13 6 Q 9600 W 13 6 Q 9600 W 13 6 Q 9600 W 13 6 Q 1096 ED Q Note 1 The Connectable column indicates the maximum number of Braking Resistor Units that can be connected to a single Inverter or Braking Unit Note 2 Do not use aresistor with a resistance of less than the minimum connection resistance shown above Otherwise the Inverter or Braking Unit will be damaged 9 15 Specifications Chapter 9 e Braking Resistor Unit Dimensions mm Figure 1 Mounting 150 min Screws 30 min A 30 min Figure 2 Mounting 200 min
448. tings and in indicated in parentheses and indicate values for the 400 V class 4 6 Trial Operation Chapter 4 e The following is a setting example for a 200 V class Inverter with an input voltage of 230 V Key sequence Display Explanation xd kb Displays initialize mode Displays program mode Puts the Unit in program mode tl 5 i0times i Displays the input voltage setting display Press to change data The leading digit will flash Causes the to flash 2 m m n Set to 3 The set values are overwritten Entry Accepted is displayed for approximately 0 5 seconds Returns to the input voltage display Check that the data has been updated Returns to the program mode display t m Setting the Power Supply Voltage Short Pin 400 V Class Inverter of 18 5 kW or More Set the power supply voltage short pin when setting the parameter E1 01 Insert the short pin into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage It is factory set to the 440 V connector when shipped Note 1 The above figure is the 400 V class Inverter 18 5 to 45 kW Note 2 Be sure to turn off the power supply switch and wait for at least one minute three minutes for models larger than 30 kW before removing the front panel and setting the pin 4 7 Trial Operation Chapter 4 4 2 5 Auto tuning m Auto tuning Operation e Execute auto tuning and the m
449. tion Parameter Display name Setting range Default Valid access levels number setting vi v f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector E2 10 Tcomp Iron Loss 0 to 65535 Not applicable Note 1 The default setting varies with the Inverter s capacity The above setting applies to 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverters Note 2 Set the iron core loss in 1 W increments The default setting does not normally need to be changed Note 3 The set value is used as the reference value for the torque compensation function 6 39 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 6 5 Common Functions This section summarizes the functions that can be used in common among the various modes and provides detailed explanations of their operations 6 5 1 Summary of Common Control Functions An OK in the control mode column indicates that the parameter can be changed in that control mode The functions that can be used in common are marked with a x and described in more detail later in this section Application Function Sequence Comments Settings such as the reference input method Control mode Vif w PG Open loop Vector Flux Vector DC Braking DC braking function settings Speed Search Speed search function settings Delay Timers Timer function settings PID Control x PID control settings Reference Hold Accel deceleration time dwell function se
450. tion command NC contact KEB deceleration operation for momentary power interruption command NO contact Speed torque control change ON Torque control Zero servo command ON Zero servo lock Speed control ASR proportional gain switch ON C5 03 m Digital Outputs H2 Parame ter No Name Description Setting Default range settin Display 9 9 name Multi func Terminal 9 to 10 Sel tion contact output ter minal 9 to 10 Control mode V f with Open PG loop vector Multi func Terminal 25 Sel tion output 1 terminal 25 Multi func Terminal 26 Sel tion output 2 terminal 26 e Digital Outputs List Setting value Function During run 1 Control mode V f w PG Open loop Vector Flux vector Excitation Frequency ref out agree 1 detection width L4 02 Desired frequency ref setting agree 1 ON Output frequency L4 01 detection width L4 02 7 38 Frequency detection 1 ON L4 01 2 output frequency z L4 01 detection width L4 02 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Setting Function Control mode value Vif Open loop Flux w PG Vector vector Frequency detection 2 ON Output frequency 2 L4 01 or output frequency S L4 01 detection width L4 02 Inverter operation ready READY After initialization no faults During DC bus low voltage
451. tion OFF delay time the timer function output turns OFF Operation Example Timer function input ON ON Timer function output ON ON b4 01 b4 02 b4 01 b4 02 m Setting PID Control b5 The PID control function is a control system that matches a feedback value i e a de tected value to the set target value Combining proportional P integral I and deriva tive D control makes control possible even for a mechanical system with dead time The PID control provided by the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter is not suited for control that requires a responsiveness of 50 ms or less This section explains the PID control applications and operations along with the param eter settings and tuning procedure 6 46 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e PID Control Applications The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the Inverter Application Control contents Sensors used example Speed control Speeds are matched to target values as speed Tacho generator information in a mechanical system Speed information for another mechanical system is input as target values and synchronized control is executed by feeding back actual speeds Pressure control Pressure information is returned as feedback for Pressure sensor stable pressure control Flow control Flow information is returned as feedback for accurate Flow sensor flow cont
452. tion input ON OFF or OFF ON and the corresponding change in the control mode The timer setting is effective only when 71 Speed Torque Control Change has been set in one of the multi function inputs H1 01 through H1 06 6 27 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 During the timer delay the value of the 3 analog inputs will retain the values they had when the ON OFF status of speed torque control switching signal was changed Use this delay to make any preparations for the change in the control mode Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with OpenLoop Flux Control Vector Vector d5 06 Ref Hold Time 0to1000 ms o Not applicable Frequency Reference and Speed Limit The frequency reference during speed control is set with b1 01 Reference Source The speed limit during torque control is set with d5 03 Speed Limit Selection It is possible to assign the frequency reference and speed limit functions to the same analog input termi nal 13 or 14 Torque Reference and Torque Limit If the torque reference has been assigned to a multi function analog input or the frequency reference current terminal the input s function changes when the control mode is switched between torque con trol and speed control e During speed control The analog input terminal is used as the torque limit input e During torque control The analog input terminal is used as t
453. to the C1 01 Acceleration time 1 display Returns to the C1 Accel Decel function selection Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 3 3 Operation Mode Operation mode is the mode in which the Inverter can run When running the Inverter press the Enter Key from the operation mode display to bring up the monitor display Run commands can t be received from any other display Once the Unit is running it can be switched to other modes Many parameters can t be changed when the Inverter is running Refer to Chapter 7 Parameter Lists for details Bring up monitor displays such as the frequency reference output frequency output current and output voltage as well as fault information and the fault history in operation mode 3 10 Preparing for Operation Chapter 3 Operations in Operation Mode modes parameters status 1 Power ON MENU Operation mode Frequency reference setting display Al t Output frequency display All Output current display All Output voltage display Al t Contents of fault trace J Function selection U3 fault history Contents of fault history Al Function selection U1 Monitor Various monitors 3 11 Preparing
454. too long do not use this compensation function Use the DC injection braking multi function input set value 60 instead and raise the motor magnetic flux in advance while the motor is stopped m Setting Speed Search b3 The speed search function finds the speed of a coasting motor and starts up smoothly from that speed It is effective in situations such as switching from a commercial power supply The speed search function applies a lower voltage than normal and finds the speed at the current flow ing at that time The speed search is determined to be completed when the frequency is lowered from the maximum frequency or a set frequency and the current that is output falls below a fixed value When the speed search is completed the speed is accelerated to the frequency reference according to the acceleration time that has been set For V f with PG or flux vector control detection occurs at the motor speed with PG feedback Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit u With Open Loop Control ud This parameter cannot be changed during operation Note When the control mode is switched the factory default setting changes as follows V f control 0 V f with PG 1 open loop vector 0 flux vector 1 6 44 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Explanation of Settings Sew Comes O Speed search disabled Motor starts from minimum output frequency Speed search enab
455. tor Turn the main circuit power supply off and then on again m Fault Displays and Processing Fault Display Meaning Probable causes and remedies OC The Inverter output current e A short circuit or ground fault occurred at the In Overcurrent exceeded the overcurrent verter output A short or ground fault can be detection level caused by motor burn damage worn insulation or a damaged cable e The load is too large or the acceleration decelera tion time is too short e A special purpose motor or motor with a capacity too large for the Inverter is being used e A magnetic switch was switched at the Inverter s output Reset the fault after correcting its cause GF The ground fault current at the e A ground fault occurred at the Inverter output Ground Fault Inverter s output exceeded A ground fault can be caused by motor burn dam approximately 80 of the age worn insulation or a damaged cable Inverter s rated output current Reset the fault after correcting its cause PUF The fuse in the main circuit is e The output transistor has failed because of a short DC Bus Fuse Open blown circuit or ground fault at the Inverter output Check whether there is a short circuit between the following terminals A short circuit will damage the output transistor B1 3 o T1 U T2 V T3 W o T1 U T2 V T3 W Replace the Inverter after correcting the cause 8 2 Maintenance Operatio
456. trol change ing timer from ON to OFF or OFF to ON until the control is actually changed in ms units Note This function is enabled when the multi function input speed torque con trol change is set In the speed torque control switching timer the three analog inputs hold the values of when the speed torque control change changes Always be sure to allow time for this process to finish com pletely Ref Hold Time 7 2 4 Motor Constant Parameter Lists m V f Pattern E1 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range settin Display 9 3 Vit Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Input Sets the Inverter input voltage in voltage units of 1 V setting Note This setting is used as the reference value for func Input tions such as the protec Voltage tion functions 7 24 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range setting Vit vt Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Motor Standard fan cooled motor selection general purpose motor Special motor Inverter only motor Special motor Vector Motor control only motor Selection Note This setting is used as the reference value for func tions such as the protec tion functions V f pattern 0 to E Select from the 15 preset selection patterns F Custom user
457. trol circuit terminal z m BS DIBRI Note For safety reasons the reset operation will not function when a forward or reverse run command is being input Use the reset after turning OFF the run command 1 10 Introduction Chapter 1 1 3 New Functions The following software versions have been implemented for the 3G3FV Series to add and upgrade functions August 1996 Software Ver VSG101032 S1032 April 1997 Software Ver VSG101040 S1040 Sept 1998 Software Ver V8G101043 S1043 Sept 1999 Software Ver V8G101113 S1113 Sept 2000 Software Ver V8G101114 S1114 The software version can be confirmed using the 5 digit number display for the FLASH ID for U1 14 This section describes the new functions and improvements for each software version Refer to Chapter 5 Basic Operation and Chapter 6 Advance Operation 1 3 1 Software Ver VSG101040 CompoBus D DeviceNet Communications Card The CompoBus D Communications Card can be used to connect the Inverter to a DeviceNet network The following function additions and improvements were made to support this new functionality e CompoBus D Addition to the Frequency Reference Selection Parameter b1 01 A function was added to Frequency Reference Selection so that the Inverter frequency reference can be input via DeviceNet communications e CompoBus D Addition to the Run Source Selection Parameter b
458. trong impact Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction Wiring Precautions N WARNING WARNING N WARNING N WARNING Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been turned OFF Not doing so may result in electrical shock Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel Not doing so may result in electrical shock or fire Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit Not doing so may result in injury Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 Q or less for the 200 V AC class or 10 Q or less for the 400 V AC class Not connecting to a proper ground may result in electrical shock A Caution N Caution A Caution A Caution N Caution A Caution Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short circuiting in external wiring Not doing so may result in fire Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power sup ply voltage An incorrect power supply may result in fire injury or malfunction Connect the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the manual Not doing so may result in fire Be sure to wire correctly and securely Not doing so may result in injury or damage to the product Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block Not doing so may result in fire injury or damage to the product Do not connect an AC power to the U
459. tting Vit V f with Open Loop Control PG Vector Torque Limit Fwd 0 to 300 Not applicable Basic or Advanced Torque Limit Rev Torque Limit Fwd Rgn Torque Limit Rev Rgn The following diagram shows the relationship between each parameter and the output torque Output torque Forward direction L7 01 L7 04 Regenerative torque Motor speed Reverse Forward Regenerative torque L7 03 L7 02 Reverse direction Note When the torque limit function is engaged the torque control has priority and motor speed control and compensation will be ignored so the acceleration deceleration times might be lengthened and motor speed might be reduced m Limiting Torque with Analog Inputs The following two analog inputs that can be used to limit torque Multi function analog input terminal 16 Frequency reference current terminal 14 Use either or both of these inputs as needed with parameters H3 05 and H3 09 These parameters can not be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Terminal 16 Sel Oto1F 1F Basic or Advanced Terminal 14 Sel 1to 1F 1F Advanced 6 29 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Settings The following table shows only those settings related to the torque limit function Setting Forward Torque Limit Reverse Torque Li
460. ttings Droop Control Droop control settings Energy Saving Multi function input Sets energy saving control by ener gy saving reference Zero Servo Zero servo settings Accel Decel Acceleration deceleration time settings S Curve Acc Dec S curve characteristics for accel decel times Motor Slip Comp Slip compensation function settings Torque Comp Torque compensation function settings ASR Tuning Speed control tuning Carrier Freq Carrier frequency settings Hunting Prev Hunting prevention settings Factory Tuning Adjustment for open loop vector control Reference Preset Reference Frequency reference settings when using Operator Reference Limits Frequency upper and lower limit settings Jump Frequencies Prohibited frequency settings Sequence Up Down Accel Decel stop hold frequency setting Torque Control Torque control settings and tuning V f Pattern Motor Setup Motor settings Control Method 2 Control mode settings for second motor V f Pattern 2 Motor Setup 2 Parameter settings for second motor Options PG Option Setup Parameter settings for a PG Speed Control Card Al 14 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Command Card DI 08 16 Setup Parameter settings for a Digital Command Card AO 08 12 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog
461. ully operate in the constant output area i e in frequency range as high as or higher than the rated frequency If the high performance control of the motor is required in the constant output area V f characteristics to compensate for voltage increases caused by the motor inductance must be set These parameter settings are not required for normal motor control Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif V f with Open Loop Control Mid Frequency B Advanced Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting V f VAwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector Mid Voltage B Advanced Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting Vit V f with Open Loop Flux Control PG Vector Vector Base Voltage Advanced Quick startup 6 66 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Note The above upper limit values are for 200 V class Inverters Double the values for 400 V class Inverters Output voltage V VMAX E1 05 E1 12 Frequency Hz FA E1 11 FMAX E1 06 E1 04 Note 1 Set so that the following condition will be satisfied E1 06 lt E1 11 E1 04 Note 2 The function is disabled if the parameters E 11 and E1 12 are both set to 0 0 Note 3 If auto tuning is executed the parameters E1 05 and E1 13 will be set to the set voltage Two motor Switching Control
462. unction Input Settings H1 01 through H1 06 e V f Mode Select Setting D When one of the multi function inputs is set to D the input can be used to enable and disable the speed control loop The speed control loop is disabled normal V f control when the multi function input is ON e ASR Integral Reset Setting E When one of the multi function inputs is set to E the input can be used to switch the speed control loop between P control and PI control P control integral reset is used when the multi function input is ON 5 5 5 Adjusting Speed Control Loop ASR Gain m Gain Adjustment Procedure Use the following procedure to adjust the gain with the mechanical system and actual load connected e Gain Adjustments at Minimum Frequency Operate the motor at the minimum frequency Increase C5 03 ASR proportional gain 2 to a level where there is no vibration Decrease C5 04 ASR integral time 2 to a level where there is no vibration Monitor the Inverter s output current and verify that it is less than 50 of the Inverter s rated current If the output current exceeds 50 of the Inverter s rated current decrease C5 03 and increase C5 04 Ron e Gain Adjustments at Maximum Frequency 1 Operate the motor at the maximum frequency 2 Increase C5 01 ASR proportional gain 1 to a level where there is no vibration 3 Decrease C5 02 ASR integral time 1 to a level where there is no vibration e Gain Adjustments for Integr
463. unction is used to stop start the out put frequency temporarily when driving a motor with a heavy load Output frequency Droop Control b7 Name Display name Droop control gain Droop gain Description Sets the slip as a percentage of maximum frequency when the maximum frequency is specified and the rated torque occurs Note Droop control is not per formed when the setting is 0 0 Setting range Default setting Control mode Vit control Vif with PG Open loop vector Flux vector Setting range Default setting Control mode Vit control Vif with PG Open loop vector Flux vector Droop control delay time Droop delay time Droop control responsiveness parameter Note When hunting or vibration occurs increase the val ue 7 11 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 m Energy Saving b8 Name Description Setting Default Control mode range setting Display Vif Vif Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Energy Sets the Inverter output voltage saving gain when the energy saving command is input Note Enabled when the ener Energy gy save mode command Save Gain is set for multi function in put Set as a percentage of the V f pattern voltage Energy Sets the energy saving effective saving fre range minimum frequency in quency Hz
464. unications e Selection of Operation for Communications Errors Parameter F9 06 A setting was added to select the operation of the Inverter when a communications error is detected The selection can be made according to the application e g a deceleration stop free run stop contin uing operation etc e Torque Limit Torque Reference Operation Selection via Communications Parameter F9 05 A function was added to set the torque limit and torque reference for torque control from communica tions This enables controlling torque operation from communications when the vector with PG control mode is used Note The CompoBus D Communications Card does not support the torque limit torque reference func tion Leave this function disabled m V f Control with PG and Flux Vector Control for Two motor Switching Control Parameter E3 01 Settings were added for V f Control with PG and Flux Vector Control to the control modes for the second motor enabling feedback control of 2 motors with 1 Inverter Note 1 Wiring for the pulse generator or encoder must be switched between the two motors Note 2 Use a pulse generator with the same specifications for both motors There is only one group of parameters for the pulse generator Motor Parameter Autotuning Parameter C8 30 An autotuning function was added to autotune the motor parameters for special motors m Ground Fault Protection Operation Selection Parameter L8 10 A setting was add
465. up Parameter settings for a CompoBus D Communications Card Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Function Comments Control mode V f Open loop Flux w PG Vector Vector Terminal Digital Inputs Function selection for multi function inputs Digital Outputs Function selection for multi function outputs Analog Inputs Adjustment function selection for external analog inputs Analog Outputs Adjustment function selection for multi function analog outputs Serial Com Setup Not Used Do not change this setting Protection Motor Overload Sets electrical thermal functions that protect the motor PwrLoss Ridethru Selects the power loss processing method Stall Prevention Accel Decel stall prevention settings and selection Ref Detection Frequency detection settings and selection Fault Restart Fault restart function settings Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 by torque Torque Limit Torque limit settings Hdwe Protection Hardware overheating and phase loss protection settings Operator Monitor Select Selects the Operator s display and setting methods Key Selections Operator s key function selection and other parameters 6 1 2 Torque Limit Function With open loop vector control the torque limit can be applied at an arbitrary value be cause the torque output by the motor is calculated internally The torque limit function is
466. uption and operation will be re started at this frequency the next time that a run command is input The stored output frequency will be cleared from memory if the UP or DOWN command is turned ON while the run command is OFF Note Select and set one of the following functions for multi function input Do not set more than one of them otherwise a setting error OPE3 will result Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold Setting A UP and DOWN Commands Settings 10 and 11 e Trim Control Increase and Decrease Settings 1C and 1D e Analog Frequency Reference Sample Hold Setting 1E e The operation of the up down function is shown in the following timing chart Output frequency Upper limit 774 N 777 M Mt nm Accelerates to lower limit d4 01 1 Same frequency rd d4 01 20 Lowerlimit dus dl D o ELE DR EIE ys e Forward Stop UP command ON Reference frequency reset Speed Agree signal r3 i i see note DOWN command Power supply ON ON Note The Speed Agree signal remains ON while the run command is ON and the motor is not accelerat ing or decelerating e Fault Reset Setting 14 OFF Normal operation ON Resets faults when input goes from OFF to ON Normal operation when no fault has occurred 6 82 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e With this setting the multi function input resets faults that have occurred e When a fault has occurred be sure to find out what kind of
467. urrent b3 Speed search b3 01 Beginning speed search b3 02 Speed search operation current c Tuning C1 Accel Decel C1 01 Accel Time 1 C1 02 Decel Time 1 1 8 Introduction Chapter 1 1 2 Nomenclature m Panel Protection cover top and bottom SYSDRIVE 3G3FV INVERTER OV CLASS Jan coe eee Digital Operator X WARNING _ Front cover Terminals Introduction e Terminals with Front Cover Removed Example 200 V Class Inverter with 0 4 kW Output phas SUEEEEEEERE TOglzleleds e se 2pm Power input Braking Resistor Motor o ETE CHARGE HARGE o 9 Chapter 1 Control circuit terminals Main circuit terminals 1 9 Introduction Chapter 1 Digital Operator DRIVE FWD REV REMOTE d Operation Mode Indicators EE MEN EET EE Gaa DRIVE Lit when in operation mode FWD Lit when there is a forward command input 7 REV Lit when there is a reverse command input SEQ Lit when the forward reverse command from the control circuit terminal is enabled REF Lit when the frequency reference from ET control circuit terminals 13 and 14 is enabled Data Display Two line LCD that displays data for monitoring OMRON DIGITAL OPERATOR AIVOPIJOE parameter names and set values with 16 charac
468. used to enable or disable the multi function analog input e Turning the input OFF has the same effect as setting H3 05 the multi function analog input selector for terminal 16 to1F e ASR Selection Setting D OFF V f control with PG feedback speed control with speed feedback ON Normal V f control with PG feedback Disables speed feedback control e With this setting the multi function input can be used to switch V f control with PG feedback to Nor mal V f control e t is possible to switch between these control modes during operation e ASR Integral Reset Setting E OFF Operates with Pl control speed control loop ON Operates with P control speed control loop The speed control s integral values are reset by the integral time constant e This function is valid only in V f control with PG feedback mode when parameter F1 07 is set to 0 Setting F1 07 to 0 disables ASR integral operation during acceleration deceleration e t is possible to switch between these speed control modes during operation e UP and DOWN Commands Settings 10 and 11 UP command DOWN command Operation Acceleration Deceleration Hold Hold e With these settings the multi function inputs can be used to control the Inverter s output frequency e When using this function be sure to set both the UP command setting 10 and the DOWN command setting 11 in 2 multi function inputs An OPEO3 option f
469. ut is ON for 100 ms continuously the analog value that is input 100 ms after the analog frequency reference sample hold input turns ON will be sampled and retained e The retained analog value will be kept on hold until the next sampling period e All the following analog inputs are applicable Frequency reference input voltage Pin 13 Frequency reference input current Pin 14 Multi function analog input Pin 16 Analog Input Cards 3G3IV PAI14U 3G3IV PAI14B Note Select and set one of the following functions for multi function input Do not set more than one of them otherwise a setting error OPE3 will result Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold Setting A e UP and DOWN Commands Settings 10 and 11 e Trim Control Increase and Decrease Settings 1C and 1D e Analog Frequency Reference Sample Hold Setting 1E Sample hold OFF on OFF on OFF on OFF command 100ms 100ms 100ms Analog input Analog output and frequency refer D ence hold value Frequency reference hold value 6 84 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e External Faults Settings 20 through 2F e With this setting the multi function input can be used to stop the Inverter or output an alarm when a malfunction or fault occurs in a peripheral device e There are 16 external fault inputs available with all 16 combinations of the following variables Select the setting with the desired combination Input leve
470. utput current Note Do not change the torque compensation gain when using open loop vector control 7 16 Parameter Lists Chapter 7 Name Description Setting Default Control mode Display range setting Vit vt Open Flux name control with loop vector PG vector Torque The torque compensation delay compensa time is set in ms units tion delay Note Usually setting is not nec time essary Adjust in the following cir cumstances When the motor is vibrat Torq Comp ing increase the set val Time ues When the responsiveness of the motor is low de crease the set values Starting When using open loop vector torque val control these parameters set ue for the motor s forward and reverse ward starting torque compensation values as a percentage of the motor s rated torque F TorqCmp start Note Effective for reducing the Starting starting time with friction torque val loads or lifting machinery ue rever se Note Not effective when start ing motor 2 if using a re R TorqC mp generative starting sys start tem Starting Sets the rise time constant ms torque time for the starting torque value constant Note The starting torque time TorqCmp constant is disabled if set Delay T between 0 and 4 ms Note When the control mode is changed the Inverter reverts to default settings Th
471. uts Analog Outputs Function selection for analog outputs Serial Com Setup Not Used Do not change these settings Protection Motor Overload Overload protection settings and selection PwrLoss Ridethru Selects the power loss processing method Stall Prevention Stall prevention settings and selection Ref Detection Frequency detection settings and selection Fault Restart Fault restart function settings Torque Detection Overtorque detection settings and selection Torque Limit Torque limit settings vector control only Hdwe Protection Overheating and phase loss protection settings Operator Monitor Select Selects the display and setting methods Key Selections Key function selection and other parameters m Setting Parameters in Program Mode The parameters that can be displayed and changed will vary depending on the access level that has been set In the Quick start level the first parameter b1 01 will be displayed when the Enter Key is pressed at the program mode display In the Basic level the first function b1 will be displayed when the Enter Key is pressed at the program mode display In the Advanced level the first group b will be displayed when the Enter Key is pressed at the program mode display For setting examples refer to Setting Parameters in Each Access Level on page 3 6 3 26 Preparing for Operation
472. value as a percentage of the Inverter s rated current i e 10096 corresponds to the Inverter s rated current Acceleration Stall Prevention Example L3 01 1 Output current L3 02 Acceleration stall prevention level Time Output frequency The output frequency is controlled to prevent stalling Time Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting yr Vitwith Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector 6 100 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Note 1 This parameter cannot be changed during operation Note 2 N A Not applicable e There is normally no need to change this setting e Set this parameter when a high speed motor is being used in the high speed range the high frequen cy range above the base frequency The standard target setting is the motor s rated current Set this current value as a percentage of the Inverter s rated current i e 10096 corresponds to the Inverter s rated current Acceleration stall i L3 02 prevention level Acceleration stall prevention level L3 03 Acceleration stall prevention limit Output frequency E1 06 Base frequency Fa e When the motor is used in the high speed range the acceleration stall prevention level is automatically lowered to provide smoother acceleration The acceleration stall prevention limit L3 03 limits how much the acceleration stall prevention level is lowered so t
473. ven finer gain adjustment adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform Pa rameter settings like those shown in the following table will be necessary to observe the speed wave form 5 41 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Parameter Setting Explanation H4 01 Analog output selection terminal 21 Settings that allow multi function analog output 1 H4 02 Analog output gain terminal 21 to be used to monitor the ASR input H4 03 Analog output bias terminal 21 H4 04 Analog output selection terminal 23 Settings that allow multi function analog output 2 H4 05 Analog output gain terminal 23 to be used to monitor the motor speed H4 06 Analog output bias terminal 23 H4 07 Analog output level selection This setting allows a 0 to 10 V signal range to be monitored The multi function analog outputs have the following functions with these parameter settings Terminal 22 is the multi function analog output common There are separate commons terminals 27 and 37 for the 3G3FV CUE CE Multi function analog output 1 terminal 21 Outputs the Inverter s ASR input 0 to 10 V Multi function analog output 2 terminal 23 Outputs the actual motor speed 0 to 10 V We recommend monitoring both the ASR input and the motor speed in order to observe a response delay or deviation from the reference value as shown in the following diagram Example Waveforms ASR input command N Motor speed
474. verter warning or alarm detected Refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance Operations for appropriate actions V f Over Setting V f setting too high 5 38 e The torque reference exceeded 100 and the non load current ex ceeded 70 of the rated motor current during auto tuning The settings are incorrect for the rated voltage or rated frequency Correct the settings The motor is connected to a load Disconnect the load Basic Operation Chapter 5 5 4 4 Speed Loop ASR Structure The following block diagram shows the structure of the speed loop 48 C5 01 03 Secondary current reference Frequency reference U1 22 Detected speed L7 01 04 C5 02 04 Note In vector flux control the ASR s P gain is the maximum frequency standard m Regular Gain Settings C5 01 and C5 02 Parameter C5 01 sets the proportional gain of the speed loop ASR and C5 02 sets the integral time Both of these parameters can be changed during operation Parameter number Display name ASR P Gain 1 Setting range 0 00 to 300 00 Factor Default setting Valid access levels Vif Control V f with PG Open Loop Vector Flux Vector ASR Time 1 0 000 to 10 000 s Note B Basic or Advanced Not applicable Low speed Gain Settings C5 03 C5 04 and C5 07 Use these parameters to use different proportional gain and integral time settings for
475. vity amperage of at least 10 mA per Inverter e When using a general leakage breaker choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0 1 s or more 2 28 Installation Chapter 2 e Installing a Magnetic Contactor If the power supply of the main circuit is to be shut off because of the sequence a magnetic contactor can be used instead of a molded case circuit breaker When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to stop a load forcibly however the regenerative braking does not work and the load coasts to a stop e A load can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor however may cause the Inverter to break down To maintain the service life of the Inverter s internal relays and electrolytic capacitors it is rec ommended that this operation be performed no more than once every 30 minutes e When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption e When using the Braking Resistor Unit be sure to arrange a sequence in which the thermal relay of the Unit turns the magnetic contactor OFF e Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block Input power supply can be connected to any terminal on the terminal block because the phase sequence of in
476. vo feedback control drive applications drives e Precision speed control e Torque control Note Vector control has a greater starting torque and more precise speed control than V f control so use of vector control is recommended whenever possible Use V f control in the following types of applications When several motors are being operated When special motors such as submersible motors or spindle motors are being used Situations in which auto tuning cannot be used When operation is being coordinated with an older inverter control system 5 1 2 Frequency Reference Settings from Control Circuit Terminals These settings are required when inputting analog voltage or current signals from the control circuit terminals m Frequency Reference Selection b1 01 Parameter b1 01 is used to select the reference source it cannot be changed during operation Parameter Display name Setting Default Valid access levels number range setting vif V f with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector b1 01 Reference Source 0to 4 i Quick start Basic or Advanced 5 4 Basic Operation Chapter 5 Reference Source Settings Setting Reference source Operator Digital Operator Terminals Control circuit terminals analog inputs Serial Com Not used Do not set Option PCB Optional Card CompoBus D Communications Card SYSMAC BUS I F Card Analog Command Card or Digital Command Card
477. when the last fault occurred Motor Speed Motor speed when the last fault occurred Output Voltage Output voltage when the last fault occurred DC Bus Voltage The main circuit DC voltage when the last fault occurred Output kWatts Output power when the last fault occurred Torque Reference Torque reference when the last fault oc curred The rated torque 100 Input Term Sts Input terminal status when the last fault oc curred Same format as U1 10 Output Term Sts Output terminal status when the last fault occurred Same format as U1 11 Inverter status Inverter operating status when the last fault occurred Same format as U1 12 Elapsed time Fault History Display Last Fault Elapsed operating or power on time when the last fault occurred Function Information on the last fault Fault Message 2 Information on the 2 to last fault Fault Message 3 Information on the 3 to last fault Fault Message 4 Information on the 4 to last fault Elapsed Time 1 Elapsed running or power on time when the last fault occurred Elapsed Time 2 Elapsed running or power on time when the 2nd to last fault occurred Elapsed Time 3 Elapsed running or power on time when the 3d to last fault occurred Elapsed Time 4 Elapsed running or power on time when the 4 to last fault occurred
478. will not operate even when an input terminal suitable for forward stop and reverse stop is turned ON When using a 3 wire sequence refer to the timing chart on page 5 16 and input the proper signals When using a 2 wire sequence set multi function inputs H1 01 through H1 06 to a value other than 0 e The Inverter is not in operation mode If the Inverter is not in operation mode it will remain in ready status and will not start Press the Menu Key to display the drive mode and enter the drive mode by pressing the Enter Key e The frequency reference is too low If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1 09 minimum output frequency the Inverter will not operate Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency e There is a multi function analog input setting error If multi function analog inputs H3 05 and H3 09 are set to 1 frequency gain and if no voltage cur rent is input then the frequency reference will be zero Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct e Frequency reference 2 is specified with multi step speed operation and auxiliary frequency reference is not input If multi function analog input H3 05 is set to O auxiliary frequency reference and if multi step speed reference is used the auxiliary frequency reference will be treated as frequency reference 2 Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value terminal 16 are correct
479. with the parameter e The default setting does not normally need to be changed Set the parameter to 0 if the output power cable is as long as or longer than 100 m or the stray capacitance of the output cable is excessively high and the ground fault protective function operates by mistake Parameter Display name Setting i Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif VA with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector L Spd IGBD Pricl Advanced Not ap plicable Parameter Display name Setting i Default Valid access levels number range setting Vif VA with Open Loop Flux Control Vector Vector OL2 Chara L Advanced Spd e The inverter overload OL2 characteristics can be set according to the application e Set parameter L8 17 to 0 and parameter L8 10 to 1 if the motor has metal friction noise or to increase the carrier frequency 6 109 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 e f the output torque at low speed is a problem i e a heavy load is connected at low speed set the parameter L8 18 to 1 and the parameter L8 19 to O Note 1 Do not set both parameters L8 17 and L8 19 to 0 otherwise the Inverter may be damaged In that case use a higher rank Inverter with parameter L8 17 set to 0 and parameter L8 19 set to 1 Note 2 Usea higher rank Inverter or set parameter C6 01 Carrier Freq Max to 2 kHz if a high load is continuously connected at low speed in flux vector control mode
480. y stall eration 1 Enabled Acceleration stopped when L3 02 level is exceeded Acceleration starts again when the current is returned StallP Ac 2 Intelligent acceleration cel Sel mode Using the L3 02 level as a basis acceleration is automatically adjusted Set acceleration time is disregarded L3 02 Stall pre Effective when L3 01 is setto 1 0 to 150 NO B B B X 6 100 vention lev or 2 Set as a percentage of 200 el during Inverter rated output current accelera Note Usually setting is not nec tion essary The default set StallP Ac ting reduces the set val cel Lvl ues when the motor stalls L3 03 Stall pre Sets the lower limit for stall 0 to 50 NO A A A X 6 100 vention lev prevention during acceleration 100 el during as a percentage of the Inverter accelera rated output current when tion operation is in the frequency range above the maximum StallP CHP Voltage frequency E1 06 Lvl Note Usually setting is not nec essary L3 04 Stall pre 0 Disabled Deceleration as 0to3 1 NO B B B B 6 101 vention dur set If deceleration time is ing decel too short a main circuit eration overvoltage may result 1 Enabled Deceleration is stopped when the main circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level Deceleration restarts when voltage is returned 2 Intelligent deceleration mode Deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that in Inverter can decelerate in the shortes
481. y the following formula Maximum output frequency E1 04 x Frequency reference upper limit d2 01 100 Check to be sure that the parameter E1 04 and d2 01 settings are suitable a Inverter Overload OL2 is Detected For a 400 V Inverter if the carrier frequency C6 01 is set to a value higher than the default setting the Inverter overload OL2 detection value will decrease in consideration of an increase in the heat that will be generated by the change in the carrier frequency Since the detection value is set to decrease by approximately 1596 for every increase of 2 kHz from the default setting the Inverter overload OL2 may be detected prior to the motor overload OL1 depending on the set value Set the carrier frequency to a lower level If Inverter Does Not Operate Due to an EF Error Forward and Reverse Commands Input e The sequence is faulty The EF error will be detected if the forward command and reverse command are input at the same time for over 0 5 seconds Check and correct the sequence e Stray current causes malfunction The Inverter input may always remain ON due to stray current from the control section As shown in the following illustration a current may flow in the direction shown by an arrow to turn ON the Inverter input 8 20 Maintenance Operations Chapter 8 when the power output from the control section is below 24 VDC or when the power is turned OFF If this occurs insert a diode as indicat
482. ys heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property NDANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage NWARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PC means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product OMRON 1996 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in a

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

- Element14  専用ソフトウェアeXport ユーザーマニュアル    Manual  Samsung M1714 User Manual  取扱説明書 - SANUS  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file